SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Front cover

Certification Guide Series:
IBM Tivoli Usage and
Accounting Manager V7.1
Implementation
Detailed architecture and components
discussion

Installation and configuration
processing

Monitoring IT usage and
chargebacks




                                                     Budi Darmawan



ibm.com/redbooks
Certification guide series ibm tivoli usage and accounting manager v7.1 implementation sg247692
International Technical Support Organization

Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and
Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation

March 2009




                                               SG24-7692-00
Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in
 “Notices” on page vii.




First Edition (March 2009)

This edition applies to Version 7, Release 1 of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
(product number 5724-033).
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2009. All rights reserved.
Note to U.S. Government Users Restricted Rights -- Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP
Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
Contents

                 Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
                 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii

                 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
                 The team that wrote this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
                 Become a published author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
                 Comments welcome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x

                 Chapter 1. Certification overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
                 1.1 IBM Professional Certification Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
                    1.1.1 Benefits of certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
                    1.1.2 Tivoli Software Professional Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
                 1.2 Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
                    1.2.1 Job role description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
                    1.2.2 Key areas of competency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
                    1.2.3 Prerequisite skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
                    1.2.4 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
                 1.3 Certification objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
                    1.3.1 Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
                    1.3.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
                    1.3.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
                    1.3.4 Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
                    1.3.5 Job creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
                    1.3.6 Problem determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
                    1.3.7 Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
                 1.4 Recommended study resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
                    1.4.1 IBM Redbooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

                 Chapter 2. Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
                 2.1 Planning the implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
                 2.2 Account code structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
                 2.3 Collector selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
                 2.4 Implementation platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
                 2.5 Database sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
                    2.5.1 CIMSLOADTRACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
                    2.5.2 CIMSSUMMARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
                    2.5.3 CIMSDETAIL and CIMSDETAILIDENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
                    2.5.4 CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
                 2.6 Report requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38


© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved.                                                                                      iii
Chapter 3. Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
                3.1 Installation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
                3.2 Installation prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
                   3.2.1 Platform requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
                   3.2.2 Configuring Microsoft Internet Information Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
                   3.2.3 Install the Microsoft Installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
                   3.2.4 Install Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
                   3.2.5 Install Microsoft SQL Server Report Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
                3.3 Application server installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
                3.4 Database configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
                   3.4.1 Database creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
                   3.4.2 Defining JDBC driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
                   3.4.3 Defining data sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
                   3.4.4 Initializing database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
                3.5 Enterprise Collector Pack implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
                3.6 Initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
                3.7 Installation verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
                   3.7.1 Verify the tables created during initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
                   3.7.2 Verify the contents of the CIMSRate table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
                   3.7.3 Verify the application status in IIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
                   3.7.4 Connect to the reporting Web application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
                3.8 Sample collection verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

                Chapter 4. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
                4.1 The Common Source Resource format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
                4.2 Account code hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
                4.3 User administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
                   4.3.1 User creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
                   4.3.2 User role definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
                   4.3.3 User and group mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
                4.4 Clients and scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
                   4.4.1 Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
                   4.4.2 Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
                   4.4.3 Client budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
                   4.4.4 Client contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
                4.5 Working with rates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
                   4.5.1 Rate group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
                   4.5.2 Rate codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
                   4.5.3 Alternate rates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
                   4.5.4 Proration table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
                   4.5.5 CPU normalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
                   4.5.6 Rate shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97




iv   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Chapter 5. Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.1 Integrated Solution Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.2 Load tracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.3 Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
   5.3.1 Tuning Web console for administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
   5.3.2 Tuning job processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
   5.3.3 Tuning report generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.4 Operating and updating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
   5.4.1 Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
   5.4.2 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
   5.4.3 Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Chapter 6. Job creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
6.1 XML job creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
   6.1.1 Job file structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
   6.1.2 Generic processing overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.2 Syntax of main Job Runner directives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
   6.2.1 Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
   6.2.2 Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
   6.2.3 Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
   6.2.4 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
   6.2.5 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
   6.2.6 Step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6.3 Integrator program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
   6.3.1 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
   6.3.2 Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
   6.3.3 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.4 Account code mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.5 Non-integrator steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
   6.5.1 Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
   6.5.2 Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
   6.5.3 Bill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
   6.5.4 Cleanup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
   6.5.5 Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
   6.5.6 DBLoad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
   6.5.7 DBPurge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
   6.5.8 Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
   6.5.9 File transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
   6.5.10 Wait file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
   6.5.11 Remote product deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
   6.5.12 Job conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
   6.5.13 Windows script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
   6.5.14 Java. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136



                                                                                                  Contents         v
6.5.15 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

                Chapter 7. Problem determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
                7.1 Job failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
                   7.1.1 Job logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
                   7.1.2 Output files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
                7.2 Database connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
                7.3 Web reporting problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
                7.4 Trace level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

                Chapter 8. Web reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
                8.1 Web reporting interface and user authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
                8.2 Web reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
                8.3 Producing reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
                8.4 Defining a new report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
                8.5 Batch reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

                Appendix A. Sample test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
                Sample test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
                  Answer key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

                Abbreviations and acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

                Related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
                IBM Redbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
                Other publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
                Online resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
                How to get Redbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
                Help from IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

                Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167




vi   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Notices

This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult
your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area.
Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that
does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's
responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document.
The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license
inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, North Castle Drive, Armonk, NY 10504-1785 U.S.A.

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such
provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION
PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer
of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made
to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may
make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at
any time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any
manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the
materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without
incurring any obligation to you.

Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their published
announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm
the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products. Questions on
the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products.

This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate them
as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and products.
All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business
enterprise is entirely coincidental.

COPYRIGHT LICENSE:

This information contains sample application programs in source language, which illustrate programming
techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs in
any form without payment to IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing application
programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for which the
sample programs are written. These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM,
therefore, cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs.




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved.                                                          vii
Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business
Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. These and other IBM trademarked
terms are marked on their first occurrence in this information with the appropriate symbol (® or ™),
indicating US registered or common law trademarks owned by IBM at the time this information was
published. Such trademarks may also be registered or common law trademarks in other countries. A current
list of IBM trademarks is available on the Web at http://www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml

The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United States,
other countries, or both:

   AIX 5L™                             Lotus®                               System z®
   AIX®                                Notes®                               Tivoli®
   CICS®                               Passport Advantage®                  TotalStorage®
   DB2 Universal Database™             PowerPC®                             WebSphere®
   DB2®                                Redbooks®                            z/OS®
   IBM®                                Redbooks (logo)   ®                  z/VM®
   Lotus Notes®                        System p®

The following terms are trademarks of other companies:

ITIL is a registered trademark, and a registered community trademark of the Office of Government
Commerce, and is registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office.

SUSE, the Novell logo, and the N logo are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States and
other countries.

Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, Siebel, and TopLink are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation
and/or its affiliates.

SAP, and SAP logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other
countries.

VMware, the VMware "boxes" logo and design are registered trademarks or trademarks of VMware, Inc. in
the United States and/or other jurisdictions.

Java, JDBC, JVM, Solaris, and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the
United States, other countries, or both.

Internet Explorer, Microsoft, MS, OpenType, SQL Server, Visual Basic, Windows Server, Windows, and the
Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.

Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.

Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.




viii    Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Preface

                 This IBM® Redbooks® publication is a study guide for the IBM Tivoli® Usage
                 and Accounting Manager V7.1 certification. It is aimed for IT professional who
                 want to be an IBM Certified Professional for this product.

                 IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 certification is offered through
                 the IBM Professional Certification program. It is designed to validate the skills
                 required of technical professionals who work in the implementation and
                 deployment of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1.

                 This book provides the necessary information to understand this topic. It includes
                 sample questions that help evaluate personal progress. It familiarizes the readers
                 with the types of questions that may be encountered in the exam.

                 This guide does not replace practical experience. This is not designed to be a
                 stand-alone guide for this topic. Instead, this guide should be combined with
                 educational activities and experiences and used as a very useful preparation
                 guide for exam.

                 For your convenience, the chapters are based on the certification objectives of
                 the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 implementation certification
                 test. Those requirements are planning, prerequisites, installation, configuration,
                 administration, and problem determination. Studying each chapter helps you
                 prepare for each objective of the exam.



The team that wrote this book
                 This book was produced by a team of specialists from around the world working
                 at the International Technical Support Organization, Austin Center.

                 Budi Darmawan is a project leader at the International Technical Support
                 Organization, Austin Center. He writes extensively and teaches IBM classes
                 worldwide on all areas of Tivoli and systems management. Before joining the
                 ITSO 10 years ago, Budi worked in IBM Global Services, IBM Indonesia as a
                 solution architect and lead implementer. His current interests include service
                 management, application management, business services management, and
                 Java™ programming.




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved.                                                     ix
Thanks to the following people for their contributions to this project:

               Wade Wallace
               International Technical Support Organization, Austin Center

               Terry Copeland
               IBM Software Group

               Jörn Siglen, Lennart Lundgren, Roy Catterall
               Authors of Deployment Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
               V7.1, SG24-7569 and IBM Tivoli Usage Accounting Manager V7.1 Handbook,
               SG24-7404



Become a published author
               Join us for a two- to six-week residency program! Help write a book dealing with
               specific products or solutions, while getting hands-on experience with
               leading-edge technologies. You will have the opportunity to team with IBM
               technical professionals, Business Partners, and Clients.

               Your efforts will help increase product acceptance and customer satisfaction. As
               a bonus, you will develop a network of contacts in IBM development labs, and
               increase your productivity and marketability.

               Find out more about the residency program, browse the residency index, and
               apply online at:
               ibm.com/redbooks/residencies.html



Comments welcome
               Your comments are important to us!

               We want our books to be as helpful as possible. Send us your comments about
               this book or other IBM Redbooks in one of the following ways:
                   Use the online Contact us review Redbooks form found at:
                   ibm.com/redbooks
                   Send your comments in an e-mail to:
                   redbooks@us.ibm.com




x   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Mail your comments to:
IBM Corporation, International Technical Support Organization
Dept. HYTD Mail Station P099
2455 South Road
Poughkeepsie, NY 12601-5400




                                                                Preface   xi
xii   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
1


    Chapter 1.   Certification overview
                 This chapter provides an overview of the skills requirements needed to obtain an
                 IBM Certified Deployment Specialist - IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
                 V7.1 certification. This chapter provides a comprehensive review of topics that
                 are essential for obtaining the certification:
                     1.1, “IBM Professional Certification Program” on page 2
                     1.2, “Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1” on page 6
                     1.3, “Certification objectives” on page 8
                     1.4, “Recommended study resources” on page 22




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved.                                                1
1.1 IBM Professional Certification Program
               Having the right skills for the job is critical in the growing global marketplace. IBM
               Professional Certification is designed to validate skill and proficiency in the latest
               IBM solution and product technology. It can help provide that competitive edge.
               The IBM Professional Certification Program Web site is available at:
               http://www.ibm.com/certify/index.shtml

               The Professional Certification Program from IBM offers a business solution for
               skilled technical professionals seeking to demonstrate their expertise to the
               world.

               The program is designed to validate your skills and demonstrate your proficiency
               in the latest IBM technology and solutions. In addition, professional certification
               may help you excel at your job by giving you and your employer confidence that
               your skills have been tested. You may be able to deliver higher levels of service
               and technical expertise than non-certified employees and move on a faster
               career track.

               The certification requirements are difficult, but they are not overwhelming. It is a
               rigorous process that differentiates you from everyone else. The mission of IBM
               Professional Certification is to:
                   Provide a reliable, valid, and fair method of assessing skills and knowledge.
                   Provide IBM with a method of building and validating the skills of individuals
                   and organizations.
                   Develop a loyal community of highly skilled certified professionals who
                   recommend, sell, service, support, and use IBM products and solutions.

               The Professional Certification Program from IBM has developed certification role
               names to guide you in your professional development. The certification role
               names include IBM Certified Specialist, IBM Certified Solutions/Systems Expert,
               and IBM Certified Advanced Technical Expert. These role names are for
               technical professionals who sell, service, and support IBM solutions. For
               technical professionals in application development, the certification roles include
               IBM Certified Developer Associate and IBM Certified Developer. An IBM Certified
               Instructor certifies the professional instructor.

               The Professional Certification Program from IBM provides you with a structured
               program leading to an internationally recognized qualification. The program is
               designed for flexibility by allowing you to select your role, prepare for and take
               tests at your own pace, and, in some cases, select from a choice of elective tests
               best suited to your abilities and needs. Some roles also offer a shortcut by giving
               credit for a certification obtained in other industry certification programs.


2   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
You can be a network administrator, systems integrator, network integrator,
            solution architect, solution developer, value-added reseller, technical coordinator,
            sales representative, or educational trainer. Regardless of your role, you can
            start charting your course through the Professional Certification Program from
            IBM today.


1.1.1 Benefits of certification
            Certification is a tool to help objectively measure the performance of a
            professional on a given job at a defined skill level. Therefore, it is beneficial for
            individuals who want to validate their own skills and performance levels, their
            employees, or both. For the optimum benefit, the certification tests must reflect
            the critical tasks required for a job, the skill levels of each task, and the frequency
            by which a task needs to be performed. IBM prides itself in designing
            comprehensive, documented processes that ensure that IBM certification tests
            remain relevant to the work environment of potential certification candidates.

            In addition to assessing job skills and performance levels, professional
            certification can also provide such benefits as:
               For employees:
               – Promotes recognition as an IBM certified professional
               – Helps to create advantages in interviews
               – Assists in salary increases, corporate advancement, or both
               – Increases self-esteem
               – Provides continuing professional benefits
               For employers:
               – Measures the effectiveness of training
               – Reduces course redundancy and unnecessary expenses
               – Provides objective benchmarks for validating skills
               – Makes long-range planning easier
               – Helps to manage professional development
               – Aids as a hiring tool
               – Contributes to competitive advantage
               – Increases productivity
               – Increases morale and loyalty




                                                              Chapter 1. Certification overview   3
For IBM Business Partners and consultants:
                   – Provides independent validation of technical skills
                   – Creates competitive advantage and business opportunities
                   – Enhances prestige of the team
                   – Contributes to IBM requirements for various IBM Business Partner
                     programs

               Specific benefits can vary by country (region) and role. In general, after you
               become certified, you should receive the following benefits:
                   Industry recognition
                   Certification may accelerate your career potential by validating your
                   professional competency and increasing your ability to provide solid, capable
                   technical support.
                   Program credentials
                   As a certified professional, you receive, by e-mail, your certificate of
                   completion and the certification mark associated with your role for use in
                   advertisements and business literature. You can also request a hardcopy
                   certificate, which includes a wallet-size certificate.
                   The Professional Certification Program from IBM acknowledges the individual
                   as a technical professional. The certification mark is for the exclusive use of
                   the certified individual.
                   Ongoing technical vitality
                   IBM Certified Professionals are included in mailings from the Professional
                   Certification Program from IBM.


1.1.2 Tivoli Software Professional Certification
               The IBM Tivoli Professional Certification program offers certification testing that
               sets the standard for qualified product consultants, administrators, architects,
               and partners.

               The program also offers an internationally recognized qualification for technical
               professionals seeking to apply their expertise in today's complex business
               environment. The program is designed for those who implement, buy, sell,
               service, and support IBM Tivoli solutions and want to deliver higher levels of
               service and technical expertise.




4   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Benefits of being Tivoli certified
Tivoli certification provides the following benefits:
   For the individual:
   – IBM Certified certificate and use of logos on business cards
   – Recognition of your technical skills by your peers and management
   – Enhanced career opportunities
   – Focus for your professional development
   For the IBM Business Partner:
   – Confidence in the skills of your employees
   – Enhanced partnership benefits from the IBM Business Partner program
   – Billing your employees out at higher rates
   – Strengthens your proposals to customers
   – Demonstrates the depth of technical skills available to prospective
     customers
   For the customer:
   – Confidence in the services professionals handling your implementation
   – Ease of hiring competent employees to manage your Tivoli environment
   – Enhanced return on investment (ROI) through more thorough integration
     with Tivoli and third-party products
   – Ease of selecting a Tivoli Business Partner that meets your specific needs

Certification checklist
The certification process is as follows:
1. Select the certification that you want to pursue.
2. Determine which test or tests are required by reading the certification role
   description.
3. Prepare for the test, using the following resources provided:
   – Test objectives, discussed in 1.3, “Certification objectives” on page 8
   – Recommended educational resources, discussed in 1.4, “Recommended
     study resources” on page 22
   – Sample/assessment test, discussed in Appendix A, “Sample test” on
     page 157
   – Other reference materials
   – Opportunities for experience



                                                  Chapter 1. Certification overview   5
4. Register to take a test by contacting one of our worldwide testing vendors:
                   – Thomson Prometric
                   – Pearson Virtual University Enterprises (VUE)

               5. Take the test. Be sure to keep the Examination Score Report provided upon
                  test completion as your record of taking the test.

               6. Repeat steps three through five until all required tests are successfully
                  completed for the desired certification role. If additional requirements are
                  needed (such as another vendor certification or exam), follow the instructions
                  on the certification description page to submit these requirements to IBM.
               7. After you complete your certification requirements, you will be sent an e-mail
                  asking you to accept the terms of the IBM Certification Agreement before
                  receiving the certificate.
               8. Upon acceptance of the terms of the IBM Certification Agreement, an e-mail
                  will be sent containing the following electronic deliverables:
                   – A Certification Certificate in PDF format, which can be printed in either
                     color or black and white
                   – A set of graphic files of the IBM Professional Certification mark associated
                     with the certification achieved
                   – Guidelines for the use of the IBM Professional Certification mark
               9. To avoid unnecessary delay in receiving your certificate, ensure that we have
                  your current e-mail on file by keeping your profile up to date. If you do not
                  have an e-mail address on file, your certificate will be sent through postal
                  mail.

               After you receive a certificate by e-mail, you can also contact IBM at
               mailto:certify@us.ibm.com to request that a hardcopy certificate be sent by
               postal mail.



1.2 Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1
               This section explains certification requirements and objectives. The following
               topics are discussed:
                   1.2.1, “Job role description” on page 7
                   1.2.2, “Key areas of competency” on page 7
                   1.2.3, “Prerequisite skills” on page 7
                   1.2.4, “Requirements” on page 8




6   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
1.2.1 Job role description
            An IBM Certified Deployment Professional - IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
            Manager V7.1 implementation is a technical professional responsible for
            planning, installing, configuring, administering, and problem determination of an
            IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 solution. This individual will be
            expected to perform these tasks with limited assistance from peers, product
            documentation, and support resources.


1.2.2 Key areas of competency
            The following key areas of competency are required:
               Describe the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 architecture
               and components.
               Plan and design an IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 solution
               based on customer requirements and environment.
               Install and configure IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1
               infrastructure components.
               Use the Integrated Solutions Console to administer and manage the IBM
               Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 environment.
               Perform problem determination for IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
               V7.1.


1.2.3 Prerequisite skills
            The following are the required prerequisite skills for this certification:
               Strong working knowledge of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1
               infrastructure components
               Working knowledge of operating systems, networking, and firewall concepts
               Working knowledge of XML
               Working knowledge of shell and scripting
               Basic knowledge of WebSphere® Application Server
               Basic knowledge of databases, such as DB2®, Microsoft® SQL Server®, and
               Oracle®
               Basic knowledge of security (SSL, data encryption, system user accounts,
               and credentials)
               Basic knowledge of IIS



                                                              Chapter 1. Certification overview   7
Basic knowledge of LDAP

               Additionally, we recommend having working knowledge of BIRT.


1.2.4 Requirements
               This certification requires one test: test 012 - IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
               Manager V7.1 Implementation.



1.3 Certification objectives
               The certification has the following objectives:
                   1.3.1, “Planning” on page 8
                   1.3.2, “Installation” on page 11
                   1.3.3, “Configuration” on page 13
                   1.3.4, “Administration” on page 16
                   1.3.5, “Job creation” on page 17
                   1.3.6, “Problem determination” on page 19
                   1.3.7, “Reporting” on page 21

               For the most updated objectives of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
               Manager V7.1 Deployment Certification Test, refer to the following link:
               http://www-03.ibm.com/certify/certs/24108801.shtml


1.3.1 Planning
               Given the customer requirements and the financial organization prerequisites,
               discuss the key parameters and methods for installing IBM Tivoli Usage and
               Accounting Manager, so that a design document for the implementation of the
               IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager environment has been created, with
               emphasis on performing the following tasks:
                   Discuss the customer requirements in a workshop to show up the critical
                   path.
                   – Understand the financial system of the customer.
                   – Define the account code structure to fit current and future plans for the
                     customer environment.
                   – Select the key parameters needed for accounting.




8   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Plan IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager setup actions to be done.
   – Identify the data sources, identifiers, and rates to be used.
   – List the default collectors to be used and new collectors to be written.
   – Estimate the size of the database to be expected.
   Use the system management functions available.
   – Determine the method of scheduling jobs.
   – Define the data transfer solution to be implemented.
   – Determine the monitoring solution to be used for the environment.
   Clarify the operational view of the environment.
   – Define the reporting solution to be used (BIRT, Crystal or IIS reporting).
   – Check server placement in the secured network environment, regarding
     data collection.
   – Decide whether to use the financial modeler.
   Determine the licenses held or to be bought by the customer.

Given a list of planed collectors and data sources, determine if the required
collectors are available and supported for the proposed environment, so that a
list of collectors to be used has been documented, with emphasis on performing
the following tasks:
   Check for a sample collector reading the type of source (for each data
   source).
   Check the documentation for platform dependent components (for each
   collector), such as the Windows® Script File (WSF) collector for Windows
   only collection.
   List the result of all checks.

Given an overview of the current IT environment and the IBM Tivoli Usage and
Accounting Manager implementation design, check several parameters of the
different platforms regarding the functions and knowledge, which we recommend
for the platform to be used has been documented, with emphasis on performing
the following tasks:
   Determine the platform skill of the designate operations and administration
   team.
   Determine the database skill of the administration team.
   Check for mandatory collectors depending on a single platform.
   Check that the reporting solution to be used is supported.
   Determine if the use of Financial modeler is mandatory.


                                               Chapter 1. Certification overview   9
Verify the required size of the environment and whether it enforces the
                  separation of application parts (WebSphere, database, and reporting server).
                  Check for scalability needed in the environment.

               Given that the client understands the purpose of the Account Code structure,
               define the account code structure so that it can be configured into the product,
               with emphasis on performing the following tasks:
                  Educate the client management team about the purpose and use of the
                  Account Code structure.
                  Review with the client management team any current business accounting
                  structure and determine if that is how they desire to map the IBM Tivoli Usage
                  and Accounting Manager structure.
                  Define the Account Code structure.

               Given that the Account Code structure has been defined, determine, for each
               collector feed, which identifiers should be used for creating Account Code lookup
               tables for each collector, with emphasis on performing the following tasks:
                  For each collector feed, review the documented available identifiers.
                  Determine which identifiers should be used to map resource records to the
                  appropriate Account Code.
                  Determine how the Account Code lookup table will be built and maintained.

               Given the amount of collector input, calculate the amount of data stored base
               and the retention period, so that an estimate of the database size can be
               determined, with emphasis on performing the following tasks:
                  Identify the usage for the most critical tables
                   – Determine if resource utilization has to be collected.
                   – Estimate the number of account codes to be collected in the billing
                     summary.
                   – Count the data from the billing detail, which is based on the number of
                     rates and identifiers.
                   – Count the lines in ident.txt that feeds directly into the identifier table.
                  Identify the parameters multiplying the data sets.
                   – Determine the retention period in days.
                   – List the number of shifts for a day that needs different rate codes.
                   – Count the collection sources providing data.
                   – Estimate the number of distinct account codes.
                   – Estimate the number of resources used.


10   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
– Estimate the number of identifiers used.
               – Estimate the Identifier mix number based upon an understanding of the
                 collection process.
               Multiply all parameters.
               Define the point of archiving needed based on the capacity of the database
               system planned.

            Given the customer requirements, determine which reports will be required so
            that a list of all reports to be designed and published has been created, with
            emphasis on performing the following tasks:
               Define the Invoice reports to be used.
               Define the Account reports to be used.
               Check if Top usage reports are needed.
               Check if Variance reports are required.
               Determine the use of Trend reports in the environment.
               Check for valid Resource detail reports.
               Define all other and custom reports to be used.


1.3.2 Installation
            Given IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager planning has been completed,
            determine if the required IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
            prerequisites have been met so that the installation can be executed, with
            emphasis on performing the following tasks:
               Check application server prerequisites, such as Microsoft Internet Information
               Server and .NET Framework.
               Check database and connection to IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
               Manager.
               Determine the JDBC™ jar files for the appropriate database:
               – SQL database: sqljdbc.jar (From the Microsoft Web site)
               – Oracle database: ojdbc14.jar (From the Oracle Web site)
               – DB2 database for Linux®, UNIX®, and Windows: db2jcc.jar and
                 db2jcc_license_cu.jar
               – DB2 database for z/OS® UDB: db2jcc.jar and
                 db2jcc_license_cisuz.jar




                                                          Chapter 1. Certification overview   11
Check reporting prerequisites.
                   – Microsoft Report Viewer application for Web reporting
                   – Business Intelligence and Reporting Tools (BIRT) Report Engine and
                     Report Designer
                  Confirm additional requirements with the customer.
                  Check operating system requirements.
                  Check Web browser requirements.
                  Check hard drive space.
                  Check processor speed requirement.
                  Check memory requirement.
                  Check supported database versions.
                  Check database server system specifications.

               Given that the prerequisites have been met and the implementer has the
               appropriate privileges, install the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
               Server according to the customer’s requirements, so that the IBM Tivoli Usage
               and Accounting Manager server has been installed, with emphasis on performing
               the following tasks:
                  Obtain the software.
                   – Download it from the Passport Advantage® Web site.
                   – Load the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Installation CD.
                  Run the Enterprise Edition installation file and follow the installation wizard.

               Given that the database and IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager data
               source have been created, initialize the database so that database has the status
               of being initialized, with emphasis on performing the following tasks:
                  Initialize the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database.
                  Upgrade the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database from
                  previous versions.

               Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been
               installed, install the Enterprise Collector Pack (ECP), so that ECP has been
               installed, with emphasis on performing the following tasks:
                  Obtain the software.
                   – Download it from the Passport Advantage Web site.
                   – Load the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager installation CD.
                  Run the Enterprise Collector Pack (ECP) installation file and follow the
                  installation wizard.


12   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Given that ECP is installed, and new processes folder is created, check the
           connection path for data collection, so that the collection path set for processing
           is set and verified, with emphasis on performing the following tasks:
              Navigate the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC) for Configuration page.
              Confirm that the correct paths in the configuration page are listed for:
              –   Processes
              –   Job Files
              –   Sample Job Files
              –   Job Log Files
              –   Collector Log Files

           Given that the database has been initialized, run sample collector data so that
           the database can be populated with test collector data, with emphasis on
           performing the following tasks:
              Run RunSamples.bat to load sample data collection for verification.
              Check sample data collection results.

           Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager installation has been
           performed, validate the installation so that the installation can be verified as
           successfully executed, with emphasis on performing the following tasks:
              Verify the database initialization.
              Verify the connection to the Web reporting URL.
              Use the result of RunSamples.bat to verify installation.


1.3.3 Configuration
           Given that IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager has been installed and an
           account code structure has been designed with the customer, set up the account
           code structure using the Integrated Solution Console so that the Final Account
           Code hierarchy has been set, with emphasis on performing the following tasks:
              Define account code structure.
              Add account code levels’ starting offset, description, and length.
              Modify Standard account code structure.
              Create secondary or alternate account code structures.




                                                         Chapter 1. Certification overview   13
Given that IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been installed
               and an administrator account has been created in the Integrated Solutions
               Console (ISC), use the ISC to add new users, so that users can log on to Web
               Reports, with emphasis on performing the following tasks:
                  Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
                  Define new users.

               Given that IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been installed
               and an administrator user account has been created in the Integrated Solutions
               Console, add users to the ISC security group, so that the user can access the
               ISC, with emphasis on performing the following tasks:
                  Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
                  Assign user to roles.
                  List existing default security roles.
                  Enable security for the Embedded WebSphere Application Server.

               Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been
               installed and an administrator account has been created in the Integrated
               Solutions Console, add users to groups, so that the users are allowed to view
               only select reports, with emphasis on performing the following tasks:
                  Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
                  Define a new user group.
                  Add a user to the user group.

               Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been
               installed and configured, use the ISC to set up the calendar, with emphasis on
               performing the following tasks:
                  Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
                  Define a calendar for a particular year.

               Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been
               installed and a configured, use the ISC to add clients to the client table so that
               the client table has been updated, with emphasis on performing the following
               tasks:
                  Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
                  Remove sample clients before adding clients to the customer’s organization.
                  Add new client organization.




14   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been
installed and configured, and the clients have been added, add the client budgets
to the corresponding client, so that the client budgets have been created, with
emphasis on performing the following tasks:
   Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
   Assign a new budget to a client.

Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been
installed and configured and clients have been added, add the client contacts to
the client, so that the client has been updated, with emphasis on performing the
following tasks:
   Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
   Add client that needs to be added as a contact or contacts need to be added
   to it.

Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been
installed and configured, create a new rate group using the ISC, with emphasis
on performing the following tasks:
   Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
   Define a new rate group.

Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been
installed and a configured and rate groups have been added, add rate codes
using the ISC, so that new rate codes are available, with emphasis on performing
the following tasks:
   Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
   Define a new rate code.

Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been
installed and configured and rate groups have been created, add an alternate
table so that alternate rates are available, with emphasis on performing the
following tasks:
   Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
   Define new rate table

Given that IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been installed
and configured, create a proration table so that a proration table is available, with
emphasis on performing the following tasks:
   Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
   Define a proration table for a rate code.



                                               Chapter 1. Certification overview   15
Use prorate for collecting usage data for a rate code.

               Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been
               installed and configured, using the ISC, configure CPU normalization so that
               CPU Normalization has been set up, with emphasis on performing the following
               tasks:
                  Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
                  Use CPU normalization in Job files.
                  Define the CPU normalization percentage.
                  Select the rate codes to be normalized.

               Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been
               installed and configured, use the ISC to set rate shifts so that the rate shifts have
               been set to meet the customer’s requirements, with emphasis on performing the
               following tasks:
                  Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
                  Define rate shifts.


1.3.4 Administration
               Given the connection data, navigate to the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
               Manager menu so that the user can perform administration tasks in the ISC IBM
               Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager environment, with emphasis on
               performing the following tasks:
                  Connect to the Integrated Solution Console using a Web browser.
                  Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
                  Find the appropriate menu options in the portfolio navigation bar.

               Given the current environment data, the administrator can perform tasks to
               optimize the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager environment so that the
               IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager environment will run faster, with
               emphasis on performing the following tasks:
                  Determine the current database usage.
                  Plan runstats on a regular basis.
                  List long running reports.
                  Determine the tables and columns used for sorting.
                  Define indices on heavy used columns.




16   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Determine the memory usage of the WebSphere Application Server. Add
              physical memory if it is needed.
              Determine the CPU load.
              Add virtual or logical CPUs for parallel processing.
              For hardware limitations, evaluate the separation of the database and
              application servers, but keep the network limitations in mind.

           Given the Feed source name, set up load tracking so that the list of loaded data
           can be filtered to get an overview of specific data loads for selected jobs, with
           emphasis on performing the following tasks:
              Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
              Work with Load Tracking information.
              Perform filtering on the Load Tracking information for searching a collection.

           Given the access permissions and IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
           location, stop and start the application server so that all updates implemented
           will be activated in the files systems for further usage, with emphasis on
           performing the following tasks:
              Restart the procedure for the user interface.
              Verify application availability.


1.3.5 Job creation
           Given the parameters of data sources, use the XML job file language to generate
           a job so that the data is incorporated into the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
           Manager process file structure and database, with emphasis on performing the
           following tasks:
              Determine that sample job files that best suits the task.
              Copy the sample job file to the job file directory.
              Define or modify the integrator step for data input and processing.
              Run the job file validation to ensure that the syntax is correct.
              Before activating or adding any further steps, run the job and check the logs
              and the CSR file for correct content.




                                                           Chapter 1. Certification overview   17
Given input data source and manipulation instructions, create a setup where the
               job(s) will prepare the data, do account conversion, process billing, and finally
               load data so that reports are ready to be run, with emphasis on performing the
               following tasks:
                  Determine the sample job files that best suits the task.
                  Copy the sample job file to the job file directory.
                  Split the processing into more than one job for better handling.
                  Create and modify process steps as needed.
                   – Create integrator steps for reading data and performing data
                     manipulations.
                   – Set up resource conversion to recalculate values.
                   – Define the parameters of the billing step.
                   – Verify that the db load step is correct.
                   – Define the cleanup step parameters to clear old files from the process
                     directory.
                  Verify the job file.
                   – Ensure that the syntax is correct.
                   – Verify the operation without database loading.
                   – Check the actual load for errors and warnings.
                   – Verify that the data is loaded using the LoadTracking function.
                  Run a report to verify that data is loaded correctly.

               Given a raw data file or other data source and manipulation instructions, set up
               the integrator step to recalculate, aggregate, or manipulate the resources and
               filter for identifiers so that a CSR file is prepared for further processing, with
               emphasis on performing the following tasks:
                  Define the input section of an integrator step. Use Input, Files, or Collector
                  directives.
                  Add integrator stages to create, delete, or modify identifiers and do
                  calculation on resources.
                   – Create an aggregator for combining data for one identifier or for a time
                     frame.
                   – Create new resources or identifiers.
                   – Do not use drop fields, as they are not needed.
                   – Exclude or include data by any criteria.
                   – Do a ResourceConversion for recalculating resource values.


18   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
– Sort CSR data for output.
             Define an output stage to create a CSR or CSR+ file.

          Given identifiers and the account code table, use the integrator step to add an
          account code field mapping to determine who is using which resources, so that
          an account code conversion has been executed, with emphasis on performing
          the following tasks:
             Define the integrator step before billing and DBload.
             Use the integrator function CreateIdentifierFromTable to add an
             Account_Code identifier.
             Perform additional necessary conversions, such as an Aggregator stage.


1.3.6 Problem determination
          Given a validated job that does not execute successfully, review the
          corresponding log file to locate the error and resolve it so that the job can execute
          successfully, with emphasis on performing the following tasks:
             Execute a jobfile using either a job scheduler or manually through the
             Integrated Solutions Console.
             Check the job execution status using the Integrated Solutions Console.
             Read output messages for that job file execution.
             Find steps that are unsuccessful.
             Find error message for the unsuccessful step.
             Correct job errors and rerun the job.

          Given a validated jobfile that completes with a warning, review the corresponding
          log file to locate the error and resolve it so that the job can execute successfully,
          with emphasis on performing the following tasks:
             Execute the jobfile using either a job scheduler or manually through the
             Integrated Solutions Console.
             Check the job execution status using the Integrated Solutions Console.
             Read output messages for that job file execution.
             Find steps that have warning messages.
             Check warning message for the step.
             Correct job warnings and rerun the job.
             Determine rate code warning actions and whether to define the rate or ignore
             it.



                                                         Chapter 1. Certification overview   19
Given that within ISC the database connection fails, diagnose the issue so that
               the database connection can be reestablished, with emphasis on performing the
               following tasks:
                  Review the current trace and message log records.
                  Use the database management interface to check the database’s status.
                  Ensure that the user ID and password used by IBM Tivoli Usage and
                  Accounting Manager to connect is correct.

               Given that Web reporting is implemented and a report is timing out, review report
               values in the ISC and determine if the network connection is sufficient so that the
               issue can be identified, with emphasis on performing the following tasks:
                  Set the Web reporting interface timeout value.
                  Limit date selection for report execution.
                  Set up batch reporting for reporting.

               Given IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager is operational, define the
               default file names produced by process engines so that the names and their
               purposes are understood, with emphasis on performing the following tasks:
                  Identify the default output file for the Scan program.
                  Identify files for the Acct program, output file, and exception files.
                  Identify files for the Bill program, identifier file, billing detail, and billing
                  summary files.

               Given that the client wants to adjust the amount of information in the trace file,
               modify the detail level written out so that the message and trace logs provide the
               level of detail that the client requires, with emphasis on performing the following
               tasks:
                  Set the logging configuration from the Integrated Solutions Console.
                  Set the Trace file setting. The Trace message level can be set to FINE,
                  FINER, or FINEST.
                  Set the Log file setting. The Log message level can be set to SEVERE,
                  WARNING, or INFORMATION.




20   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
1.3.7 Reporting
           Given the need to produce an invoice or analyze billing or usage data, generate
           an IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager report according to the customer’s
           requirement so that billing or usage data can be loaded into a spreadsheet for
           analysis or invoices can be produced, with emphasis on performing the following
           tasks:
              Log in to the reporting Web application.
              Understand the report types in the Report list.
              Run spreadsheets for standard or crosstab types.
              Supply the desired report parameters.

           Given requirements to produce a report, define parameters so that the output
           satisfies the requirements. Given the requirement to produce a new report,
           define a new IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager report according to the
           new requirement so that a new report or spreadsheet can be generated, with
           emphasis on performing the following tasks:
              Log on to the reporting Web application.
              Select a new report type.
              Define the new report arguments.
              Save the new report or new spreadsheet.

           Given the need to manage the reporting Web interface, create and assign a role
           and remove the user used to access the reporting Web interface, and modify the
           security scheme for the Web interface so that appropriate users can access the
           reporting Web interface with the appropriate access, with emphasis on
           performing the following tasks:
              Define user access restriction.
              Define new user groups without administrative access.
              Activate report access security.
              Assign a report for user groups:




                                                         Chapter 1. Certification overview   21
1.4 Recommended study resources
               Courses and publications are offered to help you prepare for the certification
               tests. The courses are recommended, but not required, before taking a
               certification test. If you wish to purchase Web-based training courses or are
               unable to locate a Web-based course or classroom course at the time and
               location you desire, please feel free to contact one of our delivery management
               teams at:
                  Americas: tivamedu@us.ibm.com
                  EMEA: tived@uk.ibm.com
                  AP: tivtrainingap@au1.ibm.com

               Note that course offerings are continuously being added and updated. If you do
               not see the course(s) listed in your geography, please contact the delivery
               management team.


1.4.1 IBM Redbooks
               The following IBM Redbooks can be used as additional information sources:
                  IBM Tivoli Usage Accounting Manager V7.1 Handbook, SG24-7404
                  Financial management of IT resources allows an IT department to be
                  transformed from a cost center to a service provider. One aspect of this is
                  usage accounting, which helps the IT department understand the usage
                  patterns of its customers or users and allows for service charges that reflect
                  that usage. In addition, usage data demonstrates how IT operations can be
                  optimized to increasing efficiency.
                  Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager provides the tools to perform data
                  collection and accounting for IT-related usage from various sources. It even
                  allows the custom integration of data from nonstandard format sources. It
                  supports the whole life cycle of financial management from budgeting to
                  usage accounting and billing, and reporting. This book will help you
                  understand, install, configure, and use the new IBM Tivoli Usage and
                  Accounting Manager V7.1.
                  The book starts with an overview of Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
                  concepts and capabilities along with the structure of the product. The
                  installation and verification of each component is presented in detail. Sample
                  scenarios are executed and explained, including operating system usage
                  collection, virtual environment collection (VMware® ESX server and IBM
                  System p® partitioning), and Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS interface.




22   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Deployment Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1,
SG24-7569
This book is part of the Deployment Guide series. It provides a step-by-step
guide for deploying Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1. It is intended
to help an IBM or Business Partner service person plan and perform the
deployment of the product.
The discussion of Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager includes an
explanation of its architecture and components. Some planning and sizing
considerations before you implement the product are given, and some
guidelines on setting up service engagement for the product are also
included.
The deployment discussed in the book would be appropriate for a
demonstration or a small deployment system, although the information is
highly relevant for larger deployments also. This book also offers some usage
scenarios that can be used for demonstrating the product.




                                         Chapter 1. Certification overview   23
24   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
2


    Chapter 2.   Planning
                 This chapter discusses planning of the implementation of IBM Tivoli Usage and
                 Accounting Manager V7.1. The discussion consists of the following:
                     2.1, “Planning the implementation” on page 26
                     2.2, “Account code structure” on page 27
                     2.3, “Collector selection” on page 29
                     2.4, “Implementation platform” on page 31
                     2.5, “Database sizing” on page 32
                     2.6, “Report requirements” on page 38




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved.                                            25
2.1 Planning the implementation
               There are several important preparations that must be performed before
               implementing IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. The solution must be
               clearly understood by the implementation team. The solution is typically
               described in a design document.

               The design document takes its input from the client’s requirements and match
               them to the capability of the product. The IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
               Manager implementation design document should consist of the necessary
               details about how the implementation should be performed. It should contain the
               following design items:
                  Customer requirements in a workshop to show the critical path.
                   – Understand the financial system of the customer.
                   – Define the account code structure that most closely fits the near future
                     plans for the customer environment.
                   – Select the key parameters needed for accounting (limit them to a suitable
                     minimum for the pilot).
                  A project plan for the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager setup
                  actions to be done.
                   – Identify the data sources, identifiers, and rates to be used.
                   – List the default collectors to be used and new collectors to be written.
                   – Estimate the size of the database to be expected.
                  A definition about how to perform these available system management
                  functions.
                   – Determine the method of scheduling jobs.
                   – Define the data transfer solution to be implemented.
                   – Determine the monitoring solution to be used for the environment.
                  Describe the network architecture of the implementation. This includes the
                  platform selection and connectivity requirements.
                  Explain the reporting method needed and report requirements as dictated by
                  customer.
                  Determine the licenses held or to be bought by the customer.

               We discuss some of the important aspect of this design document in more detail
               in the subsequent sections.




26   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
2.2 Account code structure
        One of the most important aspects of planning is to decide on the account code
        structure. The account code structure determines the charging hierarchy of the
        target enterprise. All collected data must be mapped to the correct structure
        based on the defined account code structure.

        The account code structure must be defined early in the implementation
        because:
           It determines how to map the identifier to the account code.
           Account code granularity strongly influences database size calculation.
           Reporting and billing are all based on the account code structure.
           Changing the account code structure and mapping invalidates all the data
           that has been collected in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager.

        The charging hierarchy must match the enterprise’s financial and business
        accounting practices. It may have additional detail levels than the hierarchies
        needed by accounting.

        In Table 2-1, we use the department name as the top level. There are one or
        more department numbers possible for each department and the hosts are
        grouped by an application perspective. The billing requirement may only need to
        distinguish the department name and number, but usage monitoring may need
        the application and host information if they are available.

        Table 2-1 Account code for a department organization
         Description                               Length

         Department (short name)                   8

         Department number                         6

         Application                               8

         Host                                      32




                                                                  Chapter 2. Planning     27
For a multi-customer environment, the customer name is the top level. We define
               two additional levels in case the customer needs separated bills or rates for his
               projects and splitting up of follow-up contracts. See Table 2-2.

               Table 2-2 Account code for a multi customer environment
                Description                                Length

                Customer (short name)                      8

                Master contract number                     12

                Service contract number                    12

                Application                                8

                Host                                       32



                Tip: Changing the account code structure make processed data invalid, as it
                is based on different account code fields. You must plan the structure carefully
                before you start processing data.

               Account codes are mapped from identifiers. The mapping can be performed by
               parsing the identifier to extract the appropriate levels or using a lookup table for
               mapping the identifier to the account code. You must identify the appropriate
               mapping process for each type of collected data. Mapping for UNIX servers may
               be based on process name and path, while mapping for Windows client
               machines may be based on IP address or host name.

               The lookup tables have to be maintained for currency. Processes must be in
               place to ensure proper updating of the tables is performed. The table can be
               based on database tables that have to be extracted regularly or from a static text
               that must be maintained by an administrator.

               More about account code usage is discussed in 4.2, “Account code hierarchy” on
               page 82.




28   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
2.3 Collector selection
         We must determine if the required collectors are available and supported for the
         proposed environment. Some collectors run as a Windows Script File (WSF) and
         must run on a processing server on Windows-based platforms.

         The existing collectors for IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 are:
            AIXAAInput: AIX® Advanced Accounting for a logically partitioned IBM
            System p installation that includes support for AIX 5L™ V5.3 or later, AIX V6,
            and the Virtual I/O (VIO) server.
            Base UNIX collector: The UNIX collector runs on most UNIX platforms using
            the built-in accounting (acct) features.
            CSRInput: Input with Common Source Format. This is typically an output from
            the Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager data collector or previous
            processing from Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager.
            IBM System i: Only available for Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager on
            Windows, as a Windows script file. Data is collected from i/OS V5.1.
            TDSz: Extracting data from Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database
            (DRLDB).
            Transaction: A transaction is a mechanism to adjust data in IBM Tivoli Usage
            and Accounting Manager. This collector gets the input from a table within the
            Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database, and adds one time charges
            and monthly fixed charges to the accounts based on the input from ISC.
            z/VM®: This collects data from the z/VM environment, including connect time,
            CPU time, virtual SIOs, virtual cards read, virtual lines printed, virtual cards
            punched, and temporary disk space.
            VMware: This can pull data from either the VMware Virtual Center Server or
            directly from VMware ESX servers using the VMware SDK Web interface.
            Windows Disk Data: This program runs on the Windows server every time
            you want to have a snapshot of disk usage.
            Windows Process collector: A service that is installed and run in a Windows
            environment to collect data on processor usage. This collector uses Windows
            Script File processing.




                                                                   Chapter 2. Planning   29
Universal data collector is a converter function to convert data into CSR or
                  CSR+ format. The input can be from:
                  DATABASE                 Databases providing a SQL interface. The source
                                           must be defined as a data source.
                  DELIMITED                Delimited files, such as comma separated values
                                           (CSV).
                  FIXEDFIELD               Fixed field files.

                Note: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1.1 supports an
                additional data collector for Tivoli Data Warehouse from IBM Tivoli Monitoring.

               Additional data collectors are available with IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
               Manager V7.1 Enterprise Collector Pack, which are:
                  ApacheCommonLogFormat: Apache HTTP server common log collection for
                  analyzing Web page hit counts.
                  DB2: Collects DB2 database accounting in Windows, UNIX, and Linux.
                  DBSpace: Collects the size of a Microsoft SQL or Sybase database only. This
                  collector uses Windows Script File.
                  Lotus® Notes®: Gathers data directly from Notes database files log.nsf,
                  loga4.nsf, and catalog.nsf, such as NotesDatabaseSizeInput,
                  NotesEmailInput, and NotesUsageInput.
                  Microsoft Exchange: Based on the different logs for the Exchange server,
                  usage data and mailbox size are collected. This collector uses Windows
                  Script File.
                  Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS): The W3C Extended Log from IIS
                  can be retrieved for processing. This collector uses Windows Script File.
                  Microsoft SQL server: Uses the trace log and direct database access to get
                  usage data from SQL server. This collector uses Windows Script File.
                  Oracle: Uses the event log and direct database access to get usage data from
                  Oracle server.
                  SAP®: SAP Transaction Profile report (ST03N) is used for collecting from
                  SAP. ST03N is a specific transaction in SAP that provides performance and
                  workload analysis data.
                  Tivoli Storage Manager: Uses Tivoli Storage Manager ODBC calls (Windows
                  only, but other versions can be requested).
                  TotalStorage® Productivity Center (TPC): A flexible data collector to collect
                  any data from the TPC log files.




30   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
WebSphere: A variety of WebSphere usage metrics can be collected and
           processed.
           Windows Event Log data collector for print: Gets usage data from a Windows
           print server extracted from the event log.



2.4 Implementation platform
        Based on the design document and the required collectors, you must choose the
        implementation platform. There are some differences about the platform usage
        and parameters. You must check for the following:
           Skill of existing operation personnel on:
           – Operating system platform.
           – Database platform.
           Reporting solution:
           – Windows uses Internet Information Server for Web reporting.
           – UNIX/Linux uses Business Intelligence and Reporting Tools (BIRT).
           Evaluate some platform dependent options:
           – Financial Modeler is only supported in Windows.
           – Windows Script File collector is only supported in Windows. The collectors
             that use WSF are:
              •   WinProc
              •   DBSpace
              •   MSIIS
              •   MSSQL
              •   MSExchangeMbx
              •   SystemIr52/SystemIr51
           Solution sizing, that is, whether the application parts run on a single or
           multiple machines. You must consider application scalability for future
           processing.
           – Database size (refer to 2.5, “Database sizing” on page 32).
           – Processing or collection runs. The recommended minimum is 3 GHz.
           – Memory requirement for reporting and administration application. The
             minimum recommendation is 2 GB.




                                                                   Chapter 2. Planning   31
2.5 Database sizing
               Sizing the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database is critical for the
               implementation process. Adequate allocation for the database ensures the
               sustainability of the solution so it can perform in a satisfactory manner. The IBM
               Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager manual recommends 40 GB of available
               hard drive space.

               Once the database is initialized, the base database would be more or less
               constant in size. Additional grouping, users, and reporting changes can happen,
               but the size would not be significant. The total size of an empty IBM Tivoli Usage
               and Accounting Manager database is less than 0.5 MB.

               The primary contributor to the growth of a an IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
               Manager database is the data loaded from the output of the billing process. The
               size of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database is dependent on
               many different parameters. The database is populated based on the database
               load process of the processing engine (refer to 6.1.2, “Generic processing
               overview” on page 112). The database load gets its input from the billing
               program. It loads data from the following files:
                  BillDetail.txt: Billing detail data. This data is loaded into the CIMSDETAIL
                  table.
                  BillSummary.txt: Billing summary data. This data is loaded into the
                  CIMSSUMMARY table.
                  Ident.txt: The list of identifiers. This data is loaded into the
                  CIMSDETAILIDENT table.
                  Optionally, resource utilization data can be loaded into the
                  CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION table.

               Additional growth can be added to the load tracking information that records each
               of the data sources being loaded and processed. The load tracking information is
               stored in the CIMSLOADTRACKING table.

               The size of these tables also relates directly to information in messages from the
               Database Load step. In Example 2-1 on page 33, we see the number of records
               (rows) added to the three tables as a result of processing the 65 CSR records.




32   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Example 2-1 Database Load messages extract
06:37:14.852:   INFORMATION   Summary Load: Load Started
06:37:14.938:   INFORMATION   Loaded Records: 97
06:37:14.941:   INFORMATION   Summary Load: Load Completed Successfully
06:37:14.943:   INFORMATION   Detail Load: Load Started
06:37:15.524:   INFORMATION   Loaded Records: 65    Resources 257
06:37:15.524:   INFORMATION   Detail Load: Load Completed Successfully
06:37:15.528:   INFORMATION   Ident Load: Started
06:37:15.596:   INFORMATION   Loaded Records: 352
06:37:15.605:   INFORMATION   Ident Load: Load Completed Successfully
06:37:15.610:   INFORMATION   Number of Detail Records Loaded: 257
06:37:15.610:   INFORMATION   Number of Ident Records Loaded: 352
06:37:15.610:   INFORMATION   Number of Summary Records Loaded: 97
06:37:15.610:   INFORMATION   DBLoad Completed Successfully


 Note: The number of rows loaded can be reduced when the source
 AcctCSR.dat file is sorted by account code before doing the bill processing.
 This sorting can be facilitated when you are using the AcctCSR+ format.

You should also consider any necessary archiving, based on the capacity of the
database system planned. Let us look at the individual tables in these sections:
   2.5.1, “CIMSLOADTRACKING” on page 34
   2.5.2, “CIMSSUMMARY” on page 35
   2.5.3, “CIMSDETAIL and CIMSDETAILIDENT” on page 36
   2.5.4, “CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION” on page 37




                                                        Chapter 2. Planning     33
2.5.1 CIMSLOADTRACKING
               The load tracking table structure is shown in Figure 2-1.




               Figure 2-1 Load tracking table

               You can estimate the row size using the following assumptions:
                  All nullable columns add 1 byte. Some of the rows that are null may not have
                  any length.
                  All variable columns have 2 bytes for length.
                  Graphic data types uses 2 bytes for each character.
                  Time stamp columns have a length of 8 bytes.
                  Integer columns have a length of 4 bytes.

               The Load Tracking table contains three or four rows of data for each one of the
               data source collection types, depending on whether resource utilization
               information is collected. The size growth can be estimated from how may
               database load jobs would be run each day. This may be the same as the number
               of collection sources if each source is collected once a day.

               Once you have performed some collections, this load tracking can be a good
               indicator in further estimating the database size. The CIMSLOADTRACKING
               table contains the column TOTALRECSLOADED, which can indicate the growth
               of the tables.




34   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
2.5.2 CIMSSUMMARY
         The CIMSSUMMARY table has the structure shown in Figure 2-2.




         Figure 2-2 CIMSSUMMARY table

         The CIMSSUMMARY table has a row for each rate and account code
         combination for that billing cycle and shift. This summary table can be qualified
         with multiple billing flags.

         To estimate the size of the CIMSSUMMARY table, we must consider the
         following items for each data collection:
            How many rate codes for which we are collecting
            How many distinct account codes would be collected for those rate codes
            How many shifts for which we are collecting




                                                                   Chapter 2. Planning   35
All of these items are multiplied together to provide the number of rows for the
               CIMSSUMMARY table.


2.5.3 CIMSDETAIL and CIMSDETAILIDENT
               The CIMSDETAIL table is shown in Figure 2-3.




               Figure 2-3 CIMSDETAIL table

               The CIMSDETAILIDENT table is shown in Figure 2-4.




               Figure 2-4 CIMSDETAILIDENT table

               This CIMSDETAIL table contains a row for each rate code and each unique
               identifiers combination. The identifiers are listed separately in the
               CIMSDETAILIDENT table.


36   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
The size of the CIMSDETAIL table would be determined from:
            The number of rate codes collected for each collection
            The number of different identifier combinations for each rate code
            How many shift for which we are collecting

         The CIMSDETAILIDENT table can be calculated from each row of the
         CIMSDETAIL table and multiplied with the number of qualifying identifiers for the
         CIMSDETAIL row.


2.5.4 CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION
         The CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION table’s structure is shown in Figure 2-5.




         Figure 2-5 CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION table

         The CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION table data, if collected, would contain
         similar content to the CIMSDETAIL table data. The difference is that this would
         not contain billing information and no CPU normalization is performed. The
         estimate for the CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION table data is the same as the
         CIMSDETAIL table data.

         The CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION table data is collected from the
         Resource.txt file. This file is produced only when the bill’s resourceFile attribute
         is provided in the job file, and is loaded into the database only when the
         DBLoad’s loadType attribute is set to Resource in the job file.




                                                                    Chapter 2. Planning   37
2.6 Report requirements
               There are several predefined reports that IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
               Manager uses. You must identify the reports that will be used in the
               implementation. There are several categories of reports that may be needed:
                  Invoice reports, which are actually usage invoices that can be billed to the
                  service consumer. The format and content of the invoices must be defined
                  and prepared in the implementation stage. IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
                  Manager provides some sample invoice reports. Figure 2-6 shows a sample
                  invoice.




               Figure 2-6 Invoice report

                  Account reports, which contain usage information that specifies the customer
                  accounts against the usage items. The account reports do not include rate
                  conversion. A typical account report is given in a cross-table format, as shown
                  in Figure 2-7 on page 39.


38   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Figure 2-7 A sample report on daily usage data

   Other reports may be generated based on the needs of the IT department
   and consumers. Some typical reports are:
   – Top usage reports for highlighting the top users of a certain rate
   – Variance reports for showing usage anomalies from consumers and
     identifying usage patterns
   – Trend reports for finding and predicting capacity requirements
   – Resource detail reports for analyzing resource usage




                                                         Chapter 2. Planning   39
40   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
3


    Chapter 3.   Installation
                 This chapter discusses the installation of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
                 Manager V7.1. The discussion is covered in the following sections:
                     3.1, “Installation overview” on page 42
                     3.2, “Installation prerequisites” on page 43
                     3.3, “Application server installation” on page 54
                     3.4, “Database configuration” on page 59
                     3.5, “Enterprise Collector Pack implementation” on page 67
                     3.6, “Initial configuration” on page 70
                     3.7, “Installation verification” on page 71
                     3.8, “Sample collection verification” on page 75




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved.                                              41
3.1 Installation overview
               The description of the installation in this chapter is performed in a single server
               environment. The deployment is performed on machines loaded with Windows
               2003 Standard Edition with Service Pack 1, as shown in Figure 3-1.



                                                          tuamsrv
                                                        DB2 UDB 9.1
                                              Usage Accounting Manager 7.1 EE
                                          Embedded WebSphere Application Server 6.1
                                                 Integrated Solution Console
                                             Usage Accounting Manager 7.1 ECP
                                             Usage Accounting Manager 7.1 WPC
                                                              z




                                          twin01                           twin02
                                  Windows Process Collector       Windows Process Collector


               Figure 3-1 Installation environment

               The steps are:
               1. Database installation and creation, as discussed in 3.4, “Database
                  configuration” on page 59.
               2. Microsoft Internet Information Server, Microsoft .NET framework, and
                  Microsoft Report Viewer are needed for the Web reporting application, and
                  are discussed in 3.2, “Installation prerequisites” on page 43.
               3. IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Enterprise Edition server, which
                  includes an embedded WebSphere Application Server and Integrated
                  Solution Console application, is installed, as shown in 3.3, “Application server
                  installation” on page 54.
               4. The supported collectors are installed in a bundle called the Enterprise
                  Collector Pack, as discussed in 3.5, “Enterprise Collector Pack
                  implementation” on page 67.
               5. Some setup of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager application
                  using the Integrated Solution Console is needed, as discussed in 3.7,
                  “Installation verification” on page 71.




42   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
3.2 Installation prerequisites
           We install the server on a Windows 2003 Server system (system SRV177, in our
           example). Prior to installing IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager, several
           prerequisites are required:
              Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) is required for the execution of
              the reporting application of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. See
              3.2.2, “Configuring Microsoft Internet Information Services” on page 45.
              A current version of the Microsoft Installer package. We install
              MSI30-KB884016. If you are already running Microsoft Windows 2003
              Service Pack 1, you do not need this package. See 3.2.3, “Install the
              Microsoft Installer” on page 49.
              Microsoft .NET Framework Redistributable 2.0 is required for installing the
              Microsoft Report Viewer. See 3.2.4, “Install Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0”
              on page 51.
              Microsoft Report Viewer Redistributable 2005 is required for the standard
              Usage and Accounting Manager reports. See 3.2.5, “Install Microsoft SQL
              Server Report Viewer” on page 52.


3.2.1 Platform requirements
           The following are the platform hardware, operating system and middleware
           requirements for the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager application
           server.
              Operating system.
              – Windows Server® 2003 x64 or x86
              – Windows Server 2008 x86
              – Linux and UNIX server platforms
              – AIX 5L V5.3 and V6.1
              – Solaris™ 9 and 10
              – HP-UX 11.23 and 11.31 on the pa-RISC platform
              – Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) 4 and 5 for IA32
              – RHEL 4 and 5 for PowerPC®
              – RHEL 4 and 5 (64-bit) for IBM System z®
              – RHEL 4 and 5 for x64 (AMD64/EM64T)
              – SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server (SLES) 9 and 10 for IA-32



                                                                   Chapter 3. Installation   43
– SLES 9 and 10 for PowerPC
                   – SLES 9 (31-bit and 64-bit) for System z
                   – SLES 10 (64-bit) for System z
                   – SLES 9 and 10 for x64 (AMD64/EM64T)
                  Web browser requirements.
                   – Internet Explorer® 6 or 7
                   – Firefox 2
                  Hard drive space: 0.5 GB minimum, 40 GB recommended available hard
                  drive space. The hard drive space requirements for the organization might
                  vary.
                  Processor speed: 3 GHz minimum.
                  Memory: 2 GB minimum.
                  Databases supported.
                   – DB2 Universal Database™ (UDB) for Linux, UNIX, and Windows Version
                     8.1, 8.2, 9.1, or 9.5
                   – DB2 UDB for z/OS Version 8
                   – Microsoft SQL Server 2000 or 2005 with the latest service pack
                   – Oracle 9 or 10 for UNIX or Windows
                  Database server system specifications.
                   – 80 GB minimum available hard drive space.
                   – 3 GHz or faster processor (multi-processors are helpful)
                   – 2 GB minimum of memory
                  Database and connection to IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager:
                  Determine with customer/DBA if jar file downloaded.
                   – SQL database: sqljdbc.jar (From MS® Web site)
                   – Oracle database: ojdbc14.jar (From Oracle Web site)
                   – DB2 database for Linux, UNIX, Windows: db2jcc.jar and
                     db2jcc_license_cu.jar
                   – DB2 database for z/OS UDB: db2jcc.jar and db2jcc_license_cisuz.jar




44   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
3.2.2 Configuring Microsoft Internet Information Services
                This section discusses setting up Microsoft Internet Information Services using
                the Manage Your Server application.

                Do these steps:
                1. The program can be started by selecting All Programs → Administrative
                   Tools → Manage Your Server. The window shown in Figure 3-2 will appear.




Figure 3-2 Manage your server




                                                                      Chapter 3. Installation   45
2. Click the Add or remove a role link and the Configure Your Server Wizard
                  will start, as shown in Figure 3-3.




               Figure 3-3 Configure server wizard

               3. In the Configuration Options window shown in Figure 3-4 on page 47, select
                  Custom configuration.




46   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Figure 3-4 Configuration selection

4. In Figure 3-5, select the Application Server role and click Next.




Figure 3-5 Server role selection




                                                        Chapter 3. Installation   47
5. In Figure 3-6, check the Enable ASP.NET check box and click Next.




               Figure 3-6 Feature selection

               6. The installation commences with a progress bar. Figure 3-7 shows that the
                  installation is finished.




               Figure 3-7 Installation completed



48   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
3.2.3 Install the Microsoft Installer

             Note: Our Windows 2003 SP1environment (Windows 2003 SP1 is required by
             DB2 V9.1) does not need the installation of Microsoft Installer. However, we
             also notice that the .NET Framework 2.0 requires this installation.

            An up to date version of the Windows Installer software needs to be available on
            the Report server system. Do these steps:
            1. Download the Windows Installer from:
               http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=5fbc5470-b2
               59-4733-a914-a956122e08e8&DisplayLang=en
            2. We execute the program WindowsInstaller-KB884016-v2-x86.exe to run the
               installation of the Windows Installer. The Welcome window is displayed
               (Figure 3-8.) Select Next.




            Figure 3-8 Welcome window for the Windows Installer installation




                                                                      Chapter 3. Installation   49
3. Agree to the license shown in Figure 3-9 and select Next.




               Figure 3-9 License agreement for the Windows Installer

               4. Selected files on your system are backed up. The Windows Installer is
                  installed and the completion window is shown (Figure 3-10). Select Finish to
                  end the installation.




               Figure 3-10 Completion of the installation for the Windows Installer software




50   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
3.2.4 Install Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0
           The .NET Framework is required if you install Microsoft Report Viewer to view the
           standard IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager reports in RDL format. Do
           these steps:
           1. Download the installation package for the Report Viewer from the following
              address:
              http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=0856eacb-43
              62-4b0d-8edd-aab15c5e04f5&DisplayLang=en
           2. Execute the downloaded program to start the installation and select Next in
              the Welcome window. Accept the license agreement and select Install, as
              shown in Figure 3-11. The installation progress window is displayed.




           Figure 3-11 Accept the .NET license agreement and start the installation




                                                                      Chapter 3. Installation   51
3. The Setup Complete message is displayed when the installation completes
                  (Figure 3-12.) Select Finish to end the installation.




               Figure 3-12 Setup complete for the .NET framework software


3.2.5 Install Microsoft SQL Server Report Viewer
               The Microsoft Report Viewer is required for the standard IBM Tivoli Usage and
               Accounting Manager reports (RDL format). Do these steps:
               1. Download the installation package for the Report Viewer from the following
                  address:
                  http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?displaylang=en&Famil
                  yID=8a166cac-758d-45c8-b637-dd7726e61367
               2. Save the downloaded file as ReportViewer.exe.
               3. Execute ReportViewer.exe to install the Report Viewer. The Welcome window
                  is displayed (Figure 3-13 on page 53). Select Next.




52   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Figure 3-13 Welcome window for the Report Viewer installation

4. Accept the license agreement and select Install, as shown in Figure 3-14.




Figure 3-14 License agreement for the Report Viewer and installing the software




                                                          Chapter 3. Installation   53
5. Once successfully installed, the Setup Complete window is displayed, as
                  shown in Figure 3-15. Select Finish to end the installation.




               Figure 3-15 Successful installation of the Report Viewer



3.3 Application server installation
               Install the reporting server using the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
               enterprise edition Windows installation package. This installation package
               contains the reporting server as well as the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
               Manager Application server software, the ISC, embedded WebSphere
               Application Server, and the DB2 Universal Database V9.1 runtime client.

               IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Enterprise Edition can be
               downloaded from the Passport Advantage Web site.

               Make sure that you have the Microsoft Internet Information Server installed and
               active.

               All the following files must exists in the same directory:
                  EmbeddedExpress_wintel_ia32.zip
                  ISCAE71_4_EWASv61.zip
                  setup-tuam-ee-7-1-0-wintel_ia32.exe
                  setup-tuam-wpc-7-1-0-windows_32_64.exe
                  v9fp2_ALL_LANG_setup_32.exe


54   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Do the following installation steps:
1. Execute setup-tuam-ee-7-1-0-wintel_ia32.exe to install the Report server.
   Select Next at the Welcome window. Accept the license agreement and
   select Next, as shown in Figure 3-16.




Figure 3-16 License agreement for IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager




                                                       Chapter 3. Installation   55
2. We install the application server into the C:IBMtuam directory, as shown in
                  Figure 3-17; the default directory is C:Program Filesibmtuam. Select Next.




               Figure 3-17 Define the installation directory for the Report server software

               3. Check the Windows Web Reporting option, as shown in Figure 3-18. Select
                  Next.




               Figure 3-18 Select the windows Web Reporting option




56   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
4. We choose the virtual directory option, as shown in figure Figure 3-19, and
   select Next.




Figure 3-19 Select a new virtual directory for Web reports

5. Select Install in the summary information window. The installation progress
   indicator is displayed.




                                                             Chapter 3. Installation   57
6. A task is automatically initiated to unpack the installed files, as shown in
                  Figure 3-20.




               Figure 3-20 Unpacking of the application server software on the Report server

               7. The window shown in Figure 3-21 shows successful completion of the
                  installation and the summary information. Select Finish to end the
                  installation.




               Figure 3-21 Successful installation of the Report server software



58   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
3.4 Database configuration
               There are several initial configurations that you need to do before you can use
               IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. These can be done from the
               Integrated Solution Console. Figure 3-22 shows the console welcome window.




Figure 3-22 Welcome page

               This section explains the following:
                  3.4.1, “Database creation” on page 59
                  3.4.2, “Defining JDBC driver” on page 60
                  3.4.3, “Defining data sources” on page 63
                  3.4.4, “Initializing database” on page 66


3.4.1 Database creation
               The database (in Windows) must be defined as UTF-8. The definition of the
               default page size of 16 K allows us to have an overall 16 K page size. For a
               production environment, we recommend using the default 4 K page size and
               creating an additional definition of a buffer and table spaces for larger page sizes,
               such as 16 K.




                                                                         Chapter 3. Installation   59
Figure 3-23 shows the creation of the database.


                  C:>DB2 CREATE DB ITUAMDB CODESET UTF-8 PAGESIZE 16 K
                  DB20000I The CREATE DATABASE command completed successfully.
                Figure 3-23 Creating the database and bufferpools


3.4.2 Defining JDBC driver
                The configuration of the JDBC driver for IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
                Manager depends on the database software that has been installed. The DB2
                Universal Database that we use comes with the JDBC drivers. We use the
                db2jcc.jar and db2jcc_license_cu.jar files for the JDBC driver. The following
                steps configure IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager to use the JDBC
                driver:
                1. From the ISC menu, select Usage and Accounting Manager → System
                   Maintenance → Configuration. See Figure 3-24.




Figure 3-24 Configuring the JDBC driver




60    Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
2. In the Driver tab, click New to define the driver. Find the driver file in the tree
                   shown in Figure 3-25. Click OK when you are done.




Figure 3-25 Finding the JDBC driver




                                                                           Chapter 3. Installation   61
3. The JDBC jar files are shown in Figure 3-26. Click OK when you are done.




Figure 3-26 JDBC driver

                4. Figure 3-27 on page 63 shows the final JDBC driver configuration in our
                   system.




62    Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Figure 3-27 Final JDBC driver configuration

                 5. After updating the JDBC driver, you should restart the Integrated Solution
                    Console. Use the following commands:
                    C:IBMtuamewasbinstopServer.bat server1
                    C:IBMtuamewasbinstartServer.bat server1


3.4.3 Defining data sources
                 Once you have a definition of the JDBC drivers, we can define the data sources.
                 Using the ISC, you add the data source. We add the IBM Tivoli Usage and
                 Accounting Manager database as a Server data source as follows:
                 1. From the ISC menu, select Usage and Accounting Manager → System
                    Maintenance → Data Sources.




                                                                        Chapter 3. Installation   63
2. In the data source window, right-click the default data source and select Edit
                    DataSource. See Figure 3-28.




Figure 3-28 Editing the default data source

                 3. Figure 3-29 on page 65 shows the changes that we did for the default data
                    source.




64     Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Figure 3-29 Default data source

                 4. Figure 3-30 shows that the changes are complete.




                 Figure 3-30 Default data source changes




                                                                       Chapter 3. Installation   65
3.4.4 Initializing database
               Once the data source is defined, you must initialize the database. Initializing the
               IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database creates and populates
               database tables and other database objects. Initializing the database is invoked
               from the ISC and the initialization is performed against the databases that are
               identified as the default administration data source.

               Do these steps:
               1. To initialize the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database using
                  the ISC menu, select Usage and Accounting Manager → System
                  Maintenance → Database → Initialize Database, as shown in Figure 3-31.




               Figure 3-31 Initialize database

               2. Click the Initialize Database button. Confirm the action by clicking Yes, as
                  shown in Figure 3-32.




               Figure 3-32 Confirmation window




66   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
3. Figure 3-33 on page 67 shows that the initialization of the database is
            complete.




         Figure 3-33 Initialize the database



3.5 Enterprise Collector Pack implementation
         The Enterprise Collector Pack (ECP) is a separate licensed component from IBM
         Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager that must be installed for some of the
         collectors to run. You can get the Enterprise Collector Pack from the Passport
         Advantage Web site.

         The Enterprise Collector Pack is a separate installable component that provides
         all available collection for usage data that is supported for the platform. The
         Enterprise Collector Pack must be installed on the machine with the IBM Tivoli
         Usage and Accounting Manager Enterprise Edition. The installation is performed
         by setup-tuam-ecp-7-1-0-wintel_ia32.exe.




                                                                Chapter 3. Installation   67
Do these steps:
               1. The welcome window is shown in Figure 3-34. Click Next.




               Figure 3-34 Welcome window

               2. The license agreement is shown in Figure 3-35. Accept the agreement and
                  click Next.




               Figure 3-35 License agreement




68   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
3. The Enterprise Collector Pack is always installed in the directory in which the
   enterprise edition is installed. Figure 3-36 shows the summary window for the
   installation. Click Install.




Figure 3-36 Summary window

4. When the installation completes, Figure 3-37 shows the completion window.




Figure 3-37 Completion window




                                                        Chapter 3. Installation   69
3.6 Initial configuration
                 The processing directories define the path to find and store files for processing of
                 usage and accounting data.

                 Do these steps:
                 1. Configure the path using the ISC options, that is, select Usage and
                    Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Configuration →
                    Processing. Update the path according to your installation. Figure 3-38
                    shows our path definitions.




Figure 3-38 Configuring the paths used during processing




70    Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Note: The original processing path from the sample directory is used by the
           runSamples program to generate sample data.

          2. On the server, create the directories according to the path definitions that you
             have just configured. We do this from the command line, as shown in
             Figure 3-39. Note that the default directories for the Job File Path, Sample
             Job File Path, Job Log Files Path, and Collector Log Files Path are already
             created when the Application server is installed.


           # cd /opt/ibm/tuam
           # mkdir processes
          Figure 3-39 Create the processes directory



3.7 Installation verification
          You can verify the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database
          initialization from the ISC console. The following sections discuss this action:
             3.7.1, “Verify the tables created during initialization” on page 72
             3.7.2, “Verify the contents of the CIMSRate table” on page 73




                                                                   Chapter 3. Installation   71
3.7.1 Verify the tables created during initialization
               Select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance →
               Database → Table Manager. Figure 3-40 shows the table list of the default
               administration database. There should be 42 tables in the list.




               Figure 3-40 Table list




72   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
3.7.2 Verify the contents of the CIMSRate table
                 To verify the contents of the CIMSRate table, select Usage and Accounting
                 Manager → System Maintenance → Database → Table Viewer. Expand the
                 Database Tables tree and select the CIMSRate table from the Table Viewer main
                 window. Select the View Table button to see the contents of the CIMSRate table
                 selected in Figure 3-41.




Figure 3-41 View the contents of the CIMSRate table




                                                                      Chapter 3. Installation   73
3.7.3 Verify the application status in IIS
               On the Report server, open the Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS)
               Manager by selecting Start → All Programs → Administrative Tools →
               Internet Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager. Expand the
               trees to display the application pools and the Web sites, as shown in Figure 3-42.
               Confirm the existence of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager entries.




               Figure 3-42 Verify the installation of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Web
               components


3.7.4 Connect to the reporting Web application
               Open a browser, and point it at the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
               Web application URL. In our case, this is:
               http://srv177/tuam/

               The browser window displays the initial Web reporting option window, as shown
               in Figure 3-43 on page 75.




74   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Figure 3-43 Web reporting interface



3.8 Sample collection verification
                 Before doing any further configurations in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
                 Manager, we run the provided samples:
                 /opt/ibm/tuam/bin/RunSamples.sh | tee RunSamples.log

                 We can ignore the warning messages, such as the one shown in Figure 3-44, as
                 SMTP is not configured in our environment.


                  WARNING: AUCCM5019E The process failed when sending e-mail through
                  ITUAM@ITUAMCustomerCompany.comSMTP from to
                  John.ITUAMUser@ITUAMCustomerCompany.com. Review the trace log to get
                  detailed information.
                 Figure 3-44 Ignoring the warning from RunSamples.sh




                                                                       Chapter 3. Installation   75
To check the results, select Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback
               Maintenance → Job Runner → Log Files, as shown in Figure 3-45.




               Figure 3-45 Checking the Log Files viewer after RunSamples.sh has finished




76   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
In our example, the Notes job failed with a db2 error message during loading:
AUCPE0202E The DBLoad process completed unsuccessfully with the
following exception: com.ibm.db2.jcc.c.lh: [ibm][db2][jcc][102][10040]
Non-atomic batch failure. The batch was submitted, but at least one
exception occurred on an individual member of the batch.

The other errors are caused by not having the Enterprise Collector Package
(ecp) installed:
AUCIN0365E The following collector is not authorized to run in the
Usage and Accounting Manager Enterprise Edition: MS Exchange 2007
AUCIN0365E The following collector is not authorized to run in the
Usage and Accounting Manager Enterprise Edition: Apache

To do a final cleanup of the database, run an initialization, as described in 3.4.4,
“Initializing database” on page 66.




                                                         Chapter 3. Installation   77
Alternatively, you can unload the data by selecting Usage and Accounting
               Manager → Chargeback Maintenance → Load Tracking, as shown in
               Figure 3-46. Uncheck the End Date filter check box and mark all of the entries by
               using the check box button.




               Figure 3-46 Unloading the RunSamples.sh data from the database

               Press Delete Load and confirm the security question about deleting the data.




78   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
4


    Chapter 4.   Configuration
                 This chapter discusses the configuration of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
                 Manager V7.1 installation. The discussion is covered in the following sections:
                     4.1, “The Common Source Resource format” on page 80
                     4.2, “Account code hierarchy” on page 82
                     4.3, “User administration” on page 84
                     4.4, “Clients and scheduling” on page 88
                     4.5, “Working with rates” on page 92




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved.                                             79
4.1 The Common Source Resource format
               IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager uses two file formats called Common
               Source Resource (CSR) and Common Source Resource plus (CSR+). The
               CSR+ is enhanced by a static header, including the account code for sorting
               purposes. CSR+ and CSR files are comma separated files, in which each record
               has these three sections:
                  Header
                  The header of the record contains the following:
                  CSR Plus Header   CSR+ records only start with:
                    “CSR+              Constant
                    headerstartdate    Usage start date
                    headerenddate      Usage end date
                    headeraccountcodelength
                                       Length of the Account code (three digits)
                    headeraccountcode Account Code
                    “                  Constant
                  headerrectype     Record type or source
                  headerstartdate   Usage start date
                  headerenddate     Usage end date
                  headerstarttime   Usage start time
                  headerendtime     Usage end time
                  headershiftcode   Shift code
                  The header information is used to identify the applicability of the record to a
                  certain billing period and type.

                Tip: All header% variables can be used with the Integrator identifier functions.

                  A sample header segment for CSR is:
                  UNIXSPCK,20071016,20071016,00:00:00,23:59:59,1
                  A sample header for CSR+ starts with:
                  “CSR+2007101620071016009AIX 0Test“,UNIXSPCK,20071016,..
                  Identifiers segment
                  The identifiers segment lists the resource identifier. These identifiers are used
                  to distinguish one resource from the other before mapping them to an account
                  code. The account code itself is considered an identifier. The structure of this
                  segment is:
                  number of identifiers, identifier name, identifier value, ...




80   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
An example identifier segment with three identifiers is:
   3,SYSTEM_ID,"lpar04",Account_Code,"AIX 1TEST lpar04", USERNAME,"root"
   Resources segment
   The resources segment lists the resource metrics. These metrics are used to
   meter the usage information for the resource. If the resource metric value is
   zero, the resource metric will not be written to the output CSR file. The
   resource metric is structured as follows:
   # of resources, resource metric name, resource metric value ...
   An example resources segment with three metrics is:
   3,LLG102,17.471,LLG107,6.914,LLG108,3

Example 4-1 shows the data from two AIX LPARs on two different systems.

Example 4-1 CSR file for AIX Advanced Accounting data
AATRID10,20071030,20071030,01:10:03,01:10:03,1,2,SYSTEM_ID,"02101F170",
Account_Code,"AIX 1TEST lpar04",1,AAID1002,0.016
AATRID10,20071030,20071030,01:15:03,01:15:03,1,2,SYSTEM_ID,"02101F170",
Account_Code,"AIX 1TEST lpar04",1,AAID1002,0.004
AATRID4,20071030,20071030,02:30:07,02:30:07,1,2,SYSTEM_ID,"02101F25F",A
ccount_Code,"AIX 0SAP   ohm01",2,AAID0402,120,AAID0407,2048

In Example 4-2, we find the data from two VMware ESX servers (SYSTEM_ID)
and three VMware guests (Instance) that was collected using a single
VirtualCenter Server (Feed).

Example 4-2 CSR file for VMWare processing
VMWARE,20071017,20071017,00:00:00,23:59:59,1,5,HostName,"host-19",Insta
nce,"vm-33",Feed,"ITSC_VC",Account_Code,"WIN 1ESX",SYSTEM_ID,"srv079.it
sc.austin.ibm.com",1,VMCPUUSE,10756036
VMWARE,20071017,20071017,00:00:00,23:59:59,1,5,HostName,"host-19",Insta
nce,"vm-41",Feed,"ITSC_VC",Account_Code,"WIN 4ESX",SYSTEM_ID,"srv079.it
sc.austin.ibm.com",1,VMCPUUSE,10688008
VMWARE,20071017,20071017,00:00:00,23:59:59,1,5,HostName,"host-8",Instan
ce,"vm-31",Feed,"ITSC_VC",Account_Code,"WIN 0ESX",SYSTEM_ID,"srv106.its
c.austin.ibm.com",1,VMCPUUSE,637429




                                                        Chapter 4. Configuration   81
The IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager defines some reserved
               identifiers that are used for special processing. Those identifiers are:
               Account_Code            Will be matched with the Account Code Structure and
                                       used for Rate Table selection and Reporting Aggregation.
               SYSTEM_ID               Used for reading the factor from the Normalization Table
                                       during CPU normalization.
               WORK_ID                 Optionally used for CPU normalization on a z/OS data
                                       collector specifying a subsystem like TSO, JES2, or any
                                       other application (also not z/OS) if needed.
               Feed                    Identifies and defines a sub folder within the process
                                       folder for data transfer.



4.2 Account code hierarchy
               The account code is the primary identifier that signifies who should get billed for
               the specified system usage. The account code structure has to be defined early
               on before you perform any data collection and processing. All the data items
               would be labelled by the account code, so it would be very hard to change the
               structure. This section explains the usage of the account code within IBM Tivoli
               Usage and Accounting Manager and should help you define the account code
               structure according to your needs.

               The account code is a string with a fixed width field that defines the hierarchy of
               the accounting breakdown. The fields would be used to split the account string
               used for charging different organizational entities. Figure 4-1 on page 83 shows a
               sample account code and its relation to the charging rate.




82   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Account code
     Client         Financial information      Application                               Host
     8 char               12 char                8 char                                 32 char
       CSR record
                                        VMWARE,20071025,20071025,00:00:00,23:59:59,1,

              3,Feed,VM1,Account_Code,”ABCDEFG000012340000FINUSAGEsrv106.itsc.austin.ibm.com“,SYSTEM_ID,srv106,

                                                  2,VMCPUSY,200,VMDSKRD,345




                                                  Rate                                  Rate Group
          Rate Table
                                               VMCPUSY                                   VMware
                                                  Rate
                                              VMDSKRD

                                                  Rate                                  Rate Group
                                              WINCPUUS                                   Windows
                                                  Rate
                                              WINDSKWR
                                                  Rate
                                              WINMEMHI



Figure 4-1 Sample account code with four parts and the rate code relationship

The first part of the account code is the Client, representing the top level of your
organization. The other parts are hierarchical information for aggregating the
data during reporting. All parts of the account code is used to search the Clients
table to get a rate table. The lookup is performed based on each level of the
account code hierarchy level; if no match is found, it will use the STANDARD rate
table. We can set up a specific Rate Table for any account if necessary. The Rate
in the specific rate table is matched to the resource name in the resources
segment of CSR file to get the appropriate rate information.

Rates are also organized in rate groups. The rate group allows you to report
summary usage based on rate groups. Each rate has the definitions for the
format, type, conversion factor, and money value for all shifts.

 Consideration: When you define a new rate group using the ISC Rate menu,
 the group name is limited to eight characters. Using the ISC Rate Group
 menu, you can rename the group later or create longer names, as the
 examples shipped with IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager show.

If a rate has the type CPU, the normalization will be done for this value during
billing based on the identifiers SYSTEM_ID or WORK_ID.




                                                                                Chapter 4. Configuration          83
The default account code structure looks like Figure 4-2. This can be maintained
               using the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC) menu by selecting Usage and
               Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Account Code Structure.




               Figure 4-2 Default IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager account code structure



4.3 User administration
               The user administration topic for IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager is
               divided into the following sections:
                  4.3.1, “User creation” on page 85
                  4.3.2, “User role definition” on page 86
                  4.3.3, “User and group mapping” on page 86




84   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
4.3.1 User creation
           User administration actions are performed right from the Integrated Solutions
           Console (ISC). The following procedure adds new users for Web reporting:
           1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
           2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Users.
           3. On the User List Maintenance page, click New.
           4. On the User Maintenance page, complete the following:
              User ID                Type an ID for the user.
              Full Name              Type the user’s full name.
              E-mail Address         Type the user’s e-mail to enable the user to receive
                                     reports through the automatic report distribution
                                     feature. If this feature is not required or if users should
                                     not receive distributed reports, leave this box blank.
              Group                  Select the group that the user should be added to from
                                     the drop-down list or accept the default ADMIN group.
              Configuration Options Maintenance
                                  Click to add user configuration options that can be
                                  used for custom reports and Web pages.
              Domain Name and Domain User ID
                                Type the user’s Windows domain name and user ID.
                                Usage and Accounting Manager Web Reporting and
                                other Usage and Accounting Manager Web-based
                                applications provide an automatic logon feature. To
                                enable a user to use this feature, the user’s Windows
                                domain name and user ID are required. In addition,
                                Enable Intranet Auto Login must be enabled on the
                                Configuration—Reporting page and IIS security for the
                                Usage and Accounting Manager Web Reporting Web
                                site and any other Usage and Accounting Manager
                                sites must be set to Integrated Windows
                                authentication.
              Password               If the automatic logon feature for Usage and
                                     Accounting Manager Web applications is not being
                                     used, use this box to type a password for the user or to
                                     change an existing password. The password is
                                     alphanumeric and case-sensitive and can be a
                                     maximum of 16 characters.
           5. Click OK to save the new user.



                                                                  Chapter 4. Configuration   85
4.3.2 User role definition
               A user role can be used to arrange user access for reports. The users with
               access to the same role have access to the same set of reports. This section
               explains user role creation from the Integrated Solutions Console.

               Do these steps:
               1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
               2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Users
                  and Groups → Administrative User Roles.
               3. On the Administrative User Roles page, click Add.
               4. On the Administrative User Roles page, type in a User ID defined to the local
                  operating system and then select the Usage and Accounting Manager
                  security group or groups that the user should be assigned to:
                  tuammaint                Clients, Rates, Rate Groups, Reports, Report Groups,
                                           Report Distribution, and all sub pages
                  tuamchargebackadmin
                                   All pages with the exception of Initialize Database,
                                   Database Upgrade, Objects Manager, Database
                                   Manager, Table Manager, Table Viewer, and all sub
                                   pages
                  tuamadmin                All pages
                  tuamtransaction          Miscellaneous, Recurring, or Credit Transaction List
                                           Maintenance and all sub pages
               5. Click Next to enable the security.


4.3.3 User and group mapping
               User group is another way of grouping users with the same role so that authority
               is given to the group, not individual users. After you define the group and the
               users, you can associate the user with the new group that you define. This
               section explain the procedure:
               1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
               2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Users
                  Groups.
               3. On the User Group List Maintenance page, click the View pop menu icon to
                  the right of User Group and click New User Group.




86   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
4. On the User Group Maintenance page, complete the following:
   Group ID              Type an ID for the user group.
   Description           Type a description of the group. The description is
                         shown on the User Group List Maintenance page.
   Account Code Structures Selected and Available
                      You can add and remove structures from the Selected
                      and Available boxes. All structures that are displayed
                      in the Selected box are accessible to users in the
                      group from the Usage and Accounting Manager Web
                      site. This feature enables users to dynamically
                      selected the account code structure that they want to
                      use to generate reports. If there are multiple account
                      code structures in the Selected box, set one of the
                      structures as the default structure by clicking the
                      structure and then clicking Make Default.
   Group                 Select the group for which the user should be added to
                         from the drop-down list or accept the default ADMIN
                         group.
   Configuration Options Maintenance
                       Click to add user configuration options that can be
                       used for custom reports and Web pages.
   Domain Name and Domain User ID
                     Type the user’s Windows domain name and user ID.
                     Usage and Accounting Manager Web Reporting and
                     other Usage and Accounting Manager Web-based
                     applications provide an automatic logon feature. To
                     enable a user to use this feature, the user’s Windows
                     domain name and user ID are required. In addition,
                     Enable Intranet Auto Login must be enabled on the
                     Configuration—Reporting page and IIS security for the
                     Usage and Accounting Manager Web Reporting Web
                     site and any other Usage and Accounting Manager
                     sites must be set to Integrated Windows
                     authentication.
   Allow Financial Modeler access
                       Select this check box to allow users in this group to
                       access Usage and Accounting Manager Financial
                       Modeler.




                                                   Chapter 4. Configuration    87
Allow administrative access
                                       Select this check box to give the users in this group
                                       administrative configuration options in Usage and
                                       Accounting Manager Web Reporting.
                  Configuration Options Maintenance
                                      Click to add user group configuration options that can
                                      be used for custom reports and Web pages.



4.4 Clients and scheduling
               This section discusses additional management resources that exists in IBM Tivoli
               Usage and Accounting Manager. The resources are discussed in these sections:
                  4.4.1, “Calendar” on page 88
                  4.4.2, “Client” on page 89
                  4.4.3, “Client budget” on page 90
                  4.4.4, “Client contact” on page 91

               Rate related information is discussed in 4.5, “Working with rates” on page 92.


4.4.1 Calendar
               Calendar is a mechanism in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager for
               defining billing periods. There is a maximum of 52 periods to be defined,
               correspond to a weekly billing cycle. To work with Calendar, perform the following
               tasks:
               1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
               2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance →
                  Calendar.
               3. On the Calendar page, select the year from the Year drop-down list and
                  complete the following:
                  Year                     Select the appropriate year.
                  New Year                 Click to add a new year to the calendar.
                  Delete Year              Click to delete the currently shown year.
                  Period                   Shows 12 periods for the year, or 13 periods if Use 13
                                           Periods is enabled on the Configuration—Processing
                                           page.




88   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Beginning Date         Type a beginning date for the period, use the View
                                      Calendar icon to select a beginning date, or accept the
                                      default date.
               Ending Date            Type an ending date for the period, use the View
                                      Calendar icon to select a ending date, or accept the
                                      default date.
               Close Date             Shows the close date for the period if a day-of-month
                                      close date has been set on the
                                      Configuration—Processing page. The close date is
                                      displayed for the period in which it was set, the
                                      previous period, and future periods. If a specific date
                                      close date or no close date has been set, the Close
                                      Date is not shown.
               Set From Period 1      Click to have all periods proceed sequentially from the
                                      first period.
           4. Click Apply to save the settings.


4.4.2 Client
           Clients are organizational units in the billing part of IBM Tivoli Usage and
           Accounting Manager that can be represented by an account code. These clients
           are stored in the client table. To work with the client table, perform the following
           tasks:
           1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
           2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance →
              Clients.
           3. Usage and Accounting Manager includes sample clients. Remove these
              sample clients before adding clients for the customer’s organization.
           4. On the Client List Maintenance page, click New.
           5. On the Client Maintenance page, complete the following:
               Account Code           Type the account code to assign to the client.
               Account Name           Type the name of the client as it should be shown in
                                      invoices and other reports.
               Alternate Account Code
                                   Type an alternate account code if the client account
                                   will be used for reporting systems that have different
                                   standard account codes, such as General Ledger
                                   systems and other reporting formats.




                                                                 Chapter 4. Configuration    89
Rate table               Select a rate table that is used to calculate client
                                           charges. The STANDARD table is used by default.

                    Note: To use a rate table other than STANDARD for a client, the CLIENT
                    SEARCH ON control statement in the BillCntl.txt file must be enabled in
                    each process definition. Invoice Contact - Shows the contact for the client
                    (if a contact has been specified). If there are multiple contacts for the client,
                    select the appropriate contact from the drop-down list.

                  Action Codes             The use of these options is user-specified. These
                                           codes are available for custom reports and can be
                                           used for selecting data.


4.4.3 Client budget
               Client budget for individual resources can be specified to compare budget
               against an actual usage report. This report allows easy comparison of any
               financial line item against the budgeted usage. The client budget definition is
               performed using the following tasks:
               1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
               2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance →
                  Clients.
               3. On the Client List Maintenance page, click the View pop-up menu icon to the
                  right of the client to assign the budget to and then click Budgets.
               4. On the Budget Maintenance page, complete the following:
                  Year                     Select the appropriate year if it is not shown. You can
                                           add or delete year information.
                  Overall Account Budget
                                     Click to set the overall budget for the client account. To
                                     set budgets for individual resources, click the View
                                     pop-up menu icon to select the rate code or codes for
                                     the resources required. The rate codes are displayed
                                     under Overall Account Budget. Click the individual rate
                                     codes to set the budget for the resource. To remove
                                     the resource budget, click the View pop-up menu icon
                                     to the right of the rate code, and then click Remove
                                     Resource Budget.
                  Total Budget Amount
                                     Type the total monetary amount to be budgeted for the
                                     consumed resources.



90   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Divide Total           Click to divide the value in the Total Budget Amount or
                                     Total Budget Units box by the number of periods and
                                     automatically populate the Period 1 through Period 12
                                     boxes with the result. Note that if the amounts are
                                     changed in either the Total Budget Amount or Total
                                     Budget Units box, this step must be performed again.
              Sum Periods            Click to add the values that are displayed in the Period
                                     1 through Period 12 boxes and automatically enter the
                                     sum in the Total Budget Amount or Total Budget Units
                                     box. Note that if the amount is changed for a period or
                                     periods, this step must be performed again.
              Periods                Type in a budget amount for one or more periods to
                                     create a value in the Total Budget Amount or Total
                                     Budget Units box using the Sum Periods button. If you
                                     use the Divide Total box to calculate the period
                                     amounts, leave these boxes blank.


4.4.4 Client contact
           Client contacts are client descriptions, such as addresses, phone numbers, and
           contact persons. A client contact can be managed from the Integrated Solution
           Console by doing the following steps:
           1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
           2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance →
              Clients.
           3. On the Client List Maintenance page, select the check box for the client that
              needs to be added as a contact or contacts to and then click Contacts.
           4. On the Client Contact List Maintenance page, click New.
           5. On the Client Contact Maintenance page, complete the following tabs:
              Address                The name, address, and e-mail address for the
                                     contact.
              Phone                  Phone numbers, such as voice, fax, and pager for the
                                     contact.
              Other                  Department, office, any comments, and the Web site
                                     URL for the contact.
           6. Click OK to save the contact information and return to the Client List
              Maintenance page where the new client is shown.




                                                                Chapter 4. Configuration   91
4.5 Working with rates
               Rates are managed using the procedures discussed in this section. We discuss
               this topic in the following sections:
                  4.5.1, “Rate group” on page 92
                  4.5.2, “Rate codes” on page 92
                  4.5.3, “Alternate rates” on page 94
                  4.5.4, “Proration table” on page 95
                  4.5.5, “CPU normalization” on page 96
                  4.5.6, “Rate shift” on page 97


4.5.1 Rate group
               Rate group is a way to apply a different set of rates for different clients. Each
               client is mapped to a rate group. The rate group definition is as follows:
               1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
               2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance →
                  Rate Groups.
               3. On the Rate Group List Maintenance page, click the View pop-up menu icon
                  to the right of Rate Groups and then click New Rate Group.
               4. On the Rate Group Maintenance page, complete the following:
                  Name                     Type the name to assign to the rate group.
                  Description              Type a description of the rate group. This is the value
                                           that is shown on the Rate Group List Maintenance
                                           page and the value that appears for the rate group in
                                           the standard reports that are provided with Usage and
                                           Accounting Manager.


4.5.2 Rate codes
               Rate codes can be managed by doing the following steps:
               1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
               2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance →
                  Rates.
               3. On the Rate List Maintenance page, click New and input the following
                  information:
                   – Rate Code: Type a code to represent the rate. You have a maximum of
                     eight characters.



92   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
– Description: Type a meaningful description of the rate code. The
  description is displayed on reports, graphs, and spreadsheets. It is
  recommended that units of measurement are included (GB, MB, hours,
  minutes, and so on) as applicable.
– Rate Value: Type the amount to be charged for the consumption of the
  resource represented by this rate code. The value is multiplied by the
  resource amount contained in the matching CSR or CSR+ file.
– Rate Index; Shows the order in which the rate code is displayed in reports.
  The order can be changed; however, an index number that is already in
  use cannot be typed.
– Rate Table; Select the rate table to add the rate code to from the
  drop-down list.
– Rate Group: Select the rate group for the rate code from the drop-down list
  or click New Rate Group to create a new rate group. All rate codes must
  be assigned to a rate group; if none is specified, it belongs to the All
  Unassigned rate group.
– New Rate Group: Click to open the New Rate Group page and create a
  new rate group.
– Use 4 decimals for rate: This option determines the number of decimal
  digits that appear in the rate value in reports. If this check box is selected,
  the rate value includes four decimal digits. If this check box is not selected,
  the rate value includes eight decimal digits.
– Resource Conversion: Adjust the total resource units value in reports
  using the following conversion factors:
   Default                 No conversion is performed.
   Divide By or Multiply By
                         The total resource units are divided or multiplied by
                         a set conversion factor (for example, Divide By
                         1000, Multiply By 60, and so on).
   Multiply By Conversion Factor
                       The total resource units are multiplied by the factor
                       in the Conversion Factor box.
– Rate is per thousand: Select this check box to change the rate in reports
  from per resource unit to per thousand units.
– Do not adjust for zero cost: Select this check box if the associated rate
  code should not be included in zero cost calculations.




                                                   Chapter 4. Configuration   93
– Conversion Factor: This box is available only when Multiply By Conversion
                     Factor is selected in the Resource Conversion box. Type a number by
                     which to multiply the total resource units for the rate code. This factor can
                     be up to 16 digits, including a decimal.
                   – Flat fee money charges: Select this check box if the resource units for the
                     rate code are considered a monetary amount rather than units of
                     utilization. In this situation, the resource units and the charges are the
                     same in reports.
                   – Resource Decimals: Select the number of decimal digits that appear in the
                     resource units value in reports, for example, 0=99, 2=99.99, 4=99.9999.
                     The default is two decimal digits.
                   – CPU value: Select this check box to normalize CPU usage for this rate.
                   – Report Flag 1 and 2: The use of these boxes is user-specified. These
                     boxes allow you to type a one-character value that can be used in custom
                     reports.
                   – Currency Symbol: The use of this box is user-specified. This box allows
                     you to type a currency symbol that can be used in custom reports.
                   – Detail Description: The use of this box is user-specified. This box allows
                     you to type a description of the rate code that can be used in custom
                     reports.
                   – Comments: Type any comments regarding the rate code.
                   – Add Rate Shifts: Click to add rate shifts for the rate code. This button
                     shows only when adding a new rate code. Rate shifts allow you to set
                     different rates based on the time.
                   – Edit Rate Shifts: Click to edit rate shifts for the rate code. This button
                     shows only when you are editing an existing rate code.
                   – Delete Rate Shifts: Click to delete rate shifts for the rate code. This button
                     shows only when rate shifts have been created.
                   – Shift: Shows shift numbers 2 through 9. The rate code has one shift by
                     default.
                   – Rate Value: Type the monetary rate value for the shift.
                   – Description: Type a description of the rate shift.


4.5.3 Alternate rates
               Rates are grouped in rate tables. IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
               provides a standard rate table that is typically used for billing processing.
               Alternate rate tables can be defined to provide different rate schemes for other
               clients.


94   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
To define a new rate table, do these steps:
           1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC).
           2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance →
              Rates.
           3. On the Rate List Maintenance page, click New Table or Duplicate Table.
           4. On the New Rate Table or Duplicate Rate Table page, type the name to
              assign to the rate table.


4.5.4 Proration table
           If certain usage cannot be measured from the input data, rates can be calculated
           by assigning parts of the overall usage by percentage to different account codes.
           This process is called prorating the usage. The translation of the usage is
           performed using a proration table.

           The proration table is an ASCII text file that defines the identifier values and rate
           codes used in the proration process. The proration table must contain records
           with the following comma-delimited fields: input identifier value, output identifier
           value, percentage, and rate code.

           Copy the prorate.txt from the sampleprocessesProrate sample directory.
           Modify the prorate.txt table to include the information for each identifier or
           account code for which proration needs to be performed. Change these values:
              The input identifier value to prorate from. The identifier value is matched
              against the following information in the input file:
              An identifier name that has been defined in the job file.
              The values for that identifier name.

           Assume that you have an application that controls print in a centralized
           environment and that you want to split all resources used by account code
           AAABB among three different accounts: A1, A2, and A3. A1 on average uses
           about 50 percent of the resources assigned to the AAABB account, A2 uses
           about 30 percent, and A3 uses about 20 percent. To prorate the costs associated
           with this application among the three accounts, create the table shown in
           Example 4-3.

           Example 4-3 Proration table sample
           AAABB,A1,50,All
           AAABB,A2,30,All
           AAABB,A3,20,All




                                                                  Chapter 4. Configuration   95
You can also split individual resources among multiple accounts. Using the
               preceding example, assume that the only resources from account AAABB that
               you want to prorate are represented by the rate codes Z001 and Z002, as shown
               in Example 4-4.

               Example 4-4 Proration with specific rate codes
               AAABB,A1,50,Z001
               AAABB,A2,30,Z001
               AAABB,A3,20,Z001
               AAABB,A1,50,Z002
               AAABB,A2,30,Z002
               AAABB,A3,20,Z002

               In this example, all resources other than Z001 and Z002 would still be charged to
               the AAABB account.

               If you want to charge account AAABB for a portion of the resources used, for
               example, you want to charge account AAABB 60 percent for all resources and
               account AACCC 40 percent, create the table shown in Example 4-5.

               Example 4-5 Proration with percentage point
               AAABB,AAABB,60,All
               AAABB,AAACC,40,All


4.5.5 CPU normalization
               Another modification of the rate can be applied to CPU values. Different
               machines can have relatively different CPU speeds. The CPU usage must be
               normalized so that we can charge each usage in a comparable fashion. This
               CPU normalization is performed by doing the following steps:
               1. Include the NORMALIZE CPU VALUES control statement in one of the
                  following locations:
                  a. The job file used to collect and process the data. Use the Bill program
                     controlCard attribute (that is, <Parameter controlCard="NORMALIZE CPU
                     VALUES" />).
                  b. The control file for the Bill program. The control file must be defined in the
                     job file using the Bill program controlFile attribute. For example,
                     controlFile=”MyBillCntl.txt”. The default file name is called
                     BillCntl.txt.




96   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
c. For each rate code for which you perform normalization, open the
                  Integrated Solutions Console Rate Maintenance page and select the CPU
                  value check box.
            2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → CPU
               Normalization.
            3. On the CPU Normalization List Maintenance page, click New.
            4. On the CPU Normalization Maintenance page, complete the following:
               System ID               Type the name of the system. For z/OS, this is the
                                       four-character System Model ID. For UNIX and
                                       Windows, it is the computer name. Note that the input
                                       file must contain an identifier named System_ID to
                                       identify the system name.
               Application or subsystem
                                   Type the application or subsystem name. This is any
                                   other system value that can narrow the normalization
                                   (for example, the CICS® region name, the DB2 plan
                                   name, or the Oracle instance). Note that the input file
                                   must contain an identifier named Work_ID to identify
                                   the application or subsystem name.
               Normalization factor Type the normalization factor. For example, an
                                    organization has two z/OS systems, AL90 and AL95.
                                    System AL95 is 20 percent faster than AL90. If using
                                    AL95 as the base system, use a factor of .80 to
                                    normalize AL90 to reflect the speed of AL95.


4.5.6 Rate shift
            Rates can be provided on different shifts. A rate shift can be defined as follows:
            1. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance →
               Rates.
            2. On the Rate List Maintenance page, click the View pop-up menu icon to the
               right of the rate code to assign the rate shifts to and then click Edit Rate
               Shifts. On the Rate Shift Maintenance page, complete the following:
               Rate Value              Type the monetary rate value for the shift.
               Description             Type a description of the rate shift.
               Shift numbers 2 through 9 are shown. The rate code has one shift by default.




                                                                  Chapter 4. Configuration   97
98   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
5


    Chapter 5.   Administration
                 This chapter discusses administering IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
                 V7.1. The discussion is covered in the following sections:
                     5.1, “Integrated Solution Console” on page 100
                     5.2, “Load tracking” on page 102
                     5.3, “Tuning” on page 103
                     5.4, “Operating and updating” on page 105




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved.                                          99
5.1 Integrated Solution Console
               The Integrated Solution Console is the primary administration interface for IBM
               Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. You access the Web console using the
               address http://hostname:11052/ibm/console/ using a Web browser. After
               logging in, the initial window shown in Figure 5-1 appears. We verify that the
               product information matches the version that we have installed.




               Figure 5-1 Verifying the installation of the application server

               The tasks or navigation menu is on the left side of the window. Figure 5-2 on
               page 101 shows the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager related menu
               items.




100   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Figure 5-2 Usage and Accounting Manager tasks

The tasks are:
   Chargeback Maintenance, which provides data processing options:
   Job Runner            To control and modify the data processing.
   Job Files             To maintain the data processing jobs.
   Log files             For daily checks.
   Samples               View samples for creating new job files.
   Load Tracking         Check for data loaded into the database.
   Clients               Set up the parameters for an client used by
                         accounting.
   Rates                 Define the parameter and costs for a resource.
   Rate Groups           Group the rates for reporting purposes.
   System Maintenance, which defines basic configurations:
   Data Source           Define database and WEB service connection
                         information.
   User                  Access control.
   User groups           Organize the roles for the users.
   Calendar              Set up the calendar.
   Account Code Structure
                      Define the structure for accounting data identifiers.




                                                 Chapter 5. Administration    101
CPU Normalization        Updating the table for normalization based on the
                                           identifier named here.
                  Identifiers              Listing used and unused Identifiers and deleting
                                           unused Identifiers.
                  Rate Identifier          Run automatic update of Rate Identifiers.
                  Configuration            For most basic configuration data, such as paths and
                                           trace level.
                  Reports                  Define and list reports available.
                  Report Groups            Organize the reports in groups.
                  Report Distribution Define the distribution of reports.
                  Transaction              A wizard for editing of the transaction table for
                                           frequently used non-usage input data.
                  Database                 To control or check the database settings:
                      •   Initialize Database: Do the initial setup of the database.
                      •   Upgrade Database: Upgrade a database after updating the IBM Tivoli
                          Usage and Accounting Manager application server software.
                      •   Object Manager: Define and maintain indices, stored procedures,
                          tables, and views.
                      •   Table Viewer: Check the content of a table. If an ISC session is pending
                          for some time, it will be disconnected and the last action may be lost.



5.2 Load tracking
               One of the major administration items for IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
               Manager is the data loading to the database. Before the data load, all source
               data are just files on the file systems. Once the data is loaded into IBM Tivoli
               Usage and Accounting Manager, it is tracked and controlled by the application.

               The loading information is stored in the Load Tracking table
               (CIMSLOADTRACKING). You can access the Load Tracking information from the
               Integrated Solution Console by selecting Usage and Accounting Manager →
               Chargeback Maintenance → Load Tracking.

               The load tracking information can be filtered using the Source Feed, Load Type,
               or other fields. The filtering can use Exact Match or Contains as necessary.

               A sample load tracking window is shown in Figure 5-3 on page 103.




102   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Figure 5-3 Load Tracking content



5.3 Tuning
                As with any database-based solution, IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
                must be continuously tuned. The tuning process ensures that it works at least at
                an acceptable performance. The main tuning activities relate to having fast
                access to usage and accounting data for reporting. It should also ensure
                acceptable response time for administration and job processing.

                Tuning aspects are covered in the following sections:
                    5.3.1, “Tuning Web console for administration” on page 104
                    5.3.2, “Tuning job processing” on page 104
                    5.3.3, “Tuning report generation” on page 105




                                                                  Chapter 5. Administration   103
5.3.1 Tuning Web console for administration
               The Web console is based on WebSphere Application Server. While the
               application does not have any tuning parameters, there are still some
               performance options to be performed:
                  Determine the memory usage of WebSphere Application Server. Add
                  physical memory if needed. The more the user accesses the Integrated
                  Solution Console, the more memory WebSphere needs. You can set or limit
                  the WebSphere Application Server Java heap size in its configuration.
                  Determine the CPU load. Add virtual or logical CPUs for parallel processing.
                  If there is performance contention for memory or processing, consider
                  separating the database and application server. However, this can generate
                  additional network traffic between them. Having the database and application
                  server separate but on a local sub-net based on high speed network, such as
                  Gigabyte Ethernet, would help.


5.3.2 Tuning job processing
               Job processing includes reading source data for collection, performing
               transformation, and then loading the data into an IBM Tivoli Usage and
               Accounting Manager database. Most of the steps and stages of the job are
               running Java Virtual Machine. There are some performance considerations for
               the job processing:
                  Add virtual or logical CPUs for parallel processing or run jobs on different
                  machines to increase the processing power. However, running the jobs on
                  multiple machine can affect network load and produce a need for job
                  synchronization if the jobs are dependent on each other.
                  Memory contention from a large number of running jobs can be alleviated by
                  having separate processing servers. This also helps with network load and
                  synchronization problems.
                  Database loading performance can be improved by having the database
                  properly tuned for insertion. IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager is
                  typically used in a database in Insert and Query mode only. The job mainly
                  performing insertions, not updates. The performance of inserting data into
                  tables can be ensured by doing the following tasks:
                  – Pruning old unused data regularly ensures that data remains manageable.
                  – Ensuring tables have good organization using the REORG utility.
                  – Ensuring the table statistics are current using the RUNSTAT utility.




104   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
– Having the heavily used tables (CIMSSUMMARY, CIMSDETAIL,
                CIMSDETAILIDENT, and maybe CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION) on their
                own fast disk storage.


5.3.3 Tuning report generation
           Report generation of usage and accounting data is the end deliverable of IBM
           Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. This is the function that must be defined
           for outputting data that has been processed. Report tuning is mainly tuning the
           access to data tables (CIMSSUMMARY, CIMSDETAIL, CIMSDETAILIDENT, and
           maybe CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION).
              Database tuning actions that must be performed on a regular basis:
              – Pruning old unused data regularly to ensure a manageable data size; this
                can be performed using the DBpurge job step.
              – Ensuring tables have good organization using the REORG utility.
              – Ensuring the table statistics are current using the RUNSTAT utility.
              – Having the heavily used tables on their own fast disk storage.
              Report SQL tuning
              SQL tuning for specific reports can be performed independently. Collect
              information about regularly used and long running reports. For those reports,
              determine the tables and columns used for sorting. You may define additional
              indices for heavy used columns.

            Note: Creating additional indices may reduce the insertion performance of a
            table.



5.4 Operating and updating
           This section discusses some operational aspect of IBM Tivoli Usage and
           Accounting Manager. The topics are discussed in the following sections:
              5.4.1, “Startup” on page 106
              5.4.2, “Shutdown” on page 1065.4.3, “Updating” on page 107




                                                             Chapter 5. Administration   105
5.4.1 Startup
               The startup of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager is performed by the
               administration server system. There are several startup methods for the
               embedded WebSphere Application Server:
                  Windows systems:
                  – Program FilesibmtuambinstartServer.exe
                  – Program FilesibmtuamewasbinstartServer.bat server1
                  UNIX/Linux systems:
                  – /opt/ibm/tuam/bin/startServer.sh
                  – /opt/ibm/tuam/ewas/bin/startServer.sh server1

               Figure 5-4 details the messages produced by the application as it starts.


                [root@srv105 bin]# ./startServer.sh server1
                ADMU0116I: Tool information is being logged in file
                /opt/ibm/tuam/ewas/profiles/AppSrv01/logs/server1/startServer.log
                ADMU0128I: Starting tool with the AppSrv01 profile
                ADMU3100I: Reading configuration for server: server1
                ADMU3200I: Server launched. Waiting for initialization status.
                ADMU3000I: Server server1 open for e-business; process id is 29586
               Figure 5-4 Starting ISC

               When the Integrated Solution Console WebSphere is started, open a Web
               browser and direct it to the Integrated Solution Console at the following address:
               http://srv105:11052/ibm/console


5.4.2 Shutdown
               The startup IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager is performed by the
               administration server system. There are several startup methods for the
               embedded WebSphere Application Server:
                  Windows systems:
                  – Program FilesibmtuambinstopServer.exe
                  – Program FilesibmtuamewasbinstopServer.bat server1
                  UNIX/Linux systems:
                  – /opt/ibm/tuam/bin/stopServer.sh
                  – /opt/ibm/tuam/ewas/bin/stopServer.sh server1



106   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
5.4.3 Updating
          When updating the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager, do these steps:
          1. Inform all users of the planned outage.
          2. Wait for running jobs to be finished.
          3. Stop the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server.
          4. Stop any scheduling tools for job processing.
          5. Perform an update of the software.
          6. Start the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server.
          7. Start the scheduling of job processing.
          8. Check that the application is accessible using the ISC Web interface.




                                                             Chapter 5. Administration   107
108   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
6


    Chapter 6.   Job creation
                 This chapter discusses job file creation for IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
                 Manager V7.1. The discussion is covered in the following sections:
                     6.1, “XML job creation” on page 110
                     6.3, “Integrator program” on page 119
                     6.4, “Account code mapping” on page 123
                     6.5, “Non-integrator steps” on page 126




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved.                                                109
6.1 XML job creation
               This section discusses job file structures and a generic processing overview.


6.1.1 Job file structure
               XML is a tagged file format similar to Hypertext Markup Language (HTML). XML
               only enforces the usage of a pair of start and end tags; the value of the tag and
               their attributes are enforced by the referenced extensible style document (.xsd
               file). For Job Runner’s job, the style is TUAMJobs.xsd, which is stored in the
               /config/schemas directory of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager.

               The structure of the XML file is shown in Figure 6-1.


                                        Jobs

                                          Job
                                               Process

                                                Steps
                                                  Step     Step   Step
                                                   Stage

                                                   Stage




                                               Process

                                                Steps
                                                  Step     Step   Step
                                                   Stage

                                                   Stage




               Figure 6-1 Job file structure

               The components of a job file are:
               Jobs                     This is the primary XML container for a Job Runner job
                                        file.
               Job                      A definition of a job provides some global parameters of
                                        the job and some e-mail notification parameters. There is
                                        typically one job per jobs.




110   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Process                A process represents a sequentially processed items. You
                       can have multiple processes within a job. Each process
                       group would invoke a separate job runner instance to run
                       in parallel.
Steps                  The steps construct is a container for step items.
Step                   A step is the actual definition of what the individual
                       processing would perform. A step runs an actual program.
                       Typically, a step would perform a single processing task,
                       such as billing, scanning, sorting, cleanup, or database
                       loading; however, there is a special step called integrator
                       that can be comprised of multiple stages.
Stage                  A stage is a construct within the integrator step that
                       signifies an action within the integrator step.

For regular jobs, you can use the command-line Job Runner statements to
integrate IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager jobs into your scheduling
system, as shown in Example 6-1.

Example 6-1 Job Runner command line usage in scheduler definitions
/opt/ibm/tuam/bin/startJobRunner.sh LoadVMware.xml >> LoadVMware.log 2>&1
/opt/ibm/tuam/bin/startJobRunner.sh LoadTDSz1.xml -date today >>
LoadVMware.log 2>&1

The return code for Job Runner might be:
0                      No warning or error
4                      Warning
16                     Error during processing
255                    Syntax error within the parameters

Figure 6-2 on page 112 shows the graphical user interface (GUI) for the job
handling. If you select Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback
Maintenance → Job Runner → Job Files, you can validate the XML syntax, run
the job, and make small changes to an existing job. For editing and creating
larger job files, we recommend using an specialized XML editor.




                                                     Chapter 6. Job creation    111
Figure 6-2 shows the Job Files menu.

                 Note: As the job file must reside in the jobfiles directory in the processing
                 server, the XML editor should have access to this folder or path.




Figure 6-2 The Job Runner Job maintenance


6.1.2 Generic processing overview
                The data processing in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager is similar for
                all data sources. Figure 6-3 on page 113 shows the general processing steps for
                data handling with IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. The order or mix
                of the steps may be different, depending on the collectors used.




112    Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Collected                                  Common Source
          data files                                   Resource                 Aggregation
                                                       (CSR) file

                                   Data
                                  Collector
                                                                              Summarized data
                                                                                  (CSR)
       Web or data base
         dataSource                                         reprocess



                                                      Exception file             Account
                                                                                                    Account Table
                                                         (CSR)                  Conversion


                                                                                Output file
                                                                                  Output file
                                                                                 (CSR+) files
                                                                                   Output
                                                                                   (CSR+)
                                                                                     (CSR+)
          ITUAMDB
                                          Database
                                            Load
                                                                                   Scan
                                                                                 (Merging)



        Billing Summary                               Billing Output            Merged output
                                   Ident file
                file                                         file                 (CSR+)




                                                                          Normalization &            Normalization
                                                                       Billing (applying rate)       & Rate Table



Figure 6-3 Generic process overview with common steps

                   The process steps in Figure 6-3 are:
                   1. Many systems already have a resource usage collection function and IBM
                      Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager will use this data for further
                      processing. The main processing in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
                      Manager is based on the Common Source Resource (CSR) format. The initial
                      processing step converts the existing data (SQL table, delimited file, or
                      others) into CSR format prior to IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
                      processing.
                          a. If the metering data is collected in files, these will be transferred to the
                             application server and converted to CSR format if needed. Some
                             converters may also include pre-aggregation.


                                                                                         Chapter 6. Job creation     113
b. If the metering data can be accessed on a database or Web page, the
                     data extract made by IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager will be
                     directly from the CSR format.
                  The IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Integrator can include CSR
                  conversion, aggregation, account code conversion, and sorting in one step,
                  thereby producing only one output file.
               2. CSR data is aggregated mostly on a daily basis. Aggregation means
                  summarizing the data based on given identifiers. It calculates the sum of the
                  data of resource fields based on the identifier values.
               3. Account conversion matches the metering data to the account code structure,
                  and all records that do not fit are put in an exception file, and this exception
                  file may be reprocessed later after some intervention.
               4. CSR or CSR+ files of the same type can be scanned into one file at any time
                  during the processing.
               5. Normalization of CPU values and multiplying by the Rate code is the next
                  step. The selected Rate Table will be used for calculating the money value. If
                  the Rate is of the type CPU, the recalculation based on the Normalization
                  Table is done as well.
                  Summarize data on the financial and organization level, which provides the
                  billing files: billing detail, billing summary, and identifier list.
               6. Loading all output data into the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
                  DB completes the processing. There is an automatic duplicate detection that
                  prevents us from duplicate data loading.

                Note: We recommend creating CSR+ records as input for the billing step, or,
                alternatively, use the Integrator Sort on the account code. The number of
                billing summary rows in the database can be reduced on a CSR file sorted by
                the account code. CSR+ data is automatically sorted by the bill process.



6.2 Syntax of main Job Runner directives
               The main Job Runner job file directives are jobs, job, process, steps, and step.
               Additionally, there is the default directive that provides default parameters on
               each level. We explain these directives here.




114   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
6.2.1 Jobs
             The jobs directive is the primary directive structure of the job file. It contains
             global directives for the whole job. Typically, a job file only contains a single job,
             so a jobs directive is directly followed by only a job directive.

             The arguments of a jobs directive are:
             xmlns                   The name space for the XML file. You would put in
                                     xmlns=”http://www.ibm.com/TUAMJobs.xsd” for an IBM
                                     Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager job. This is
                                     required for the jobs directive.
             smtpServer              The smtpServer that would be used to send notifications.
             smtpFrom                The indication for the source’s e-mail address.
             smtpTo                  The destination’s e-mail address.
             smtpSubject             Subject line.
             smtpBody                Body text.
             smtpSendJobLog          Boolean parameter on whether or not include the job log
                                     in the body of the e-mail.
             joblogFolder            Explicitly specifying the log folder for the Job output. The
                                     default path is %HomePath%/logs/jobrunner/<jobid>.
             processFolder           Explicitly specifying where to write or read source and
                                     generated files. The default is under
                                     %HomePath%/processes/. This process folder is accessible
                                     by the %ProcessFolder% variable.

             The jobs directive can only contain the job directive.


6.2.2 Job
             The job directive is similar to the jobs directive. The specification on the jobs level
             applies. Most of the time, this is where you would specify these parameters.

             The arguments of a job directive are:
             id                      The name of the job (required). This name is used to
                                     determine the job log output folder.
             description             A descriptive name for the job.
             dataSourceId            An optional data source ID that specifies which database
                                     should be used for the job database connection, including
                                     the configuration settings and loading data. The value



                                                                      Chapter 6. Job creation   115
defaults to the Default.Processing data source, as
                                       specified in the local registry.tuam.xml file.
               processPriorityClass
                                       Priority of the job.
               stopOnProcessFailure
                                  Whether or not to stop the processing if a step fails.
               active                  Whether or not the job is active.
               joblogShowStepOutput
                                 Whether or not to write the step output to the job log
                                 result.
               joblogShowStepParameters
                                 Whether or not to show the step parameter in the job log
                                 output.
               joblogWriteToDB         This is not implemented in IBM Tivoli Usage and
                                       Accounting Manager V7.1.
               joblogWriteToTextFile
                                    Whether or not a text file is created in the job log output
                                    directory.
               joblogWriteToXMLFile
                                  Whether or not an XML file is created in the job log output
                                  directory, the ISC only uses the XML file for displaying the
                                  output; if this option is set to false, you cannot see the
                                  result from ISC.
               smtpServer              The smtpServer that would be used to send a notification.
               smtpFrom                The indication for the source’s e-mail address.
               smtpTo                  The destination’s e-mail address.
               smtpSubject             Subject line.
               smtpBody                Body text.
               smtpSendJobLog          Boolean parameter for whether or not include the job log
                                       in the body of the e-mail.
               joblogFolder            Explicitly specifying the log folder for the Job output. The
                                       default path is %HomePath%/logs/jobrunner/<jobid>.
               processFolder           Explicitly specifying where to write or read source and
                                       generated files. The default is under
                                       %HomePath%/samples/processes/; this process folder is
                                       accessible by the %ProcessFolder% variable.




116   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
The job directive can contain the following directives:
                Defaults: Provides additional default parameters for the job elements.
                Process: This is the most common direct node under the job directive. You
                can have multiple processes that execute in parallel.
                Steps: Collection of step directives that must be executed sequentially for this
                job. This is typically put under a process directive.


6.2.3 Defaults
           The defaults directive provides name value pairs for the containing level (job,
           process, or step). The defaults directive can contain any name and value pairs as
           arguments.

           The defaults directive can contain the default directive. The default directive has
           the attribute name and value that can also be used to set any default name and
           value pairs. The reserved names that has special processing function are
           LogDate, RetentionFlag and programName.


6.2.4 Process
           The process directive is used to signify a collection of steps directives that must
           be executed sequentially. It is common practice to put a process directive under a
           job (instead of steps directly) to allow flexibility when adding other process
           directives.

           The arguments of a process directive are:
           id                       The name of the process (required). This also indicates
                                    the sub folder for data files in the processes directory.
           description              A descriptive name for the process.
           processPriorityClass
                                    Process priority.
           buildProcessFolder Whether or not the process folder is created (if it does not
                              already exist).
           joblogShowStepOutput
                             Whether or not to write the step output to the job log
                             result.
           joblogShowStepParameters
                             Whether or not to show the step parameter in the job log
                             output.
           active                   Whether or not to execute this process.


                                                                  Chapter 6. Job creation   117
The process directive can contain the following directives:
                    Defaults
                    Steps


6.2.5 Steps
               The steps directive is a container for step directives. It only has a single
               argument, which is:
               stopOnStepFailure       Whether or not to stop the execution in a step that is
                                       considered failed or in error.

               The steps directive can only contain the step directive.


6.2.6 Step
               The step directive is the main specification of what the job is doing. It can be
               written differently depending on the function you are invoking. A step can also be
               invoked directly using the StepRunner Java program with the arguments of
               nodename, programName, and programType.

               The arguments for the step directive are:
               id                      A unique name for the step is required.
               description             A descriptive name for the step.
               programName             The name of the program.
               type                    Program type. The only acceptable values are
                                       ConvertToCSR or process.
               programType             The type of program. Some types are Java, WSF, or
                                       console.
               processPriorityClass
                                       Step priority.
               buildProcessFolder This provides an override for the build process folder.
               joblogShowStepOutput
                                 Whether or not to write the step output to the job log
                                 result.
               joblogShowStepParameters
                                 Whether or not to show the step parameter in the job log
                                 output.
               active                  Whether or not to execute this step.



118   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
The combination of only programName and programType determines the
         program or action that this step would invoke.

         The step can contain the following directives:
            parameters: Collection of step parameters.
            Step specific directives. Depending on the programName and programType
            combination, these directives are mutually exclusive, and are only used with
            the corresponding program invoked:
            –   integrator
            –   generateexternalfile
            –   acct
            –   bill
            –   dbload
            –   dbpurge
            –   jobfileconversion
            –   generatexmlfile
            –   cimswindisk or windisk
            –   cimswineventlog or wineventlog



6.3 Integrator program
         The integrator program is a specialized Java program that can contain multiple
         stages. This program is used to manipulate and convert a CSR or CSR+
         formatted file. The first stage is an input definition, while the last stage is called
         CSROutput. Each stage of the integrator program is a record processor; they
         process each record and pass it to the next stage, similar to pipeline processing.

         An integrator step has both required and optional sections:
            <Input> is required and must have at least one of the following elements:
            – <Collector>
            – <Parameter>
            – <File>
            <Stage name=”function”> processing stage is needed, and you may use as
            many as are needed.
            <Stage name=”CSROutput”> or <Stage name=”CSRPlusOutput”> is
            required.




                                                                Chapter 6. Job creation    119
The structure of an integrator step is illustrated in Figure 6-4.


                       <Step id=”integrator” programType=”java” type=”Process”>
                          <Integrator>
                             <Input name="CSRInput">
                                <Files><file name=”CSRinput.txt” /></files>
                             </Input>
                             <Stage name="CreateIdentifierFromValue" active="true">
                             <Stage name="CreateIdentifierFromRegEx" active="true">
                             <Stage name="Aggregator" active="true"></Stage>
                                <Parameters><Parameter defaultAggregation="false" />
                                </Parameters>
                             </Stage>
                             <Stage name="ResourceConversion" active="true">
                             <Stage name="CreateResourceFromValue" active="true">
                             <Stage name="RenameFields" active="true">
                             <Stage name="CreateIdentifierFromTable" active="true"></Stage>
                             <Stage name="CreateIdentifierFromIdentifiers" active="true">
                             <Stage name="DropFields" active="true">
                             <Stage name="Sort" active="true"></Stage>
                          <!-- the next stage is required as last stage of integrator -->
                             <Stage name="CSROutput" active="true">
                                <Files><File name="CSRoutput.txt"/></Files>
                             </Stage>
                          </Integrator>
                       </Step>
                     Figure 6-4 A selection of the most common ConvertToCSR integrator functions

                     The processing of the integrator step depicted in Figure 6-4 is shown in
                     Figure 6-5.



                       Stage                                                                  CSR.txt
                                          Stage
        Input      CreateIdentifier                        Stage             Stage
                                      CreateIdentifier
   Collector/CSR      Lookup                                Sort           Aggregate
                                      Account_Code
                      mapping




Figure 6-5 Integrator processing

                     The following sections discuss the stages of the integrator program.




120      Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
6.3.1 Input
              We can choose one of several types for input. The keywords for input names are:
              AIXAAInput         AIX Advanced Accounting
              ApacheCommonLogFormat
                                 Apache HTTP server common log
              CollectorInput     Specifying a collector program by the Collector name
              CSRInput           Standard CSR file
              NCSAInput          WebSphere collector
              NotesDatabaseSizeInput
                                 Lotus Notes collector
              NotesEmailInput    Lotus Notes collector
              NotesUsageInput    Lotus Notes collector
              W3CWinLog          Microsoft Internet Information Server collector

              Specifically for the CollectorInput type, you can have the collector defined as
              follows:
              DATABASE           Database
              DELIMITED          Comma or tab delimited file
              EXCHANGE2007       Microsoft Exchange server
              FIXEDFIELD         Fixed field files
              TDS                Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database
              TPC                TotalStorage Productivity Center
              TRANSACTION        CIMSTransaction table converter
              VMWARE             Web Services SDK call to VMware Virtual Center
              WEBSPHEREXDFINEGRAIN
                                 WebSphere collector
              WEBSPHEREXDSERVER WebSphere collector

              To specify the default folder for transferred collector files, we use the variable
              %CollectorLogs% in the path definition.


6.3.2 Processing
              The processing stages can be read from <TUAM reference>. The stage functions
              are:
                 Aggregator
                 Merging data where all the identifiers are the same and merging them into a
                 single record by summarizing the resource values.
                 CreateIdentifierFromIdentifiers
                 Copying, parsing, and merging identifiers into a new one.



                                                                     Chapter 6. Job creation       121
CreateIdentifierFromRegEx
                  Copying, parsing, and merging identifiers using a regular expression.
                  CreateIdentifierFromTable
                  Using a text lookup table to search a matching entry and put it into an
                  identifier.
                  CreateIdentifierFromValue
                  Writing an identifier from a fixed string.
                  CreateResourceFromConversion
                  Calculate a new resource from other resources.
                  CreateResourceFromValue
                  Create a fixed values resource (we can create resource names longer than
                  eight characters, but once we want to define them as a rate, the limitation of
                  eight characters will stop us from using them).
                  DropFields
                  Drop a field, either an identifier or a resource.
                  DropIdentifiers
                  Drop the identifiers field.
                  DropResources
                  Drop the resources field.
                  ExcludeRecsByDate
                  Filter some records by a certain date.
                  ExcludeRecsByPresence
                  Filter some records because of the presence of a field.
                  ExcludeRecsByValue
                  Filter some records by the value for a field.
                  IdentifierConversionFromTable
                  Change an identifier using the conversion from the table.
                  IncludeRecsByDate
                  Filter records that do not have a certain date.
                  IncludeRecsByPresence
                  Filter some records that does not have a certain field.
                  IncludeRecsByValue
                  Only get the records that have a certain value.


122   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
MaxRecords
               Include only a number of records from the CSR file. This function is best for
               debugging a collection job.
               Prorate
               Calculate a resource value based on prorating the value of the other
               resource.
               RenameFields
               Rename an identifier or a resource in bulk.
               ResourceConversion
               Calculating a new value for a resource based on one or more resource
               values.
               Sort
               Sort the CSR file records based on a certain identifiers’ value.


6.3.3 Output
          The output types can only be in the CSROutput or CSRPlusOutput format. The
          output encloses a Files directive with a single File directive. A sample Output
          stage is shown in Example 6-2.

          Example 6-2 Sample CSRPlusOutput stage
          <Stage name="CSRPlusOutput" active="true">
             <Files>
                <File name="%ProcessFolder%/server1/%LogDate_End%.txt" />
             </Files>
          </Stage>



6.4 Account code mapping
          Matching the CSR record identifier from the collected source to a proper account
          code that adheres to the account code structure is required for proper reporting.
          We collect the data in the CSR format, typically from the input collection process,
          as discussed in 6.3, “Integrator program” on page 119.

          The recommended way of creating the Account_Code field is by using the
          Integrator. An older program called Acct is still valid for backward compatibilities.
          However, older programs like Acct should be made obsolete as you roll out new
          components, in favor of the integrator account conversion.


                                                                 Chapter 6. Job creation   123
Figure 6-6 show the overview of an Account Code conversion.


                           SYSID,SC67


                            SYSID,ABC


                           SYSID,LNXT




                                                    CreateIdentifierFromTable
                                             B,G,      ITSOFINANCE_____WINDOWS_____
                                             H,R,      ITSOADMIN_______LINUX_______
                                             S,Z,      ITSOBACKOFFICE__MVS_________




                           SYSID,SC67      ACCTMP:ITSOBACKOFFICE__MVS_________


                            SYSID,ABC                                                                            Exception


                           SYSID,LNXT      ACCTMP:ITSOADMIN_______LINUX_______




                                                CreateIdentifierFromIdentifier
                                                    Account_Code = ACCTMP + SYSID




                   SYSID,SC67   ACCTMP:ITSOBACKOFFICE__MVS_________       ITSOBACKOFFICE__MVS_________SC67____


                   SYSID,LNXT   ACCTMP:ITSOADMIN_______LINUX_______       ITSOADMIN_______LINUX_______LNXT____




                                                            DropFields
                                                              ACCTMP




                           SYSID,SC67         Account_Code:ITSOBACKOFFICE__MVS_________SC67____


                           SYSID,LNXT         Account_Code:ITSOADMIN_______LINUX_______LNXT____


               Figure 6-6 The Account Code conversion using Integrator




124   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
In Figure 6-6 on page 124, we show that the SYSID is used as the key to look up
the value of the ACCTMP field based on the conversion table (AcctTabl.txt). If
there is a record that does not have a matching result, the record is sent to the
exception file. The next stage appends the SYSID to ACCTMP to create the
Account_Code identifier. Then we can remove the ACCTMP field. Example 6-3
shows the integrator implementation of Figure 6-6 on page 124.

Example 6-3 Account conversion using Job Runner Integrator
<!-- get account code from table based on SYSID (hostname) -->
<Stage name="CreateIdentifierFromTable" active="true">
   <Identifiers>
      <Identifier name="ACCTMP">
         <FromIdentifiers>
            <FromIdentifier name="SYSID" offset="1" length="10"/>
         </FromIdentifiers>
      </Identifier>
   </Identifiers>
   <Files>
      <File name="/opt/ibm/tuam/processes/Accttabl.txt" type="table"/>
      <File name="Exception-%LogDate_End%.txt" type="exception"
         format="CSROutput"/>
   </Files>
   <Parameters>
      <!-- exception and writeNoMatch should be set as such -->
      <Parameter exceptionProcess="true"/>
      <Parameter writeNoMatch="false"/>
      <Parameter sort="true"/>
      <Parameter upperCase="false"/>
      <Parameter modifyIfExists="true"/>
   </Parameters>
</Stage>
<!-- add hostname as last part to the account code -->
<Stage name="CreateIdentifierFromIdentifiers" active="true">
   <Identifiers>
      <Identifier name="Account_Code">
         <FromIdentifiers>
           <FromIdentifier name="ACCTMP" offset="1" length="28"/>
           <FromIdentifier name="SYSID" offset="1" length="8"/>
         </FromIdentifiers>
      </Identifier>
   </Identifiers>
   <Parameters>
      <Parameter modifyIfExists="true"/>
      <Parameter keepLength="true"/>



                                                     Chapter 6. Job creation   125
</Parameters>
               </Stage>
               <!-- drop temporary account code identifier -->
               <Stage name="DropFields" active="true">
                  <Fields>
                     <Field name="ACCTMP"/>
                  </Fields>
               </Stage>

               Using the CreateIdentifierFromTable function, you can specify whether to use
               exception processing with the parameter exceptionProcess. If it is true, all
               unmatched identifiers will be collected in a exception file, keeping the structure of
               the input file for this step; otherwise, the identifier is added with a blank value.

               The conversion table for CreateIdentifierFromTable is case sensitive. You can
               use the upperCase=true parameter to indicate that the FromIdentifier field is
               converted to upper case before matching occurs.

               The file specified will be overwritten unless you add the variable
               %LogDate_End% to the definition. There will be no accumulation from the last
               processing, and we do recommend a separate reprocessing job; otherwise, you
               would need to unload all the data and reprocess the complete job once the
               account table is updated.



6.5 Non-integrator steps
               The step is mainly governed by the progamType and programName attributes.
               These attributes determine the way processing is performed. Our test indicates
               that the type attributes, though they is required, does not affect processing.
               Table 6-1 shows a combination of programName and programType and the
               associated program they actually invoke. Other combinations may exist for
               maintaining backward compatibilities.

               Table 6-1 Program combinations
                programType      programName              Invoked program

                Java             Integrator               integrator.StepRunIntegrator

                Java             SendMail                 mail.StepRunMail

                Java             Acct                     acct.StepRunAcct

                Java             Bill                     bill.StepRunBill




126   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
programType      programName              Invoked program

 Java             Sort                     sort.StepRunSort

 Java             DBLoad                   load.StepRunLoad

 Java             DBPurge                  purge.StepRunPurge

 Java             JobFileConversion        jobfileconversion.StepRunJBConversion

 Java             Rpd                      rpd.StepRunRpd

 Java             Scan                     scan.StepRunScan

 Java             Cleanup                  cleanup.StepRunCleanupScan

 Java             FileTransfer             filetransfer.StepRunFileTransfer

 Java             WaitFile                 waitfile.StepRunWaitFile

 Java             <java program name>      java.StepRunJava

 Console          <program name>           console.StepRunConsole

 WSF              <WSF script name>        wsf.StepRunWSF

 Java             SingleProcessStepa       StepRunAcct - StepRunSort - StepRunBill
   a. A special step that has the programName of SingleProcessStep and
      programType of Java would generate an automatic job with a set of accounting
      processing (StepRunAcct), sorting (StepRunSort), and billing (StepRunBill)
      steps.

All the directives under steps have the following general attributes:
joblogShowStepOutput
                  Whether or not to write the step output to the job log
                  result.
joblogShowStepParameters
                  Whether or not to show the step parameter in the job log
                  output.
processFolder            Provides an override for the process folder. This does not
                         apply to the mail program. Note that scan, sort CleanUp,
                         Scan, FileTransfer, and WaitFile uses ProcessFolder (an
                         uppercase P).
dataSourceId             Provides an override for data source access in the
                         associated step. This is only used for Load, Purge, and
                         JobConversion.
dbConfigurationFile Database configuration file for Acct and Bill. This does not
                    seem to be used.


                                                        Chapter 6. Job creation      127
We discuss, in the following sections, the detailed parameters and processing
               function of each invoked program:
                  “Mail” on page 128
                  “Acct” on page 128
                  “Bill” on page 130
                  “Cleanup” on page 131
                  “Sort” on page 132
                  “DBLoad” on page 132
                  “DBPurge” on page 133
                  “Scan” on page 133
                  “Windows script file” on page 136
                  “File transfer” on page 134
                  “Wait file” on page 135
                  “Remote product deployment” on page 135
                  “Job conversion” on page 135
                  “Java” on page 136
                  “Console” on page 136

               The discussion of the integrator is provided in 6.3, “Integrator program” on
               page 119.


6.5.1 Mail
               The mail step allows you to send an e-mail message. The applicable parameters
               are:
               SMTPServer              The SMTP server that would be used to send notification
               FromEmail               The indication for the source’s e-mail address
               ToEmail                 The destination’s e-mail address
               Subject                 Subject line
               Body                    Contents of the e-mail
               AttachFileLocation      Files that you would attach to the e-mail


6.5.2 Acct
               The acct process derives account code information based on an account code
               lookup file (Accttbl.txt). This program is provided as a backward compatibility
               option to existing jobs. The newer recommended method is to use the integrator
               step’s CreateIdentifierFromTable stage to derive a new identifier for the account
               code field.

               Before the acct program is run, a temporary step XML file is created. The file is
               created in the ProcessFolder with the step’s ID as a name. This program can be




128   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
invoked directly using the Java class com.ibm.tuam.acct.AcctMain and supplying
                <processFolder> and step.xml as arguments.

                The applicable parameters are:
                inputFile              Input file name (The default is CurrentCSR.txt.).
                outputFile             Output file name (The default is AcctCSR.txt.).
                inputFileEncoding      Encoding of input file.
                outputFileEncoding Encoding of output file.
                controlFile            Control parameters (The default is AcctCntl.txt.).
                exceptionFile          Exception file name (records that cannot be matched).
                ControlCard            Content of control file in line.
                ProcessFolder          Processing folder name.
                Trace                  Set tracing to true or false.
                accCodeConvTable Account code conversion table text file (The default is
                                 Accttbl.txt.).
                accCodeConvTableEncoding
                                 Encoding of the conversion table file

                The account processing is illustrated in Figure 6-7.


              CurrentCSR.txt                                                     AcctCSR.txt
                                              AcctTabl.txt

                                         A,      E,     acct1
                                         F,      N,     acct2
                                         O,      Z,     acct3




                                                                 Exception.txt




Figure 6-7 Accounting process




                                                                          Chapter 6. Job creation   129
6.5.3 Bill
               The bill process processes the usage data that already has an account code to
               generate billing information. As discussed in 4.2, “Account code hierarchy” on
               page 82, an account code is used to get the rate table and find the rate for each
               resource in the CSR file. The result of this process is three files:
               BillSummary.txt         Billing summary in which each account and resource has
                                       the usage and money value shown.
               BillDetail.txt          Billing detail in which a record is provided that contains
                                       account code and usage entries referring to the identifier.
               Ident.txt               Identifiers that are referred to by the billing files.

               Before the bill program is run, a temporary step XML file is created. The file is
               created in the ProcessFolder with the step’s ID as its name. This program can be
               invoked directly using the Java class com.ibm.tuam.bill.BillMain and supplying
               <processFolder> and step.xml as arguments.

               The applicable parameters are:
               inputFile               Input file name (the default is AcctCSR.txt). CSR+ files
                                       are recommended, as they can be sorted by the billing
                                       program for optimization.

               Figure 6-8 on page 131 shows an overview of the bill process.




130   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
AcctCSR.txt

                                          identifiers1              resources1

                                          identifiers2              resources2




                                                                                    ITUAM Database
                                 Bill process         select
                                                    Rate Table
                                                                                        CIMSClient Table


                      controlCard
                                                   Normalization                         Rate Table
                    NORMALIZE CPU
                                                                                          including
                                                                                       CPU check mark .


                                                          Billing                             CPU
                                                                                       Normalization Table




                          Ident.txt                      BillDetail.txt          BillSummary.txt

                          identifiers1                    resources1
                                                                                    resources
                          identifiers2                    resources2




          Figure 6-8 The bill process overview



           Note: We recommend using a CSR file sorted by the account code as the
           input file or use a CSR+ file, which is sorted by the billing automatically.


6.5.4 Cleanup
          The cleanup step defines the option to clean up the processing directory for older
          files. It can either remove the files by date or by age. The applicable parameters
          are:
          DaysToRetainFiles           The age of the files to retain. DaysToRetainFiles and
                                      DateToRetainFiles are mutually exclusive. If both are
                                      specified, DaysToRetainFiles will be used.
          DateToRetainFiles           The date that denotes the oldest file to retain.
          Folder                      Folder name to clean up. The default is
                                      ProcessFolder/jobid.



                                                                                 Chapter 6. Job creation     131
Clean Sub Folders       Whether or not to clean all sub folders.


6.5.5 Sort
               The sort step provides a mechanism for sorting a CSR file line by line. This sort
               program does not allow you to select the identifiers to sort on. The applicable
               parameters are:
               Input File Name         Input file. The default is AcctCSR.txt.
               Output File Name        Output file name. The default is AcctCSR.txt.

                Tip: For a more specific sort, based on identifiers, we use the Integrator sort,
                which is described in 6.3, “Integrator program” on page 119.


6.5.6 DBLoad
               The load step provides the capability to load data into the database. Data is
               typically loaded from billing output files.

               Before the database load program is run, a temporary step XML file is created.
               The file is created in the processFolder with the step’s ID as its name. This
               program can be invoked directly using the Java class
               com.ibm.tuam.load.DBLoadMain and supplying <processFolder> and step.xml
               as arguments.

               The applicable parameters are:
               resourceFile            File name for the resource data.
               processFolder           Folder to get the files.
               Trace                   Whether or not to perform tracing.
               detailFile              File name for the detail data.
               allow Detail Duplicates
                                     Whether or not to allow duplicate loads on the detail file.
               summaryFile             File name for the summary data.
               allow Summary Duplicates
                                  Whether or not to allow duplicate loads on the summary
                                  file.
               onEmptyFile             Status that indicates if an empty file is found. Possible
                                       values are Success, Warning, or Fail.
               identFile               File name for the identifier.
               encoding                File encoding.


132   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
loadType               Detail, Summary, Ident, All, or Resource.
             bulkLoad               Whether to invoke the load as a bulk process.


6.5.7 DBPurge
             The purge step provides the method to purge data in the IBM Tivoli Usage and
             Accounting Manager database.

             Before the purge program is run, a temporary step XML file is created. The file is
             created in the processFolder with the step’s ID as its name. This program can be
             invoked directly using the Java class com.ibm.tuam.purge.DBPurgeMain and
             supplying <processFolder> and step.xml as arguments.

             The applicable parameters are:
             Months To Keep         Number of months to retain data, if specified. The start
                                    and end date are ignored.
             StartDate              Optional start date for purging.
             EndDate                Optional end date for purging.
             Purge Summary          Whether or not to purge the summary table.
             Purge Bill Detail      Whether or not to purge the billing detail table.
             PurgeIdent             Whether or not to purge the identifier table.
             Purge Acct Detail      Whether or not to purge the account detail table.
             PurgeClient            Whether or not to purge the client table.
             PurgeRate              Whether or not to purge the rate table.
             DataSourceID           ID of the data source to be accessed.


6.5.8 Scan
             The scan step provides the facility of merging multiple CSR files in the
             processing folder into a single CSR file. The applicable parameters are:
             Use LogDate Range Log date range to be merged.
             LogDate                A single log date to merge.
             Retain File Date       Determine the output file name. If Retain File Date is true,
                                    the file name is set to the end date of the log date. If false,
                                    the output file name is CurrentCSR.txt.
             Retain Date Flag       Whether or not to retain the file date (same as Retain File
                                    Date).



                                                                    Chapter 6. Job creation    133
ExcludeFile             Exclude merging specified files.
               Exclude Folder          Exclude merging specified folders.
               IncludeFile             Include specific files.
               Use Step Files          Use files generated from previous steps.
               Allow Missing Files Allow any files that are not found.
               Allow Empty Files       Allow files to be empty.


6.5.9 File transfer
               The file transfer program provides a facility to perform file transfer between
               systems. It provides several different methods for performing file transfer, such as
               ftp, scp, sftp, or smb.

               The applicable parameters are:
               continue On Error       Whether to stop or continue when an error occurs.
               type                    Transfer type. The keywords are ftp, file, win, windows,
                                       ssh, rsh, and rexec.
               overwrite               Whether to overwrite the file if it is already there.
               ServerName              The target server name.
               UserId                  The user ID to be used.
               UserPassword            The password to be used.
               from*                   Source directories.
               to*                     Target directories.

               Some additional parameters for ftp:
               OpenType®               FTP site type
               TransferType            Ascii or binary transfer

               Additional parameter for secure transfer:
               Key Store File Name File to store SSL certificates




134   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
6.5.10 Wait file
            This waitfile step waits until a file becomes available. The applicable parameters
            are:
            FileName               File name to wait for arrival.
            Polling Interval       The duration between checks for the file.
            TimeOut                The total time to wait for the file. This is the value that is
                                   used if both TimeOut and TimeOut Date Time exists.
            TimeOut Date Time The time stamp when the program should stop waiting.


6.5.11 Remote product deployment
            The remote product deployment (rpd) provides a mechanism to perform file
            transfer and product installation. This program is mainly used for deployment of
            collector and AIX advanced accounting collection. This uses the same
            mechanism as the file transfer process discussed in 6.5.9, “File transfer” on
            page 134.

            The applicable arguments are:
            Host                   Target host.
            UserId                 User ID to use.
            Password               Password to use.
            Manifest               The XML file name that describe the action sequences to
                                   do.
            RPD Parameters         Various parameters for RPD program as requested by the
                                   Manifest. This is in the form of keyword value pairs.
            SourcePath             The path where the files to be transferred reside.


6.5.12 Job conversion
            This job conversion step is a stand-alone Job runner step for converting IBM
            Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V6.x job files into a V7.1 job format. The
            applicable parameters are:
            input Folder         Input conversion folder
            output Folder        Output conversion folder
            over Write Output Folder
                                 Whether or not to overwrite any files that already exist




                                                                    Chapter 6. Job creation    135
Note: There is another conversion for old Conversion Builder files into an
                Integrator stage, which will be not discussed in this book.


6.5.13 Windows script file
               The Windows script file (WSF) step is a special step that runs Windows Script
               File. It typically contains a Microsoft Visual Basic® program. The execution uses
               the csript.exe command. The Visual Basic program is embedded in the
               programName argument of the step. The parameters for this step are passed to
               the script directly.


6.5.14 Java
               The Java step allows you to run arbitrary Java programs. This is typically to
               invoke your own Java function or conversion step. You must supply the
               appropriate library and command-line options for the Java program. The
               applicable parameters are:
               Use Command Processor
                                Whether to invoke the command processor or invoke the
                                Java class directly
               Use Standard Parameters
                                  Whether or not to use standard JVM™ parameters
               Java Command Line Command-line argument for the Java Virtual Machine
               JavaHome                Home directory of the Java executable


6.5.15 Console
               The console step allows you to invoke a program on the operating system level.
               The applicable parameter is:
               Use Command Processor
                                Whether or not to invoke the command processor




136   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
7


    Chapter 7.   Problem determination
                 This chapter discusses troubleshooting procedures for IBM Tivoli Usage and
                 Accounting Manager V7.1. The discussion is covered in the following sections:
                     7.1, “Job failures” on page 138
                     7.2, “Database connection” on page 140
                     7.3, “Web reporting problems” on page 141
                     7.4, “Trace level” on page 141




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved.                                            137
7.1 Job failures
               One of the most important aspects of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
               are the jobs used to collect usage information from the system log. There are
               several steps that can be performed whenever you run into problems with jobs.

               When performing problem determination for jobs, there are several problem
               determination sources:
                  Job logs output from the running jobs
                  Job logs can be in plain text format or XML format. The XML job log is for
                  display in the Integrated Solutions Console, while the plain text job log is
                  easier for us to read. For job log analysis details, refer to 7.1.1, “Job logs” on
                  page 138.
                  Output files from the processing stages
                  Analyzing the output of the processing stages allows for deeper problem
                  determination about logic problems of the job. You must identify the default file
                  names for some stages, as some of the files are produced by default. Refer to
                  7.1.2, “Output files” on page 139 for more information.


7.1.1 Job logs
               Job logs can be read from the Integrated Solutions Console menu by selecting
               Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance → Job
               Runner → Log Files. The log files are organized based on the date the job was
               executed. You can then open the job log by expanding the job.

               Job log messages are arranged in a job - processes - step - stage hierarchy. You
               can quickly identify problems in a specific step or stage by looking at items
               identified by a red X for error or a yellow triangle for warning. A sample log file is
               shown in Figure 7-1 on page 139.




138   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Figure 7-1 The Job Runner log viewer GUI for analyzing the detailed job output

           Finding the error message and correcting it is the objective of the problem
           determination process. You can look this message up in IBM Tivoli Usage and
           Accounting Manager Reference manual, found at the following address:
           http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/tivihelp/v3r1/topic/com.ibm.it
           uam.doc/ref/tuam_pdf_reference.pdf

           A common example is AUCPE02000W – The rate id xxxxxx is not defined. For
           this message, you must decide whether this resource (rate ID) is needed or not
           for recording. Define the unidentified rate in the database, as discussed in 4.5,
           “Working with rates” on page 92.


7.1.2 Output files
           Some of the programs have a default output file name. The output files are stored
           under the processing directory path defined by the IBM Tivoli Usage and
           Accounting Manager configuration. The sub-path for the output file is the process
           name.
              The scan program is used to consolidate data from feed subdirectories into
              one processing file. The default output file is CurrentCSR.txt.


                                                         Chapter 7. Problem determination   139
The acct program is used to perform account code conversion on data. It
                  generates the file AcctCSR.txt that contains the records with the
                  account_code string. If the record cannot be matched from the lookup table,
                  the record is written to the exception file in Exception.txt file.
                  The bill program is used to collect resource usage information and applies
                  rate information. The bill program generates billing information in
                  BillDetail.txt, which consists of detailed usage for each identifiers
                  combination, and BillSummary.txt, which contains summary billing
                  information for a specific account_code. It also generates identifier lists, which
                  qualifies each usage detail with a identifier mix in the file Ident.txt.



7.2 Database connection
               The Integrated Solution Console is heavily dependent on the database. Any
               problem with the database reduced the console’s functionality. Some of the IBM
               Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager configuration information, such as path
               information, is stored in the database.

               While the jobs only access the database during the DBload and DBpurge stages,
               the ISC requires a database connection. When the ISC database connection
               fails, you must diagnose and correct the issue so that the database connection
               can be reestablished.

               You can discover the cause of the problem by reading the current Trace and
               Message log records:
                  If the database is inaccessible, log into the Database Management interface
                  and check the status of the database server. If the database server is
                  stopped, restart it.
                  When the problem is an authorization one, ensure that the user ID and
                  password used by IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager to connect to
                  the database is correct. You can check the data source connection by
                  selecting Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance →
                  Data Source, and then modify the user ID or password and test the
                  connection.




140   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
7.3 Web reporting problems
         One of the most common problems of the Web Reporting interface is report
         generation timing out. Some of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
         tables can be quite large, so the processing to generate a report can sometimes
         exceed the established timeout. the timeout can be caused by several things:
            A network issue, such as a slow connection for report data transfer.
            A data volume issue. You can correct this issues by limiting the time range of
            the selection.

         To change this timeout value, start the Integrated Solutions Console, select
         Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Configuration,
         and select the Reporting tab. Verify the Report Script Timeout value, which can
         be 600 – 2700 seconds. Then you can reverify the running of the report.



7.4 Trace level
         Logging and tracing for general processing of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
         Manager can be managed as follows:
            Start the Integrated Solutions Console, select Usage and Accounting
            Manager → System Maintenance → Configuration, and click the Logging
            tab.
            Set Trace file setting. The trace message level can be set to FINE, FINER, or
            FINEST. We recommend starting with FINEST, which will output all
            messages, and then adjust the setting later as necessary. Look in the trace
            file and see which messages are controlled by this setting. The messages
            controlled by this setting will start with FINE, FINER, or FINEST.
            Set Log file setting. The log message level can be set to SEVERE,
            WARNING, or INFORMATION. We recommend starting with INFORMATION,
            which will output all messages, and then adjust the setting later as necessary.
            Look in the log file and see which messages are controlled by this setting.
            The messages controlled by this setting will start with SERVER, WARNING,
            or INFORMATION.




                                                    Chapter 7. Problem determination   141
142   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
8


    Chapter 8.   Web reporting
                 This chapter discusses about reporting in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting
                 Manager V7.1. The discussion is covered in the following sections:
                     8.1, “Web reporting interface and user authority” on page 144
                     8.3, “Producing reports” on page 153
                     8.4, “Defining a new report” on page 155




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved.                                             143
8.1 Web reporting interface and user authority
               To access the Web reporting interface, do the following steps:
               1. Log in to the reporting Web application by going to the address
                  http://localhost/login.aspx. Alternatively, on the Windows platform where
                  IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager is installed, select Start → All
                  Programs → IBM Usage and Accounting Manager → Windows Web
                  Reporting.
               2. When the reporting login page appears with the manual logon option, enter
                  admin in the User ID field and password in the Password field. If you have
                  auto logon configured for Web reporting, you would be automatically signed
                  on with the message:
                  Welcome username, you are currently signed on as user ID.
                  The user ID for the reporting system is stored in the IBM Tivoli Usage and
                  Accounting Manager database. During database initialization, IBM Tivoli
                  Usage and Accounting Manager adds a default user and user group that has
                  administrative privileges in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Web
                  Reporting and can view all reports and clients. The ID for the default user is
                  admin and the password is password. The user admin belongs to the default
                  user group named Admin.
               3. To change the password for the user, select the Change Password check
                  box and then click OK. On the Change User Password page, type the current
                  password and the new password as directed. The password is alphanumeric
                  and case-sensitive and can be a maximum of 16 characters. Click OK to
                  change the password and return to the home page.
               4. User access to the reporting interface is administered from the Integrated
                  Solution Console. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → System
                  Maintenance → Users to manage and add users, and select Usage and
                  Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → User Groups to manage
                  user groups and to associate a user to a user group.
               5. By default, new users are added to the Admin group, which has administrative
                  access enabled and full access to all reports (that is, members of the group
                  have access to all reports). You can restrict user access to reports by:
                  a. Creating a group or groups that do not have administrative access enabled
                     (the Allow Administrative Access check box is not selected).
                  b. Clicking the View pop-up menu icon for Reports Allowed and either add
                     the Report Opens the Available Reports page, where individual reports
                     can be added to the user group, or select Allow All Reports to add all
                     reports to the user group. In this window, you can also remove an
                     assigned report by clicking Remove.



144   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
c. Adding the appropriate users (users that belong to a group that have
              administrative access enabled have access to all reports).
           d. Ensuring that the Use Report Access Security check box on the
              Configuration—Reporting page is selected (this check box is selected by
              default). If this check box is not selected, all users can access all reports
              regardless of whether administrative access is enabled for their group.



8.2 Web reports
        The following are the available Web reporting reports that are provided by IBM
        Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager.
        Account Budget for Period and YTD report
                            The Account Budget for Period and YTD report provides
                            actual, budget, and difference charges by account code
                            for the parameters selected. This report includes totals for
                            the calendar period selected and year to date (YTD).
        Account Summary by Week report
                          The Account Summary by Week report provides the total
                          weekly and monthly charges by account code and rate
                          code description for the parameters selected.
        Account Summary by Week-Wide report
                          The Account Summary by Week-Wide report is similar to
                          the Account Summary by Week report, except that the
                          weeks are displayed across the top of the page.
        Account Summary Daily 2 report
                         The Account Summary Daily 2 report is similar to the
                         Account Summary Daily report, except that the month
                         (rather than the account code) appears at the top level of
                         the report.
        Account Summary Daily report
                         The Account Summary Daily report provides total daily
                         and monthly charges by account code and rate code
                         description for the parameters selected.
        Account Summary Week spreadsheet
                         The Account Summary Week spreadsheet provides
                         account summary weekly information by account code for
                         the parameters selected.




                                                            Chapter 8. Web reporting    145
Account Summary YTD Cost by Rate Group spreadsheet
                                The Account Summary YTD Cost by Rate Group
                                spreadsheet provides account summary YTD information
                                by rate code description for the rate group selected for the
                                parameters selected.
               Account Summary YTD by Rate spreadsheet
                                The Account Summary YTD by Rate spreadsheet
                                provides account summary YTD information by rate code
                                description for the parameters selected.
               Account Summary YTD report
                                The Account Summary YTD report provides the total
                                monthly and YTD charges by account code, rate group,
                                and rate code description for the parameters selected.
               Account Summary YTD spreadsheet
                                The Account Summary YTD spreadsheet provides
                                year-to-date account summary information, by account
                                code, for the parameters selected.
               Account Summary YTD-Wide report
                                The Account Summary YTD-Wide report is similar to the
                                Account Summary YTD report; however, the months are
                                displayed across the top of the page.
               Account Total Invoice report
                                    The Account Total Invoice report provides the total
                                    charges by each level of the account code structure for
                                    the parameters selected.
               Alternate Invoice report
                                    The Alternate Invoice report provides charges by account
                                    code and rate code description for the parameters
                                    selected. An optional graph showing total expenses by
                                    account code is also included.
               Batch report            The Batch report provides z/OS batch job data for the
                                       parameters selected. This data is taken from the
                                       CIMSDetail table.
               CICS Transaction report
                                   The CICS Transaction report provides data for CICS
                                   transactions by transaction ID for the parameters
                                   selected. This data is taken from the CIMSDetail table.
               Client report           The Client report provides the information contained in
                                       the CIMSClient table for the parameters selected.
               Configuration report The Configuration report provides information contained
                                    in the CIMSConfig table.


146   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Cost Trend report     The Cost Trend report provides total charges by account
                      code for each month of the year for the parameters
                      selected. Monthly charges for each account code are
                      presented on a single line. To print this report, use
                      landscape mode on legal paper.
Cost Trend-Accounts Graph report
                   The Cost Trend Accounts Graph report provides the total
                   charges for all account codes for each month for the
                   parameters selected followed by charges for individual
                   account codes for each month.
Cost Trend by Rate report
                     The Cost Trend by Rate report provides total charges by
                     rate code description and rate group for each month of the
                     year for the parameters selected. To print this report, use
                     landscape mode on legal paper.
Cost Trend-Rates Graph report
                    The Cost Trend Rates Graph report provides the total
                    charges for all rate codes for each month for the
                    parameters selected followed by charges for individual
                    rate codes for each month.
Cost Variance Drill Down report
                     The Cost Variance Drill Down report provides a
                     comparison of charges by rate code description and rate
                     group for a specified month and the month prior for the
                     parameters selected.
Cost Variance report The Cost Variance report provides a comparison of
                     charges by account code, rate code description, and rate
                     group for a specified month and the month prior for the
                     parameters selected.
Daily Crosstab Charges report
                    The Daily Crosstab Charges report provides total daily
                    charges by account code and rate code description for the
                    parameters selected.
Daily Crosstab Usage report
                    The Daily Crosstab Usage report provides total daily
                    resource usage by account code and rate code
                    description for the parameters selected.
DB2 Summary report
                      The DB2 Summary report provides DB2 data for the
                      parameters selected. This data is taken from the
                      CIMSDetail table.



                                                  Chapter 8. Web reporting   147
Detail by Identifier Crosstab report
                                      The Detail by Identifier Crosstab report provides total
                                      charges by rate code for a selected identifier value or
                                      values for the date range selected.
               Detail by Identifier by Date Crosstab report
                                      The Detail by Identifier by Date Crosstab report provides
                                      total and total daily charges by rate code for a selected
                                      identifier value or values for the date range selected.
               Detail by Rate Group/Identifier report
                                    The Detail by Rate Group/Identifier report is similar to the
                                    Detail by Rate Group report. However, in the Rate
                                    Group/Identifier report, the resource units are broken
                                    down by identifier value for the identifier name selected.
               Detail by Rate Group report
                                    The Detail by Rate Group report provides total resource
                                    units used for the first eight rate code descriptions in a
                                    rate group for the parameters selected. If applicable, a
                                    total for the next highest level of the account code
                                    appears.
               Detail Rate Codes by Identifiers report
                                    The Detail Rate Codes by Identifiers report shows
                                    resource units consumed for a maximum of five rate
                                    codes and five identifiers.
               Detail Rate Codes by Identifiers/Account report
                                    The Detail Rate Codes by Identifiers/Account report
                                    shows resource units consumed by account code for a
                                    maximum of five rate codes and five identifiers.
               Disk Directory Resource report
                                   The Disk Directory Resource report provides Windows
                                   disk storage data for the parameters selected. This data is
                                   taken from the CIMSDetail table.
               Invoice by Account Code spreadsheet
                                   The Invoice by Account Code spreadsheet provides
                                   invoice information by account code for the parameters
                                   selected.
               Invoice by Account Level report
                                   The Invoice by Account Level report provides charges by
                                   account code, rate group, and rate code description for
                                   the parameters selected. An optional graph showing total
                                   expenses by account code is also included.




148   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Invoice by Rate Group spreadsheet
                    The Invoice by Rate Group spreadsheet provides invoice
                    information for the rate codes within a selected rate group
                    for the parameters selected.
Invoice Drill Down for Rate Group report
                      The Invoice Drill Down for Rate Group report enables drill
                      down of the charges for a rate group by identifier name.
Invoice Drill Down for Rate Group by Date report
                      The Invoice Drill Down for Rate Group by Date report is
                      similar to the Invoice Drill Down for Rate Group report.
                      However, it also provides a breakdown of the data by
                      date.
Invoice Drill Down for Units report
                      The Invoice Drill Down for Units report enables drill down
                      of resource units by up to five identifier names.
Invoice report        The Invoice report provides charges by account code,
                      rate code description, and rate group for the parameters
                      selected.
Invoice spreadsheet The Invoice spreadsheet provides invoice information for
                    the parameters selected.
Invoice with Shifts report
                      The Invoice with Shifts report provides charges by
                      account code, rate group, and rate code description
                      broken down by shift for the parameters selected, if the
                      CIMSSummary table contains multiple shift codes for a
                      rate code.
Line Item Budget for Period and YTD report
                     The Line Item Budget for Period and YTD report provides
                     actual, budget, and difference charges by account code,
                     rate group, and rate code description for the parameters
                     selected.
Monthly Crosstab Charges report
                   The Monthly Crosstab Charges report provides total
                   monthly charges by account code and rate code
                   description for the parameters selected.
Monthly Crosstab Usage report
                   The Monthly Crosstab Usage report provides total
                   monthly resource usage by account code and rate code
                   description for the parameters selected.




                                                  Chapter 8. Web reporting   149
MS Exchange 2000 Resource report
                                 The MS Exchange 2000 Resource report provides
                                 Exchange 2000 Server data for the parameters selected.
                                 This data is taken from the CIMSDetail table.
               MS SQL Server 2000 Resource report
                                  The MS SQL Server 2000 Resource report provides SQL
                                  Server 200 trace file data for the parameters selected.
                                  This data is taken from the CIMSDetail table.
               Percentage report       The Percentage report provides the total charge by
                                       account code for the parameters selected and specifies
                                       the percentage of that charge in relationship to the total
                                       charges for all account codes. This report also provides a
                                       breakdown of the percentage by rate group and rate code
                                       description for each account code.
               Rate report             The Rate report provides the information contained in the
                                       CIMSRate and CIMSRateGroup tables.
               Report Both template
                                   The Report Both template produces Both reports that
                                   show resource usage and charges by account codes and
                                   rate code description for the parameters selected.
               Report Cost template
                                   The Report Cost template produces Cost reports that
                                   show charges by account code and rate code description
                                   for the parameters selected.
               Report Resource template
                                  The Report Resource template produces resource
                                  reports that show resource usage by account code and
                                  rate code description for the parameters selected.
               Resource Trend Graph report
                                  The Resource Trend Graph report provides the total
                                  resource usage for all rate codes for each month for the
                                  parameters selected followed by resource usage for
                                  individual rate codes for each month.
               Resource Usage Trend report
                                  The Resource Usage Trend report provides total resource
                                  usage by rate code for each month of the year for the
                                  parameters selected. It is ordered by account code, rate
                                  group, and rate code. To print this report, use landscape
                                  mode on legal paper.




150   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Resource Variance report
                    The Resource Variance report provides a comparison of
                    resource usage by account code, rate group, and rate
                    code description for a specified month and the month
                    prior for the parameters selected.
Run Total Invoice report
                     The Run Total Invoice report provides total charges by
                     rate group and rate code description for the parameters
                     selected.
Run Total Invoice spreadsheet
                     The Run Total Invoice spreadsheet provides total invoice
                     information by rate code for the parameters selected.
Run Total Invoice with Shifts report
                     The Run Total Invoice with Shifts report shows the units,
                     rates, and charges for each rate code description, by shift.
                     The CIMSSummary must contain more than one shift
                     code for a rate code before that information can be broken
                     down by each shift.
Run Total Percent report
                     This report is the same as the Run Total Invoice report,
                     except that the drill down includes percent total by
                     account code in addition to units, rate, and charge.
Run Total Rate Group Percent report
                    This report provides charges and percentage by rate
                    groups for the parameters selected.
Spreadsheet Both template
                   The Spreadsheet Both template produces Both
                   spreadsheets that show resource usage and charges by
                   account code and rate code description for the
                   parameters selected.
Spreadsheet Cost template
                   The Spreadsheet Cost template produces Cost reports
                   that show charges by account and rate code description
                   for the parameters selected.
Spreadsheet Resource template
                   The Spreadsheet Resource template produces Resource
                   spreadsheets that show resource usage by account and
                   rate code description for the parameters selected.




                                                  Chapter 8. Web reporting   151
Summary Crosstab Charges report
                                 The Summary Crosstab Charges report provides total
                                 charges by account code and rate code description for the
                                 parameters selected.
               Summary Crosstab Usage report
                                 The Summary Crosstab Usage report provides total
                                 resource usage by account code and rate code
                                 description for the parameters selected.
               Summary by Rate Group Crosstab Charges report
                                 The Summary by Rate Group Crosstab Charges report
                                 provides total charges by account code and rate code
                                 description for the rate codes within a selected rate group
                                 for the parameters selected.
               Summary by Rate Group Crosstab Usage report
                                 The Summary by Rate Group Crosstab Usage report
                                 provides total resource usage by account code and rate
                                 code description for the rate codes within a selected rate
                                 group for the parameters selected.
               Top 10 Accounts for Rate spreadsheet
                                   The Top 10 Accounts for Rate spreadsheet provides the
                                   account codes with the highest usage of a specified rate
                                   code for the parameters selected. For example, if you type
                                   3 as the Top N parameter, the three account codes with
                                   the highest rate code usage appear. If you leave the Top
                                   N parameter blank, the account codes with the ten
                                   highest rate code usage appear.
               Top 10 Bar Graph report
                                   The Top 10 Bar Graph report is similar to the Top Cost
                                   report. However, it provides accounts codes with the 10
                                   highest charges for the parameters selected and it
                                   provides the data in bar graph as well as table format.
               Top 10 Pie Chart report
                                    This report is similar to the Top Cost Report. However, it
                                    provides accounts codes with the 10 highest charges for
                                    the parameters selected, and it provides the data in pie
                                    chart as well as table format.
               Top Accounts for Rate report
                                   The Top Accounts for Rate report provides the account
                                   codes with the highest usage of a specified rate code for
                                   the parameters selected. For example, if you type 3 as the
                                   Top N parameter, the three account codes with the
                                   highest rate code usage appear. If you leave the Top N


152   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
parameter blank, the account codes with the ten highest
                               rate code usage appear.
        Top Cost report        The Top Cost report provides the account codes with the
                               highest charges for the parameters selected. For
                               example, if you type 3 as the Top N parameter, the three
                               account codes with the highest charges appear. If you
                               leave the Top N parameter blank, the account codes with
                               the ten highest charges appear.
        Transaction report     The Transaction report provides the Miscellaneous,
                               Recurring, and Credit transactions for the parameters
                               selected.
        Weekly Crosstab Charges report
                           The Weekly Crosstab Charges report provides total
                           weekly charges by account code and rate code
                           description for the parameters selected.
        Weekly Crosstab Usage report
                           The Weekly Crosstab Usage report provides total weekly
                           resource usage by account code and rate code
                           description for the parameters selected.



8.3 Producing reports
        There are two types of reports in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager.
        Reports that can contain usage data for processing in a spreadsheet application
        or can contain invoices for billing to customers or departments. To produce the
        reports, do these steps:
        1. Log in to the reporting Web application. Go to the address
           http://localhost/login.aspx.
        2. When the reporting login page appears, enter admin in the User ID field and
           password in the Password field.
        3. From the reports tool bar, click Run Reports. This shows the list of available
           reports, which is shown as an expandable tree. The categories are:
           –   Invoices
           –   Account Reports
           –   Top Usage Reports
           –   Trend, Resource Detail
           –   Other
           –   Custom




                                                           Chapter 8. Web reporting    153
4. You can also select Run Spreadsheets. There are two types of spreadsheet:
                  Standard and Crosstab.
               5. Select the desired report or spreadsheet. Clicking it will bring up the
                  Parameter page. Provide the appropriate report parameters. Some of the
                  typical parameters are:
                  Account Code Structure name
                                     This can be the standard structure or any other
                                     alternative structure.
                  Account Code Level The account code level that is required to view the
                                     report. For example, the account code AABBBBCCC
                                     might contain three levels: the two-digit company code
                                     AA, the 6-digit division code AABBBB, and the 9-digit
                                     department code AABBBBCCC. The resource use
                                     and charge data in the generated report reflects the
                                     level that has been select.
                  Starting and Ending Account Code
                                      This parameter works in conjunction with the Account
                                      Code Level parameter and specifies the range of
                                      account codes for that level that appear in the report. If
                                      all account codes for that level are to appear in the
                                      report, click Lowest Possible Account for the starting
                                      account code and Highest Possible Account for the
                                      ending account code. If specific account codes are
                                      required, click the appropriate start and end codes, or
                                      click Custom and input the start and end codes.
                  Invoice Number          Some invoice reports contain separate invoices for the
                                          selected account codes. If this parameter is blank (the
                                          default), invoice numbering begins with 1. Use this
                                          parameter to begin invoice numbering from another
                                          number, if necessary. The administrator determines
                                          whether this parameter is displayed for invoices. If this
                                          parameter is not available, the invoice number set in
                                          the CIMSConfigOptions table in the database is used,
                                          and invoice numbers continue to increase sequentially
                                          each time an invoice is run. For example, if the last
                                          invoice in a report was 99, the next invoice that is run
                                          will begin with invoice number 100.
                  Date Range              The date range filters the view of the report. Dates for
                                          a report refer to the reporting period that was assigned
                                          when the report was created.
               6. Click OK. The report runs and appears.



154   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
8.4 Defining a new report
         Although IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager provides plenty of
         predefined reports, eventually you may need to define additional reports that only
         select a subset or a super-set of data that is not available in the standard reports.
         Thus, you must define a new report or a new spreadsheet. To define a new
         report, do these steps:
         1. Log in to the reporting Web application at the address
            http://localhost/login.aspx. Select the report that most closely matches
            the one you need.
         2. Select Reports → Create a Report. The Create a Report page opens.
            Specify or update the following parameters for the report:
            Report                  Select New to create a new report or spreadsheet or
                                    select an existing report or spreadsheet to update the
                                    report or spreadsheet.
            Type                    Select the report or spreadsheet type that you want to
                                    create. You can select one of the following types:
                                    • Resource (resource usage by account and rate code
                                      description)
                                    • Cost (charges by account and rate code description)
                                    • Both (resource and cost information)
            Name                    Specify a name that you want to assign to the report or
                                    spreadsheet. The name is used to identify the report
                                    or spreadsheet in the list of published reports or
                                    spreadsheets, search queries, or designated as a
                                    favorite report or spreadsheet on the Home page.
            Description             Enter a descriptive summary of the report or
                                    spreadsheet.
            Visible to all users    Check to make the report or spreadsheet available to
                                    all Web users. Deselect to make the report or
                                    spreadsheet available only to you. This check box is
                                    unchecked by default.
            Resource                For each column box, select the rate code that you
                                    want to appear in that column. You can select up to
                                    four columns for Resource reports and eight columns
                                    for Cost or Resource reports.




                                                              Chapter 8. Web reporting    155
Decimal Places          Specify the number of decimal digits that you want to
                                          appear in the resource units. For example, if you
                                          specify two decimal digits, the resource usage amount
                                          is displayed as follows: 65.03.
               3. If you are creating a new report, click New or click Update if you are updating
                  a report or spreadsheet. The name and at least one rate code for an existing
                  report or spreadsheet must be shown before you click Update.
               4. After you create a report or spreadsheet, the report or spreadsheet is shown
                  on the Reports or Spreadsheets page under a report group determined by the
                  administrator.



8.5 Batch reporting
               IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager provides an alternative way to
               produce reports. You do not need to log in and go through the Web reporting
               pages to create the report if you want to have the report run regularly. This
               capability is provided with batch reporting.

               Batch reporting enables you to automate the generation of published reports. A
               published report is a report that has been saved with the data that was generated
               at the time the report was run. Publishing a report enables users to view a report
               without having to regenerate it. The report displays quickly because the data has
               already been read from the database and formatted.

               Batch reporting also enables you to provide published reports to users in a way
               that best meets the needs of users, including attaching the report to an e-mail or
               including a link to the report in an e-mail.

               The batch reporting is provided as an executable BatchReporting program under
               the lib subdirectory. To invoke batch reporting, you must publish the report you
               run and define its distribution list and distribution cycle from the Integrated
               Solution Console.




156   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
A


  Appendix A.    Sample test
                 This appendix provides a sample test and an answer key for the IBM Tivoli Usage
                 and Accounting Manager implementation certification.




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved.                                            157
Sample test
               Answer the following questions:
               1. When creating and editing IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1
                  job files, which skill set is needed?
                  a. Working knowledge of XML
                  b. Working knowledge of Shell and .BAT scripting
                  c. Basic knowledge of database-stored procedures
                  d. Basic knowledge of Business Intelligence and Reporting Tools (BIRT)
                     Report Designer
               2. Consider the following 36-byte account code:
                  AAAABBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
                  How can this be broken in to three account code levels?
                  a. Level 1, AA
                     Full Length = 2 bytes
                     Description = Application
                      Level 2, AAAABBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
                      Full Length = 20 bytes
                      Description = Resource group
                      Level 3, AAAABBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
                      Full Length = 36 bytes
                      Description = Platform
                  b. Level 1, AAAA
                     Full Length = 4 bytes
                     Description = Application
                      Level 2, AAAABBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
                      Full Length = 20 bytes
                      Description = Resource group
                      Level 3, AAAABBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
                      Full Length = 36 bytes
                      Description = Platform
                  c. Level 1, AAAA
                     Full Length = 4 bytes
                     Description = Application
                      Level 2, AAAACCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
                      Full Length = 20 bytes
                      Description = Resource group



158   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Level 3, AAAACCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
      Full Length = 36 bytes
      Description = Platform
   d. Level 1, CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
      Full Length = 16 bytes
      Description = Application
      Level 2, CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
      Full Length = 32 bytes
      Description = Resource group
      Level 3, CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBAAAA
      Full Length = 36 bytes
      Description = Platform
3. Which report provides the Miscellaneous, Recurring, and Credit transactions
   for the parameters selected?
   a. Cost Trend report
   b. Transaction report
   c. Percentage report
   d. Run Total Percent report
4. To verify installation, after running sample collector data, where can database
   loads be tracked in Load Tracking?
   a. Database
   a. Job Runner
   a. System Maintenance
   a. Chargeback Maintenance
5. There is an application that controls print in a centralized environment, and
   there is a need to split all resources used by overhead account code AAABB
   among three different accounts: A1, A2, and AA1. On average, A1uses about
   50 percent of the resources assigned to the AAABB account, A2 uses about
   30 percent, and A3 uses about 20 percent. To prorate the costs associated
   with this application among the three accounts, which comma-delimited table
   would need to be created?
   a. AAABB,A1,50,All
      AAABB,A2,30,All
      AAABB,A3,20,All
   b. AAABB,A1,50,Z001
      AAABB,A2,30,Z002
      AAABB,A3,20,Z003




                                                    Appendix A. Sample test   159
c. AAABB,AAABB,50,All
                     AAABB,AAACC,30,All
                     AAABB,AAADD,20,All
                  d. AAABB,A1,50,Z001
                     AAABB,A2,30,Z001
                     AAABB,A3,20,Z001
                     AAABB,A1,50,Z002
                     AAABB,A2,30,Z002
                     AAABB,A3,20,Z002
                     AAABB,A1,50,Z003
                     AAABB,A2,30,Z003
                     AAABB,A3,20,Z003
               6. What is the purpose of running the UNIX command
                  ${TUAM_HOME}/bin/startServer.bin?
                  e. Starts Embedded WebSphere Application Server.
                  f. Starts database and starts Embedded WebSphere Application Server.
                  g. Starts Embedded WebSphere Application Server and verifies it is running.
                  h. Checks that the database is running and starts Embedded WebSphere
                     Application Server.
               7. What is the purpose of transaction collectors?
                  i. To convert data for TDS for z/OS
                  j. To add manual or regularly applied usages
                  k. To get usage data from application systems
                  l. To generate statistics on the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
                     V7.1 usage
               8. Which Integrator stage is always required?
                  a. Sort
                  b. Input
                  c. Aggregator
                  d. CSROutput




160   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
9. If the value for the Report Timeout Script is set to a high value in the
   Integrated Solutions Console and reports continue to time out, what is the
   next step to take?
   a. Delete and recreate the report.
   b. Have users run the report at a less busy time.
   c. Create two reports from the one report that is timing out.
   d. Log in directly to the Web Reporting Server and execute the report that is
      timing out.
10.What is the minimum requirement before creating or updating a report or
   spreadsheet?
   a. The name and at least one rate code
   b. Only the name of the new report or spreadsheet
   c. The name, and ensure Visible to All Users is checked
   d. The name and description of the new report or spreadsheet
11.During database initialization, IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
   V7.1 (TUAM) adds a default user and user group for Web Reporting. What is
   the name of the default user group?
   a. Admins
   b. TUAMUsers
   c. TUAMAdmins
   d. Administrators




                                                   Appendix A. Sample test   161
Answer key
               The following are the answers for the questions in “Sample test” on page 158.
               1. A
               2. B
               3. B
               4. D
               5. A
               6. C
               7. B
               8. D
               9. D
               10.A
               11.D




162   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Abbreviations and acronyms
AIX                  Advanced Interactive          LPAR   Logical Partition
                     eXecutive                     LU     Logical Unit
AIXAA                AIX Advanced Accounting       MB     Megabyte
ARM                  Application Response          MVS    Multiple Virtual Storage
                     Measurement
                                                   ODBC   Open Database Connectivity
BIRT                 Business Intelligence and
                     Reporting Tools               OGC    Office of Government
                                                          Commerce
CMDB                 Configuration Management
                     Database                      OS     Operating System
CPU                  Central Processing Unit       POC    Proof of Concept
CSR                  Common Source Format          RAF    Resource Accounting Facility
DB2                  Database 2                    ROI    Return on Investment
DDF                  Distributed Data Facility     RPD    Remote Product Deployment
FTP                  File Transfer Program         SDK    Software Development Kit
GB                   Gigabytes                     SFTP   Secure FTP
GUI                  Graphical User Interface      SMF    System Measurement Facility
HFS                  Hierarchical File System      SOA    Service-Oriented Architecture
HTML                 Hypertext Markup Language     SQL    Structured Query Language
HTTP                 Hypertext Transfer Protocol   SSH    Secure Shell
HTTPS                HTTP Secure                   SSL    Secure Socket Layer
I/O                  Input/Output                  TDS    Tivoli Decision Support
IBM                  International Business        TPC    TotalStorage Productivity
                     Machines Corp.                       Control
IIS                  Internet Information Server   TSO    Time Sharing Option
IP                   Internet Protocol             TUAM   Tivoli Usage and Accounting
                                                          Manager
ISC                  Integrated Solution Console
                                                   TWS    Tivoli Workload Scheduler
IT                   Information Technology
                                                   UDB    Universal Database
ITIL®                Information Technology
                     Infrastructure Library        URL    Universal Resource Locator
ITSO                 International Technical       VCDB   Virtual Center database
                     Support Organization          VIOS   Virtual I/O Server
JCL                  Job Control Language          XML    eXtensible Markup Language
JDBC                 Java Database Connectivity
JVM                  Java Virtual Machine



© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved.                                      163
164   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Related publications

                 The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a
                 more detailed discussion of the topics covered in this book.



IBM Redbooks
                 For information about ordering these publications, see “How to get Redbooks” on
                 page 166. Note that some of the documents referenced here may be available in
                 softcopy only.
                     Deployment Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1,
                     SG24-7569
                     IBM Tivoli Usage Accounting Manager V7.1 Handbook, SG24-7404



Other publications
                 These publications are also relevant as further information sources:
                     Handbuch zur Server-Konfiguration ESX Server 3.0.1 und VirtualCenter
                     2.0.1, Artikelnummer: VI-DEU-Q406-314
                     Installation and Upgrade Guide ESX 3.0.1 and VirtualCenter 2.0.1, VMware
                     Item: VI-ENG-Q306-292
                     Program Directory for Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS (English) V01.08.00,
                     GI11-4249
                     Server Configuration Guide ESX Server 3.0.1 and VirtualCenter 2.0.1,
                     VMware Item: VI-ENG-Q206-215
                     Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Data Collectors for Microsoft Windows
                     User’s Guide Version 6.1.1, SC32-1557
                     Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Data Collectors for UNIX and Linux
                     User’s Guide Version 6.1.1, SC32-1556
                     Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Quick Start Guide, GC23-6188
                     Virtual Infrastructure Web Access Administrator’s Guide ESX Server 3.0.1
                     and VirtualCenter Server 2.0.1, VMware Item: VI-ENG-Q306-294




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved.                                                  165
Online resources
              These Web sites are also relevant as further information sources:
                  IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager publication center
                  http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/tivihelp/v3r1/index.jsp?top
                  ic=/com.ibm.ituam.doc_7.1/welcome.htm
                  IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Web site
                  http://www-306.ibm.com/software/tivoli/products/usage-accounting/



How to get Redbooks
              You can search for, view, or download Redbooks, Redpapers, Technotes, draft
              publications and Additional materials, as well as order hardcopy Redbooks, at
              this Web site:
              ibm.com/redbooks



Help from IBM
              IBM Support and downloads
              ibm.com/support

              IBM Global Services
              ibm.com/services




166   Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Index
                                                   certification overview 1
Symbols                                            CIMSDETAIL 36
/opt/ibm/tuam/bin/RunSamples.sh command 75
                                                   CIMSDETAILIDENT 36
/opt/ibm/tuam/ewas/profiles/AppSrv01/bin 106
                                                   CIMSLOADTRACKING 34, 102
                                                   CIMSRATE 73
A                                                  CIMSRate 73
account code 82                                    CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION 37
account code hierarchy 82                          CIMSSUMMARY 35
account code mapping 123                           Cleanup 131
account code structure 27                          Client 83
account conversion 123                             client budget 90
Account_Code 82                                    client contact 91
Acct 128                                           clients 88–89
acct 119                                           collector selection 29
acct process 128                                   CollectorInput 121
AcctCntl.txt 129                                   commands
AcctCSR.txt 129                                        csript.exe 136
Aggregator 121                                         RunSamples.bat 13
AIXAAInput 121                                         RunSamples.sh 75
alternate rate 94                                      startServer.bat 63
ApacheCommonLogFormat 121                              stopServer.bat 63
auto logon 144                                     Common Source Resource, see CSR
                                                   Console 136
                                                   CPU normalization 96
B                                                  CreateIdentifierFromIdentifiers 121
Bill 130
                                                   CreateIdentifierFromRegEx 122
bill 119
                                                   CreateIdentifierFromTable 122
BillDetail.txt 130
                                                   CreateIdentifierFromValue 122
BillSummary.txt 130
                                                   CreateResourceFromConversion 122
BIRT 12, 31, 158
                                                   CreateResourceFromValue 122
Business Intelligence and Reporting Tools, see
                                                   CSR 113
BIRT
                                                   CSR Plus Header 80
                                                   CSRInput 121
C                                                  csript.exe command 136
calendar 88                                        CurrentCSR.txt 129
certification
    benefits 3
    checklist 5                                    D
                                                   data sources 63
    job role description 7
                                                   DATABASE 121
    key areas of competency 7
                                                   database 32
    objectives 8
                                                   database configuration 59
    prerequisite skills 7
                                                   database initialization 66
    recommended study resources 22
                                                   database sizing 32
    requirements 8



© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved.                                         167
DBLoad 132                                           Ident.txt 130
dbload 119                                           IdentifierConversionFromTable 122
DBPurge 133                                          Identifiers 80
dbpurge 119                                          IIS 30, 43, 74
defaults directive 117                               implementation platform 31
DELIMITED 121                                        IncludeRecsByDate 122
DropFields 122                                       IncludeRecsByPresence 122
DropIdentifiers 122                                  IncludeRecsByValue 122
DropResources 122                                    installation
                                                         application server 54
                                                         database configuration 59
E                                                        Enterprise Collector Pack 67
ECP 12, 67
                                                         overview 42
Enterprise Collector Pack, see ECP
                                                         platform 43
EXCHANGE2007 121
                                                         prerequisites 43
ExcludeRecsByDate 122
                                                         verification 71
ExcludeRecsByPresence 122
                                                     Integrated Solutions Console, see ISC
ExcludeRecsByValue 122
                                                     integrator 119
                                                     integrator program 119
F                                                    Internet Information Services, see IIS
Feed 82                                              ISC 13–14, 84
File transfer 134
files
     C:IBMtuamewasbinopServer.bat 63            J
                                                     Java
     C:IBMtuamewasbinstartServer.bat 63
                                                        job
     LoadVMware.xml 111
                                                             Java 136
     startJobRunner.sh 111
                                                     JDBC driver 60
FIXEDFIELD 121
                                                     job
                                                         Acct 128
G                                                        Bill 130
graphical user interface, see GUI                        Cleanup 131–132
GUI 111                                                  Console 136
                                                         conversion 135
                                                         DBLoad 132
H
headeraccountcode 80                                     DBPurge 133
headeraccountcodelength 80                               File transfer 134
headerenddate 80                                         Mail 128
headerendtime 80                                         rpd 135
headerrectype 80                                         Scan 133
headershiftcode 80                                       Wait file 135
headerstartdate 80                                       WSF 136
headerstarttime 80                                   Job conversion 135
heap size 104                                        job directive 115
HTML 110                                             job file 110
Hypertext Markup Language, see HTML                      structure 110
                                                     job logs 138
                                                     job processing 104
I                                                    job role description 7
IBM Professional Certification Program 2


168     Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
jobs directive 115                                 R
                                                   rate 92
                                                   rate codes 92
K
key areas of competency 7                          rate group 92
                                                   rate groups 83
                                                   rate shift 97
L                                                  Rate Table 83
load tracking 102                                  Redbooks Web site 166
LoadVMware.xml 111                                     Contact us x
logs 138                                           Remote product deployment 135
                                                   RenameFields 123
M                                                  REORG 103
Mail 128                                           report generation 105
mail step 128                                      report requirements 38
MaxRecords 123                                     Report Viewer 52
memory 104                                         reporting 74
Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 51                    ResourceConversion 123
Microsoft Installer 49                             Resources 81
Microsoft SQL Server Report Viewer 52              return on investment, see ROI
                                                   ROI 5
                                                   RunSamples.bat command 13
N                                                  RUNSTATS 103
NCSAInput 121
NotesDatabaseSizeInput 121
NotesEmailInput 121                                S
NotesUsageInput 121                                sample collection verification 75
                                                   Scan 133
                                                   schedule 88
O                                                  shift 97
objectives 8                                       shutdown 106
   administration 16                               Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, see SMTP
   configuration 13                                SMTP 75
   installation 11                                 Sort 123, 132
   job creation 17                                 startJobRunner.sh 111
   planning 8                                      startServer.bat 63
   problem determination 19                        startup 106
   reporting 21                                    step directive 118
output files 139                                   steps directive 118
overview 1                                         stopServer.bat 63
                                                   SYSTEM_ID 82
P
paths                                              T
    /opt/ibm/tuam/ewas/profiles/AppSrv01/bin 106   TDS 121
platform requirements 43                           Tivoli Software Professional Certification 4
prerequisite skills 7                              Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager 6
process directive 117                              TPC 121
processing overview 112                            TRANSACTION 121
Prorate 123                                        tuning 103
proration table 95



                                                                                         Index    169
U
user administration 84
user and group mapping 86
user creation 85
user role definition 86


V
VIO 29
Virtual I/O, see VIO
Virtual University Enterprises, see VUE
VMWARE 121
VMware ESX server 81
VUE 6


W
W3CWinLog 121
Wait file 135
Web application 74
Web reporting 74
WEBSPHEREXDFINEGRAIN 121
WEBSPHEREXDSERVER 121
Windows script file 136
WORK_ID 82


X
XML editor 111
XML job 110




170     Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
                                                                                             (0.2”spine)
                                                                                           0.17”<->0.473”
                                                                                          90<->249 pages
Certification guide series ibm tivoli usage and accounting manager v7.1 implementation sg247692
Certification guide series ibm tivoli usage and accounting manager v7.1 implementation sg247692
Back cover                                                     ®



Certification Guide Series:
IBM Tivoli Usage and
Accounting Manager V7.1                                                                                                        ®

Implementation
Detailed architecture   This IBM Redbooks publication is a study guide for the IBM Tivoli Usage
and components          and Accounting Manager V7.1 certification. It is aimed for IT               INTERNATIONAL
discussion              professional who want to be an IBM Certified Professional for this          TECHNICAL
                        product.                                                                    SUPPORT
Installation and        IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 certification is offered
                                                                                                    ORGANIZATION
configuration           through the IBM Professional Certification program. It is designed to
processing              validate the skills required of technical professionals who work in the
                        implementation and deployment of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting            BUILDING TECHNICAL
Monitoring IT usage     Manager V7.1.                                                               INFORMATION BASED ON
and chargebacks         This book provides the necessary information to understand this topic.      PRACTICAL EXPERIENCE
                        It includes sample questions that help evaluate personal progress. It
                        familiarizes the readers with the types of questions that may be            IBM Redbooks are developed by
                        encountered in the exam.                                                    the IBM International Technical
                                                                                                    Support Organization. Experts
                        This guide does not replace practical experience. This is not designed to   from IBM, Customers and
                        be a stand-alone guide for this topic. Instead, this guide should be        Partners from around the world
                        combined with educational activities and experiences and used as a          create timely technical
                        very useful preparation guide for exam.                                     information based on realistic
                                                                                                    scenarios. Specific
                        For your convenience, the chapters are based on the certification           recommendations are provided
                        objectives of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1              to help you implement IT
                        implementation certification test. Those requirements are planning,         solutions more effectively in
                        prerequisites, installation, configuration, administration, and problem     your environment.
                        determination. Studying each chapter helps you prepare for each
                        objective of the exam.
                                                                                                    For more information:
                                                                                                    ibm.com/redbooks

                          SG24-7692-00                    ISBN 0738432482
Ad

More Related Content

What's hot (17)

E views 9 command ref
E views 9 command refE views 9 command ref
E views 9 command ref
Ibrahima Bakhoum
 
SAP_HANA_Modeling_Guide_for_SAP_HANA_Studio_en
SAP_HANA_Modeling_Guide_for_SAP_HANA_Studio_enSAP_HANA_Modeling_Guide_for_SAP_HANA_Studio_en
SAP_HANA_Modeling_Guide_for_SAP_HANA_Studio_en
Jim Miller, MBA
 
Ibm tivoli intelligent think dynamic orchestrator pre proof of-concept cookbo...
Ibm tivoli intelligent think dynamic orchestrator pre proof of-concept cookbo...Ibm tivoli intelligent think dynamic orchestrator pre proof of-concept cookbo...
Ibm tivoli intelligent think dynamic orchestrator pre proof of-concept cookbo...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBMRedbook
IBMRedbookIBMRedbook
IBMRedbook
Neelamegan Minor
 
Tape automation with ibm e server xseries servers redp0415
Tape automation with ibm e server xseries servers redp0415Tape automation with ibm e server xseries servers redp0415
Tape automation with ibm e server xseries servers redp0415
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Xi3 ds administrators_guide_en
Xi3 ds administrators_guide_enXi3 ds administrators_guide_en
Xi3 ds administrators_guide_en
Sarat Reddy
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager express for softwa...
Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager express for softwa...Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager express for softwa...
Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager express for softwa...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
BOOK - IBM Implementing ibm system directory 6.1
BOOK - IBM Implementing ibm system directory 6.1BOOK - IBM Implementing ibm system directory 6.1
BOOK - IBM Implementing ibm system directory 6.1
Satya Harish
 
Performance tuning for content manager sg246949
Performance tuning for content manager sg246949Performance tuning for content manager sg246949
Performance tuning for content manager sg246949
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ibm virtual disk system quickstart guide sg247794
Ibm virtual disk system quickstart guide sg247794Ibm virtual disk system quickstart guide sg247794
Ibm virtual disk system quickstart guide sg247794
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
SchoolAdmin - School Fees Collection & Accounting Software
SchoolAdmin - School Fees Collection & Accounting SoftwareSchoolAdmin - School Fees Collection & Accounting Software
SchoolAdmin - School Fees Collection & Accounting Software
Ranganath Shivaram
 
Introducing ibm tivoli license manager sg246888
Introducing ibm tivoli license manager sg246888Introducing ibm tivoli license manager sg246888
Introducing ibm tivoli license manager sg246888
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ibm midrange system storage implementation and best practices guide sg246363
Ibm midrange system storage implementation and best practices guide sg246363Ibm midrange system storage implementation and best practices guide sg246363
Ibm midrange system storage implementation and best practices guide sg246363
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Db2 udb backup and recovery with ess copy services
Db2 udb backup and recovery with ess copy servicesDb2 udb backup and recovery with ess copy services
Db2 udb backup and recovery with ess copy services
bupbechanhgmail
 
This is
This is This is
This is
kaykaykay12
 
Cognos v10.1
Cognos v10.1Cognos v10.1
Cognos v10.1
Exo-marker
 
Ppm7.5 demand cg
Ppm7.5 demand cgPpm7.5 demand cg
Ppm7.5 demand cg
indiatechnopark
 
SAP_HANA_Modeling_Guide_for_SAP_HANA_Studio_en
SAP_HANA_Modeling_Guide_for_SAP_HANA_Studio_enSAP_HANA_Modeling_Guide_for_SAP_HANA_Studio_en
SAP_HANA_Modeling_Guide_for_SAP_HANA_Studio_en
Jim Miller, MBA
 
Ibm tivoli intelligent think dynamic orchestrator pre proof of-concept cookbo...
Ibm tivoli intelligent think dynamic orchestrator pre proof of-concept cookbo...Ibm tivoli intelligent think dynamic orchestrator pre proof of-concept cookbo...
Ibm tivoli intelligent think dynamic orchestrator pre proof of-concept cookbo...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tape automation with ibm e server xseries servers redp0415
Tape automation with ibm e server xseries servers redp0415Tape automation with ibm e server xseries servers redp0415
Tape automation with ibm e server xseries servers redp0415
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Xi3 ds administrators_guide_en
Xi3 ds administrators_guide_enXi3 ds administrators_guide_en
Xi3 ds administrators_guide_en
Sarat Reddy
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager express for softwa...
Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager express for softwa...Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager express for softwa...
Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager express for softwa...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
BOOK - IBM Implementing ibm system directory 6.1
BOOK - IBM Implementing ibm system directory 6.1BOOK - IBM Implementing ibm system directory 6.1
BOOK - IBM Implementing ibm system directory 6.1
Satya Harish
 
Ibm virtual disk system quickstart guide sg247794
Ibm virtual disk system quickstart guide sg247794Ibm virtual disk system quickstart guide sg247794
Ibm virtual disk system quickstart guide sg247794
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
SchoolAdmin - School Fees Collection & Accounting Software
SchoolAdmin - School Fees Collection & Accounting SoftwareSchoolAdmin - School Fees Collection & Accounting Software
SchoolAdmin - School Fees Collection & Accounting Software
Ranganath Shivaram
 
Ibm midrange system storage implementation and best practices guide sg246363
Ibm midrange system storage implementation and best practices guide sg246363Ibm midrange system storage implementation and best practices guide sg246363
Ibm midrange system storage implementation and best practices guide sg246363
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Db2 udb backup and recovery with ess copy services
Db2 udb backup and recovery with ess copy servicesDb2 udb backup and recovery with ess copy services
Db2 udb backup and recovery with ess copy services
bupbechanhgmail
 

Similar to Certification guide series ibm tivoli usage and accounting manager v7.1 implementation sg247692 (20)

Solution deployment guide for ibm tivoli composite application manager for we...
Solution deployment guide for ibm tivoli composite application manager for we...Solution deployment guide for ibm tivoli composite application manager for we...
Solution deployment guide for ibm tivoli composite application manager for we...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web reso...
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web reso...Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web reso...
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web reso...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool omn ibus v7.2 implementation sg...
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool omn ibus v7.2 implementation sg...Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool omn ibus v7.2 implementation sg...
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool omn ibus v7.2 implementation sg...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli access manager for e business v6.0 sg247207
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli access manager for e business v6.0 sg247207Deployment guide series ibm tivoli access manager for e business v6.0 sg247207
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli access manager for e business v6.0 sg247207
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool impact v4.0 implementation sg24...
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool impact v4.0 implementation sg24...Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool impact v4.0 implementation sg24...
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool impact v4.0 implementation sg24...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli compliance insight manager sg247531
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli compliance insight manager sg247531Deployment guide series ibm tivoli compliance insight manager sg247531
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli compliance insight manager sg247531
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli compliance insight manager sg247531
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli compliance insight manager sg247531Deployment guide series ibm tivoli compliance insight manager sg247531
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli compliance insight manager sg247531
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool webtop v2.0 implementationsg247754
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool webtop v2.0 implementationsg247754Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool webtop v2.0 implementationsg247754
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool webtop v2.0 implementationsg247754
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager v5.1 sg247262
Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager v5.1 sg247262Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager v5.1 sg247262
Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager v5.1 sg247262
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm total storage productivity center for data sg247140
Deployment guide series ibm total storage productivity center for data sg247140Deployment guide series ibm total storage productivity center for data sg247140
Deployment guide series ibm total storage productivity center for data sg247140
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ibm total storage productivity center v2.3 getting started sg246490
Ibm total storage productivity center v2.3 getting started sg246490Ibm total storage productivity center v2.3 getting started sg246490
Ibm total storage productivity center v2.3 getting started sg246490
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ibm total storage productivity center v2.3 getting started sg246490
Ibm total storage productivity center v2.3 getting started sg246490Ibm total storage productivity center v2.3 getting started sg246490
Ibm total storage productivity center v2.3 getting started sg246490
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ibm tivoli monitoring v5.1.1 implementation certification study guide redp3935
Ibm tivoli monitoring v5.1.1 implementation certification study guide redp3935Ibm tivoli monitoring v5.1.1 implementation certification study guide redp3935
Ibm tivoli monitoring v5.1.1 implementation certification study guide redp3935
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ibm web sphere datapower b2b appliance xb60 revealed
Ibm web sphere datapower b2b appliance xb60 revealedIbm web sphere datapower b2b appliance xb60 revealed
Ibm web sphere datapower b2b appliance xb60 revealed
netmotshop
 
Ibm tivoli monitoring v5.1.1 implementation certification study guide sg246780
Ibm tivoli monitoring v5.1.1 implementation certification study guide sg246780Ibm tivoli monitoring v5.1.1 implementation certification study guide sg246780
Ibm tivoli monitoring v5.1.1 implementation certification study guide sg246780
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM Streams - Redbook
IBM Streams - RedbookIBM Streams - Redbook
IBM Streams - Redbook
Pesta Ria Henny Beatrice
 
Managing disk subsystems using ibm total storage productivity center sg247097
Managing disk subsystems using ibm total storage productivity center sg247097Managing disk subsystems using ibm total storage productivity center sg247097
Managing disk subsystems using ibm total storage productivity center sg247097
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web sphe...
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web sphe...Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web sphe...
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web sphe...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web sphe...
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web sphe...Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web sphe...
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web sphe...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Enabling mobile apps with ibm worklight application center red
Enabling mobile apps with ibm worklight application center redEnabling mobile apps with ibm worklight application center red
Enabling mobile apps with ibm worklight application center red
bupbechanhgmail
 
Solution deployment guide for ibm tivoli composite application manager for we...
Solution deployment guide for ibm tivoli composite application manager for we...Solution deployment guide for ibm tivoli composite application manager for we...
Solution deployment guide for ibm tivoli composite application manager for we...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web reso...
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web reso...Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web reso...
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web reso...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool omn ibus v7.2 implementation sg...
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool omn ibus v7.2 implementation sg...Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool omn ibus v7.2 implementation sg...
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool omn ibus v7.2 implementation sg...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli access manager for e business v6.0 sg247207
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli access manager for e business v6.0 sg247207Deployment guide series ibm tivoli access manager for e business v6.0 sg247207
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli access manager for e business v6.0 sg247207
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool impact v4.0 implementation sg24...
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool impact v4.0 implementation sg24...Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool impact v4.0 implementation sg24...
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool impact v4.0 implementation sg24...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli compliance insight manager sg247531
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli compliance insight manager sg247531Deployment guide series ibm tivoli compliance insight manager sg247531
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli compliance insight manager sg247531
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli compliance insight manager sg247531
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli compliance insight manager sg247531Deployment guide series ibm tivoli compliance insight manager sg247531
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli compliance insight manager sg247531
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool webtop v2.0 implementationsg247754
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool webtop v2.0 implementationsg247754Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool webtop v2.0 implementationsg247754
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool webtop v2.0 implementationsg247754
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager v5.1 sg247262
Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager v5.1 sg247262Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager v5.1 sg247262
Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager v5.1 sg247262
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm total storage productivity center for data sg247140
Deployment guide series ibm total storage productivity center for data sg247140Deployment guide series ibm total storage productivity center for data sg247140
Deployment guide series ibm total storage productivity center for data sg247140
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ibm total storage productivity center v2.3 getting started sg246490
Ibm total storage productivity center v2.3 getting started sg246490Ibm total storage productivity center v2.3 getting started sg246490
Ibm total storage productivity center v2.3 getting started sg246490
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ibm total storage productivity center v2.3 getting started sg246490
Ibm total storage productivity center v2.3 getting started sg246490Ibm total storage productivity center v2.3 getting started sg246490
Ibm total storage productivity center v2.3 getting started sg246490
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ibm tivoli monitoring v5.1.1 implementation certification study guide redp3935
Ibm tivoli monitoring v5.1.1 implementation certification study guide redp3935Ibm tivoli monitoring v5.1.1 implementation certification study guide redp3935
Ibm tivoli monitoring v5.1.1 implementation certification study guide redp3935
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ibm web sphere datapower b2b appliance xb60 revealed
Ibm web sphere datapower b2b appliance xb60 revealedIbm web sphere datapower b2b appliance xb60 revealed
Ibm web sphere datapower b2b appliance xb60 revealed
netmotshop
 
Ibm tivoli monitoring v5.1.1 implementation certification study guide sg246780
Ibm tivoli monitoring v5.1.1 implementation certification study guide sg246780Ibm tivoli monitoring v5.1.1 implementation certification study guide sg246780
Ibm tivoli monitoring v5.1.1 implementation certification study guide sg246780
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Managing disk subsystems using ibm total storage productivity center sg247097
Managing disk subsystems using ibm total storage productivity center sg247097Managing disk subsystems using ibm total storage productivity center sg247097
Managing disk subsystems using ibm total storage productivity center sg247097
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web sphe...
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web sphe...Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web sphe...
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web sphe...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web sphe...
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web sphe...Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web sphe...
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web sphe...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Enabling mobile apps with ibm worklight application center red
Enabling mobile apps with ibm worklight application center redEnabling mobile apps with ibm worklight application center red
Enabling mobile apps with ibm worklight application center red
bupbechanhgmail
 
Ad

More from Banking at Ho Chi Minh city (20)

Postgresql v15.1
Postgresql v15.1Postgresql v15.1
Postgresql v15.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Postgresql v14.6 Document Guide
Postgresql v14.6 Document GuidePostgresql v14.6 Document Guide
Postgresql v14.6 Document Guide
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 Pot Intro v0.1
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 Pot Intro v0.1IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 Pot Intro v0.1
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 Pot Intro v0.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7 Tech Overview
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7 Tech OverviewIBM MobileFirst Platform v7 Tech Overview
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7 Tech Overview
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Foundation Version Flyer v1.0
IBM MobileFirst Foundation Version Flyer v1.0IBM MobileFirst Foundation Version Flyer v1.0
IBM MobileFirst Foundation Version Flyer v1.0
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Offers Lab v1.0
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Offers Lab v1.0IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Offers Lab v1.0
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Offers Lab v1.0
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 pot intro v0.1
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 pot intro v0.1IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 pot intro v0.1
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 pot intro v0.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT App Mgmt Lab v1.1
IBM MobileFirst Platform  v7.0 POT App Mgmt Lab v1.1IBM MobileFirst Platform  v7.0 POT App Mgmt Lab v1.1
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT App Mgmt Lab v1.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Analytics v1.1
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Analytics v1.1IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Analytics v1.1
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Analytics v1.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform Pot Sentiment Analysis v3
IBM MobileFirst Platform Pot Sentiment Analysis v3IBM MobileFirst Platform Pot Sentiment Analysis v3
IBM MobileFirst Platform Pot Sentiment Analysis v3
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform 7.0 POT InApp Feedback V0.1
IBM MobileFirst Platform 7.0 POT InApp Feedback V0.1IBM MobileFirst Platform 7.0 POT InApp Feedback V0.1
IBM MobileFirst Platform 7.0 POT InApp Feedback V0.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tme 10 cookbook for aix systems management and networking sg244867
Tme 10 cookbook for aix systems management and networking sg244867Tme 10 cookbook for aix systems management and networking sg244867
Tme 10 cookbook for aix systems management and networking sg244867
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tivoli firewall magic redp0227
Tivoli firewall magic redp0227Tivoli firewall magic redp0227
Tivoli firewall magic redp0227
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tivoli data warehouse version 1.3 planning and implementation sg246343
Tivoli data warehouse version 1.3 planning and implementation sg246343Tivoli data warehouse version 1.3 planning and implementation sg246343
Tivoli data warehouse version 1.3 planning and implementation sg246343
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tivoli data warehouse 1.2 and business objects redp9116
Tivoli data warehouse 1.2 and business objects redp9116Tivoli data warehouse 1.2 and business objects redp9116
Tivoli data warehouse 1.2 and business objects redp9116
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tec implementation examples sg245216
Tec implementation examples sg245216Tec implementation examples sg245216
Tec implementation examples sg245216
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tivoli storage productivity center v4.2 release guide sg247894
Tivoli storage productivity center v4.2 release guide sg247894Tivoli storage productivity center v4.2 release guide sg247894
Tivoli storage productivity center v4.2 release guide sg247894
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Synchronizing data with ibm tivoli directory integrator 6.1 redp4317
Synchronizing data with ibm tivoli directory integrator 6.1 redp4317Synchronizing data with ibm tivoli directory integrator 6.1 redp4317
Synchronizing data with ibm tivoli directory integrator 6.1 redp4317
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Storage migration and consolidation with ibm total storage products redp3888
Storage migration and consolidation with ibm total storage products redp3888Storage migration and consolidation with ibm total storage products redp3888
Storage migration and consolidation with ibm total storage products redp3888
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Slr to tivoli performance reporter for os 390 migration cookbook sg245128
Slr to tivoli performance reporter for os 390 migration cookbook sg245128Slr to tivoli performance reporter for os 390 migration cookbook sg245128
Slr to tivoli performance reporter for os 390 migration cookbook sg245128
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Offers Lab v1.0
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Offers Lab v1.0IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Offers Lab v1.0
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Offers Lab v1.0
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT App Mgmt Lab v1.1
IBM MobileFirst Platform  v7.0 POT App Mgmt Lab v1.1IBM MobileFirst Platform  v7.0 POT App Mgmt Lab v1.1
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT App Mgmt Lab v1.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Analytics v1.1
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Analytics v1.1IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Analytics v1.1
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Analytics v1.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform Pot Sentiment Analysis v3
IBM MobileFirst Platform Pot Sentiment Analysis v3IBM MobileFirst Platform Pot Sentiment Analysis v3
IBM MobileFirst Platform Pot Sentiment Analysis v3
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform 7.0 POT InApp Feedback V0.1
IBM MobileFirst Platform 7.0 POT InApp Feedback V0.1IBM MobileFirst Platform 7.0 POT InApp Feedback V0.1
IBM MobileFirst Platform 7.0 POT InApp Feedback V0.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tme 10 cookbook for aix systems management and networking sg244867
Tme 10 cookbook for aix systems management and networking sg244867Tme 10 cookbook for aix systems management and networking sg244867
Tme 10 cookbook for aix systems management and networking sg244867
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tivoli data warehouse version 1.3 planning and implementation sg246343
Tivoli data warehouse version 1.3 planning and implementation sg246343Tivoli data warehouse version 1.3 planning and implementation sg246343
Tivoli data warehouse version 1.3 planning and implementation sg246343
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tivoli data warehouse 1.2 and business objects redp9116
Tivoli data warehouse 1.2 and business objects redp9116Tivoli data warehouse 1.2 and business objects redp9116
Tivoli data warehouse 1.2 and business objects redp9116
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tivoli storage productivity center v4.2 release guide sg247894
Tivoli storage productivity center v4.2 release guide sg247894Tivoli storage productivity center v4.2 release guide sg247894
Tivoli storage productivity center v4.2 release guide sg247894
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Synchronizing data with ibm tivoli directory integrator 6.1 redp4317
Synchronizing data with ibm tivoli directory integrator 6.1 redp4317Synchronizing data with ibm tivoli directory integrator 6.1 redp4317
Synchronizing data with ibm tivoli directory integrator 6.1 redp4317
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Storage migration and consolidation with ibm total storage products redp3888
Storage migration and consolidation with ibm total storage products redp3888Storage migration and consolidation with ibm total storage products redp3888
Storage migration and consolidation with ibm total storage products redp3888
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Slr to tivoli performance reporter for os 390 migration cookbook sg245128
Slr to tivoli performance reporter for os 390 migration cookbook sg245128Slr to tivoli performance reporter for os 390 migration cookbook sg245128
Slr to tivoli performance reporter for os 390 migration cookbook sg245128
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

AI Changes Everything – Talk at Cardiff Metropolitan University, 29th April 2...
AI Changes Everything – Talk at Cardiff Metropolitan University, 29th April 2...AI Changes Everything – Talk at Cardiff Metropolitan University, 29th April 2...
AI Changes Everything – Talk at Cardiff Metropolitan University, 29th April 2...
Alan Dix
 
Build Your Own Copilot & Agents For Devs
Build Your Own Copilot & Agents For DevsBuild Your Own Copilot & Agents For Devs
Build Your Own Copilot & Agents For Devs
Brian McKeiver
 
Increasing Retail Store Efficiency How can Planograms Save Time and Money.pptx
Increasing Retail Store Efficiency How can Planograms Save Time and Money.pptxIncreasing Retail Store Efficiency How can Planograms Save Time and Money.pptx
Increasing Retail Store Efficiency How can Planograms Save Time and Money.pptx
Anoop Ashok
 
Electronic_Mail_Attacks-1-35.pdf by xploit
Electronic_Mail_Attacks-1-35.pdf by xploitElectronic_Mail_Attacks-1-35.pdf by xploit
Electronic_Mail_Attacks-1-35.pdf by xploit
niftliyevhuseyn
 
DevOpsDays Atlanta 2025 - Building 10x Development Organizations.pptx
DevOpsDays Atlanta 2025 - Building 10x Development Organizations.pptxDevOpsDays Atlanta 2025 - Building 10x Development Organizations.pptx
DevOpsDays Atlanta 2025 - Building 10x Development Organizations.pptx
Justin Reock
 
Cybersecurity Identity and Access Solutions using Azure AD
Cybersecurity Identity and Access Solutions using Azure ADCybersecurity Identity and Access Solutions using Azure AD
Cybersecurity Identity and Access Solutions using Azure AD
VICTOR MAESTRE RAMIREZ
 
TrsLabs - Fintech Product & Business Consulting
TrsLabs - Fintech Product & Business ConsultingTrsLabs - Fintech Product & Business Consulting
TrsLabs - Fintech Product & Business Consulting
Trs Labs
 
2025-05-Q4-2024-Investor-Presentation.pptx
2025-05-Q4-2024-Investor-Presentation.pptx2025-05-Q4-2024-Investor-Presentation.pptx
2025-05-Q4-2024-Investor-Presentation.pptx
Samuele Fogagnolo
 
ThousandEyes Partner Innovation Updates for May 2025
ThousandEyes Partner Innovation Updates for May 2025ThousandEyes Partner Innovation Updates for May 2025
ThousandEyes Partner Innovation Updates for May 2025
ThousandEyes
 
Massive Power Outage Hits Spain, Portugal, and France: Causes, Impact, and On...
Massive Power Outage Hits Spain, Portugal, and France: Causes, Impact, and On...Massive Power Outage Hits Spain, Portugal, and France: Causes, Impact, and On...
Massive Power Outage Hits Spain, Portugal, and France: Causes, Impact, and On...
Aqusag Technologies
 
Splunk Security Update | Public Sector Summit Germany 2025
Splunk Security Update | Public Sector Summit Germany 2025Splunk Security Update | Public Sector Summit Germany 2025
Splunk Security Update | Public Sector Summit Germany 2025
Splunk
 
Andrew Marnell: Transforming Business Strategy Through Data-Driven Insights
Andrew Marnell: Transforming Business Strategy Through Data-Driven InsightsAndrew Marnell: Transforming Business Strategy Through Data-Driven Insights
Andrew Marnell: Transforming Business Strategy Through Data-Driven Insights
Andrew Marnell
 
Linux Professional Institute LPIC-1 Exam.pdf
Linux Professional Institute LPIC-1 Exam.pdfLinux Professional Institute LPIC-1 Exam.pdf
Linux Professional Institute LPIC-1 Exam.pdf
RHCSA Guru
 
SAP Modernization: Maximizing the Value of Your SAP S/4HANA Migration.pdf
SAP Modernization: Maximizing the Value of Your SAP S/4HANA Migration.pdfSAP Modernization: Maximizing the Value of Your SAP S/4HANA Migration.pdf
SAP Modernization: Maximizing the Value of Your SAP S/4HANA Migration.pdf
Precisely
 
Role of Data Annotation Services in AI-Powered Manufacturing
Role of Data Annotation Services in AI-Powered ManufacturingRole of Data Annotation Services in AI-Powered Manufacturing
Role of Data Annotation Services in AI-Powered Manufacturing
Andrew Leo
 
Rusty Waters: Elevating Lakehouses Beyond Spark
Rusty Waters: Elevating Lakehouses Beyond SparkRusty Waters: Elevating Lakehouses Beyond Spark
Rusty Waters: Elevating Lakehouses Beyond Spark
carlyakerly1
 
Procurement Insights Cost To Value Guide.pptx
Procurement Insights Cost To Value Guide.pptxProcurement Insights Cost To Value Guide.pptx
Procurement Insights Cost To Value Guide.pptx
Jon Hansen
 
Designing Low-Latency Systems with Rust and ScyllaDB: An Architectural Deep Dive
Designing Low-Latency Systems with Rust and ScyllaDB: An Architectural Deep DiveDesigning Low-Latency Systems with Rust and ScyllaDB: An Architectural Deep Dive
Designing Low-Latency Systems with Rust and ScyllaDB: An Architectural Deep Dive
ScyllaDB
 
How Can I use the AI Hype in my Business Context?
How Can I use the AI Hype in my Business Context?How Can I use the AI Hype in my Business Context?
How Can I use the AI Hype in my Business Context?
Daniel Lehner
 
Mobile App Development Company in Saudi Arabia
Mobile App Development Company in Saudi ArabiaMobile App Development Company in Saudi Arabia
Mobile App Development Company in Saudi Arabia
Steve Jonas
 
AI Changes Everything – Talk at Cardiff Metropolitan University, 29th April 2...
AI Changes Everything – Talk at Cardiff Metropolitan University, 29th April 2...AI Changes Everything – Talk at Cardiff Metropolitan University, 29th April 2...
AI Changes Everything – Talk at Cardiff Metropolitan University, 29th April 2...
Alan Dix
 
Build Your Own Copilot & Agents For Devs
Build Your Own Copilot & Agents For DevsBuild Your Own Copilot & Agents For Devs
Build Your Own Copilot & Agents For Devs
Brian McKeiver
 
Increasing Retail Store Efficiency How can Planograms Save Time and Money.pptx
Increasing Retail Store Efficiency How can Planograms Save Time and Money.pptxIncreasing Retail Store Efficiency How can Planograms Save Time and Money.pptx
Increasing Retail Store Efficiency How can Planograms Save Time and Money.pptx
Anoop Ashok
 
Electronic_Mail_Attacks-1-35.pdf by xploit
Electronic_Mail_Attacks-1-35.pdf by xploitElectronic_Mail_Attacks-1-35.pdf by xploit
Electronic_Mail_Attacks-1-35.pdf by xploit
niftliyevhuseyn
 
DevOpsDays Atlanta 2025 - Building 10x Development Organizations.pptx
DevOpsDays Atlanta 2025 - Building 10x Development Organizations.pptxDevOpsDays Atlanta 2025 - Building 10x Development Organizations.pptx
DevOpsDays Atlanta 2025 - Building 10x Development Organizations.pptx
Justin Reock
 
Cybersecurity Identity and Access Solutions using Azure AD
Cybersecurity Identity and Access Solutions using Azure ADCybersecurity Identity and Access Solutions using Azure AD
Cybersecurity Identity and Access Solutions using Azure AD
VICTOR MAESTRE RAMIREZ
 
TrsLabs - Fintech Product & Business Consulting
TrsLabs - Fintech Product & Business ConsultingTrsLabs - Fintech Product & Business Consulting
TrsLabs - Fintech Product & Business Consulting
Trs Labs
 
2025-05-Q4-2024-Investor-Presentation.pptx
2025-05-Q4-2024-Investor-Presentation.pptx2025-05-Q4-2024-Investor-Presentation.pptx
2025-05-Q4-2024-Investor-Presentation.pptx
Samuele Fogagnolo
 
ThousandEyes Partner Innovation Updates for May 2025
ThousandEyes Partner Innovation Updates for May 2025ThousandEyes Partner Innovation Updates for May 2025
ThousandEyes Partner Innovation Updates for May 2025
ThousandEyes
 
Massive Power Outage Hits Spain, Portugal, and France: Causes, Impact, and On...
Massive Power Outage Hits Spain, Portugal, and France: Causes, Impact, and On...Massive Power Outage Hits Spain, Portugal, and France: Causes, Impact, and On...
Massive Power Outage Hits Spain, Portugal, and France: Causes, Impact, and On...
Aqusag Technologies
 
Splunk Security Update | Public Sector Summit Germany 2025
Splunk Security Update | Public Sector Summit Germany 2025Splunk Security Update | Public Sector Summit Germany 2025
Splunk Security Update | Public Sector Summit Germany 2025
Splunk
 
Andrew Marnell: Transforming Business Strategy Through Data-Driven Insights
Andrew Marnell: Transforming Business Strategy Through Data-Driven InsightsAndrew Marnell: Transforming Business Strategy Through Data-Driven Insights
Andrew Marnell: Transforming Business Strategy Through Data-Driven Insights
Andrew Marnell
 
Linux Professional Institute LPIC-1 Exam.pdf
Linux Professional Institute LPIC-1 Exam.pdfLinux Professional Institute LPIC-1 Exam.pdf
Linux Professional Institute LPIC-1 Exam.pdf
RHCSA Guru
 
SAP Modernization: Maximizing the Value of Your SAP S/4HANA Migration.pdf
SAP Modernization: Maximizing the Value of Your SAP S/4HANA Migration.pdfSAP Modernization: Maximizing the Value of Your SAP S/4HANA Migration.pdf
SAP Modernization: Maximizing the Value of Your SAP S/4HANA Migration.pdf
Precisely
 
Role of Data Annotation Services in AI-Powered Manufacturing
Role of Data Annotation Services in AI-Powered ManufacturingRole of Data Annotation Services in AI-Powered Manufacturing
Role of Data Annotation Services in AI-Powered Manufacturing
Andrew Leo
 
Rusty Waters: Elevating Lakehouses Beyond Spark
Rusty Waters: Elevating Lakehouses Beyond SparkRusty Waters: Elevating Lakehouses Beyond Spark
Rusty Waters: Elevating Lakehouses Beyond Spark
carlyakerly1
 
Procurement Insights Cost To Value Guide.pptx
Procurement Insights Cost To Value Guide.pptxProcurement Insights Cost To Value Guide.pptx
Procurement Insights Cost To Value Guide.pptx
Jon Hansen
 
Designing Low-Latency Systems with Rust and ScyllaDB: An Architectural Deep Dive
Designing Low-Latency Systems with Rust and ScyllaDB: An Architectural Deep DiveDesigning Low-Latency Systems with Rust and ScyllaDB: An Architectural Deep Dive
Designing Low-Latency Systems with Rust and ScyllaDB: An Architectural Deep Dive
ScyllaDB
 
How Can I use the AI Hype in my Business Context?
How Can I use the AI Hype in my Business Context?How Can I use the AI Hype in my Business Context?
How Can I use the AI Hype in my Business Context?
Daniel Lehner
 
Mobile App Development Company in Saudi Arabia
Mobile App Development Company in Saudi ArabiaMobile App Development Company in Saudi Arabia
Mobile App Development Company in Saudi Arabia
Steve Jonas
 

Certification guide series ibm tivoli usage and accounting manager v7.1 implementation sg247692

  • 1. Front cover Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation Detailed architecture and components discussion Installation and configuration processing Monitoring IT usage and chargebacks Budi Darmawan ibm.com/redbooks
  • 3. International Technical Support Organization Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation March 2009 SG24-7692-00
  • 4. Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in “Notices” on page vii. First Edition (March 2009) This edition applies to Version 7, Release 1 of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager (product number 5724-033). © Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2009. All rights reserved. Note to U.S. Government Users Restricted Rights -- Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
  • 5. Contents Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix The team that wrote this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix Become a published author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x Comments welcome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x Chapter 1. Certification overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 IBM Professional Certification Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.1.1 Benefits of certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.1.2 Tivoli Software Professional Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.2 Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.2.1 Job role description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.2.2 Key areas of competency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.2.3 Prerequisite skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.2.4 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.3 Certification objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.3.1 Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.3.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1.3.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 1.3.4 Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 1.3.5 Job creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 1.3.6 Problem determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 1.3.7 Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 1.4 Recommended study resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 1.4.1 IBM Redbooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Chapter 2. Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 2.1 Planning the implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 2.2 Account code structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 2.3 Collector selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 2.4 Implementation platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 2.5 Database sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 2.5.1 CIMSLOADTRACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 2.5.2 CIMSSUMMARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 2.5.3 CIMSDETAIL and CIMSDETAILIDENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 2.5.4 CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 2.6 Report requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved. iii
  • 6. Chapter 3. Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 3.1 Installation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 3.2 Installation prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 3.2.1 Platform requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 3.2.2 Configuring Microsoft Internet Information Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 3.2.3 Install the Microsoft Installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 3.2.4 Install Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 3.2.5 Install Microsoft SQL Server Report Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 3.3 Application server installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 3.4 Database configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 3.4.1 Database creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 3.4.2 Defining JDBC driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 3.4.3 Defining data sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 3.4.4 Initializing database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 3.5 Enterprise Collector Pack implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 3.6 Initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 3.7 Installation verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 3.7.1 Verify the tables created during initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 3.7.2 Verify the contents of the CIMSRate table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 3.7.3 Verify the application status in IIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 3.7.4 Connect to the reporting Web application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 3.8 Sample collection verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Chapter 4. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 4.1 The Common Source Resource format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 4.2 Account code hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 4.3 User administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 4.3.1 User creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 4.3.2 User role definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 4.3.3 User and group mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 4.4 Clients and scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 4.4.1 Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 4.4.2 Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 4.4.3 Client budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 4.4.4 Client contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 4.5 Working with rates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 4.5.1 Rate group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 4.5.2 Rate codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 4.5.3 Alternate rates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 4.5.4 Proration table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 4.5.5 CPU normalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 4.5.6 Rate shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 iv Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 7. Chapter 5. Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 5.1 Integrated Solution Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 5.2 Load tracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 5.3 Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 5.3.1 Tuning Web console for administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 5.3.2 Tuning job processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 5.3.3 Tuning report generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 5.4 Operating and updating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 5.4.1 Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 5.4.2 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 5.4.3 Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Chapter 6. Job creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 6.1 XML job creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 6.1.1 Job file structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 6.1.2 Generic processing overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 6.2 Syntax of main Job Runner directives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 6.2.1 Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 6.2.2 Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 6.2.3 Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 6.2.4 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 6.2.5 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 6.2.6 Step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 6.3 Integrator program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 6.3.1 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 6.3.2 Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 6.3.3 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 6.4 Account code mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 6.5 Non-integrator steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 6.5.1 Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 6.5.2 Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 6.5.3 Bill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 6.5.4 Cleanup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 6.5.5 Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 6.5.6 DBLoad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 6.5.7 DBPurge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 6.5.8 Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 6.5.9 File transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 6.5.10 Wait file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 6.5.11 Remote product deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 6.5.12 Job conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 6.5.13 Windows script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 6.5.14 Java. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Contents v
  • 8. 6.5.15 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Chapter 7. Problem determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 7.1 Job failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 7.1.1 Job logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 7.1.2 Output files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 7.2 Database connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 7.3 Web reporting problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 7.4 Trace level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Chapter 8. Web reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 8.1 Web reporting interface and user authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 8.2 Web reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 8.3 Producing reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 8.4 Defining a new report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 8.5 Batch reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Appendix A. Sample test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Sample test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Answer key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Abbreviations and acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 IBM Redbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Other publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Online resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 How to get Redbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Help from IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 vi Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 9. Notices This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A. IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service. IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to: IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, North Castle Drive, Armonk, NY 10504-1785 U.S.A. The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice. Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products. Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products. This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental. COPYRIGHT LICENSE: This information contains sample application programs in source language, which illustrate programming techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing application programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for which the sample programs are written. These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved. vii
  • 10. Trademarks IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. These and other IBM trademarked terms are marked on their first occurrence in this information with the appropriate symbol (® or ™), indicating US registered or common law trademarks owned by IBM at the time this information was published. Such trademarks may also be registered or common law trademarks in other countries. A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the Web at http://www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both: AIX 5L™ Lotus® System z® AIX® Notes® Tivoli® CICS® Passport Advantage® TotalStorage® DB2 Universal Database™ PowerPC® WebSphere® DB2® Redbooks® z/OS® IBM® Redbooks (logo) ® z/VM® Lotus Notes® System p® The following terms are trademarks of other companies: ITIL is a registered trademark, and a registered community trademark of the Office of Government Commerce, and is registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office. SUSE, the Novell logo, and the N logo are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, Siebel, and TopLink are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. SAP, and SAP logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries. VMware, the VMware "boxes" logo and design are registered trademarks or trademarks of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other jurisdictions. Java, JDBC, JVM, Solaris, and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, other countries, or both. Internet Explorer, Microsoft, MS, OpenType, SQL Server, Visual Basic, Windows Server, Windows, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries. Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. viii Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 11. Preface This IBM® Redbooks® publication is a study guide for the IBM Tivoli® Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 certification. It is aimed for IT professional who want to be an IBM Certified Professional for this product. IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 certification is offered through the IBM Professional Certification program. It is designed to validate the skills required of technical professionals who work in the implementation and deployment of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1. This book provides the necessary information to understand this topic. It includes sample questions that help evaluate personal progress. It familiarizes the readers with the types of questions that may be encountered in the exam. This guide does not replace practical experience. This is not designed to be a stand-alone guide for this topic. Instead, this guide should be combined with educational activities and experiences and used as a very useful preparation guide for exam. For your convenience, the chapters are based on the certification objectives of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 implementation certification test. Those requirements are planning, prerequisites, installation, configuration, administration, and problem determination. Studying each chapter helps you prepare for each objective of the exam. The team that wrote this book This book was produced by a team of specialists from around the world working at the International Technical Support Organization, Austin Center. Budi Darmawan is a project leader at the International Technical Support Organization, Austin Center. He writes extensively and teaches IBM classes worldwide on all areas of Tivoli and systems management. Before joining the ITSO 10 years ago, Budi worked in IBM Global Services, IBM Indonesia as a solution architect and lead implementer. His current interests include service management, application management, business services management, and Java™ programming. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved. ix
  • 12. Thanks to the following people for their contributions to this project: Wade Wallace International Technical Support Organization, Austin Center Terry Copeland IBM Software Group Jörn Siglen, Lennart Lundgren, Roy Catterall Authors of Deployment Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1, SG24-7569 and IBM Tivoli Usage Accounting Manager V7.1 Handbook, SG24-7404 Become a published author Join us for a two- to six-week residency program! Help write a book dealing with specific products or solutions, while getting hands-on experience with leading-edge technologies. You will have the opportunity to team with IBM technical professionals, Business Partners, and Clients. Your efforts will help increase product acceptance and customer satisfaction. As a bonus, you will develop a network of contacts in IBM development labs, and increase your productivity and marketability. Find out more about the residency program, browse the residency index, and apply online at: ibm.com/redbooks/residencies.html Comments welcome Your comments are important to us! We want our books to be as helpful as possible. Send us your comments about this book or other IBM Redbooks in one of the following ways: Use the online Contact us review Redbooks form found at: ibm.com/redbooks Send your comments in an e-mail to: [email protected] x Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 13. Mail your comments to: IBM Corporation, International Technical Support Organization Dept. HYTD Mail Station P099 2455 South Road Poughkeepsie, NY 12601-5400 Preface xi
  • 14. xii Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 15. 1 Chapter 1. Certification overview This chapter provides an overview of the skills requirements needed to obtain an IBM Certified Deployment Specialist - IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 certification. This chapter provides a comprehensive review of topics that are essential for obtaining the certification: 1.1, “IBM Professional Certification Program” on page 2 1.2, “Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1” on page 6 1.3, “Certification objectives” on page 8 1.4, “Recommended study resources” on page 22 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved. 1
  • 16. 1.1 IBM Professional Certification Program Having the right skills for the job is critical in the growing global marketplace. IBM Professional Certification is designed to validate skill and proficiency in the latest IBM solution and product technology. It can help provide that competitive edge. The IBM Professional Certification Program Web site is available at: http://www.ibm.com/certify/index.shtml The Professional Certification Program from IBM offers a business solution for skilled technical professionals seeking to demonstrate their expertise to the world. The program is designed to validate your skills and demonstrate your proficiency in the latest IBM technology and solutions. In addition, professional certification may help you excel at your job by giving you and your employer confidence that your skills have been tested. You may be able to deliver higher levels of service and technical expertise than non-certified employees and move on a faster career track. The certification requirements are difficult, but they are not overwhelming. It is a rigorous process that differentiates you from everyone else. The mission of IBM Professional Certification is to: Provide a reliable, valid, and fair method of assessing skills and knowledge. Provide IBM with a method of building and validating the skills of individuals and organizations. Develop a loyal community of highly skilled certified professionals who recommend, sell, service, support, and use IBM products and solutions. The Professional Certification Program from IBM has developed certification role names to guide you in your professional development. The certification role names include IBM Certified Specialist, IBM Certified Solutions/Systems Expert, and IBM Certified Advanced Technical Expert. These role names are for technical professionals who sell, service, and support IBM solutions. For technical professionals in application development, the certification roles include IBM Certified Developer Associate and IBM Certified Developer. An IBM Certified Instructor certifies the professional instructor. The Professional Certification Program from IBM provides you with a structured program leading to an internationally recognized qualification. The program is designed for flexibility by allowing you to select your role, prepare for and take tests at your own pace, and, in some cases, select from a choice of elective tests best suited to your abilities and needs. Some roles also offer a shortcut by giving credit for a certification obtained in other industry certification programs. 2 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 17. You can be a network administrator, systems integrator, network integrator, solution architect, solution developer, value-added reseller, technical coordinator, sales representative, or educational trainer. Regardless of your role, you can start charting your course through the Professional Certification Program from IBM today. 1.1.1 Benefits of certification Certification is a tool to help objectively measure the performance of a professional on a given job at a defined skill level. Therefore, it is beneficial for individuals who want to validate their own skills and performance levels, their employees, or both. For the optimum benefit, the certification tests must reflect the critical tasks required for a job, the skill levels of each task, and the frequency by which a task needs to be performed. IBM prides itself in designing comprehensive, documented processes that ensure that IBM certification tests remain relevant to the work environment of potential certification candidates. In addition to assessing job skills and performance levels, professional certification can also provide such benefits as: For employees: – Promotes recognition as an IBM certified professional – Helps to create advantages in interviews – Assists in salary increases, corporate advancement, or both – Increases self-esteem – Provides continuing professional benefits For employers: – Measures the effectiveness of training – Reduces course redundancy and unnecessary expenses – Provides objective benchmarks for validating skills – Makes long-range planning easier – Helps to manage professional development – Aids as a hiring tool – Contributes to competitive advantage – Increases productivity – Increases morale and loyalty Chapter 1. Certification overview 3
  • 18. For IBM Business Partners and consultants: – Provides independent validation of technical skills – Creates competitive advantage and business opportunities – Enhances prestige of the team – Contributes to IBM requirements for various IBM Business Partner programs Specific benefits can vary by country (region) and role. In general, after you become certified, you should receive the following benefits: Industry recognition Certification may accelerate your career potential by validating your professional competency and increasing your ability to provide solid, capable technical support. Program credentials As a certified professional, you receive, by e-mail, your certificate of completion and the certification mark associated with your role for use in advertisements and business literature. You can also request a hardcopy certificate, which includes a wallet-size certificate. The Professional Certification Program from IBM acknowledges the individual as a technical professional. The certification mark is for the exclusive use of the certified individual. Ongoing technical vitality IBM Certified Professionals are included in mailings from the Professional Certification Program from IBM. 1.1.2 Tivoli Software Professional Certification The IBM Tivoli Professional Certification program offers certification testing that sets the standard for qualified product consultants, administrators, architects, and partners. The program also offers an internationally recognized qualification for technical professionals seeking to apply their expertise in today's complex business environment. The program is designed for those who implement, buy, sell, service, and support IBM Tivoli solutions and want to deliver higher levels of service and technical expertise. 4 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 19. Benefits of being Tivoli certified Tivoli certification provides the following benefits: For the individual: – IBM Certified certificate and use of logos on business cards – Recognition of your technical skills by your peers and management – Enhanced career opportunities – Focus for your professional development For the IBM Business Partner: – Confidence in the skills of your employees – Enhanced partnership benefits from the IBM Business Partner program – Billing your employees out at higher rates – Strengthens your proposals to customers – Demonstrates the depth of technical skills available to prospective customers For the customer: – Confidence in the services professionals handling your implementation – Ease of hiring competent employees to manage your Tivoli environment – Enhanced return on investment (ROI) through more thorough integration with Tivoli and third-party products – Ease of selecting a Tivoli Business Partner that meets your specific needs Certification checklist The certification process is as follows: 1. Select the certification that you want to pursue. 2. Determine which test or tests are required by reading the certification role description. 3. Prepare for the test, using the following resources provided: – Test objectives, discussed in 1.3, “Certification objectives” on page 8 – Recommended educational resources, discussed in 1.4, “Recommended study resources” on page 22 – Sample/assessment test, discussed in Appendix A, “Sample test” on page 157 – Other reference materials – Opportunities for experience Chapter 1. Certification overview 5
  • 20. 4. Register to take a test by contacting one of our worldwide testing vendors: – Thomson Prometric – Pearson Virtual University Enterprises (VUE) 5. Take the test. Be sure to keep the Examination Score Report provided upon test completion as your record of taking the test. 6. Repeat steps three through five until all required tests are successfully completed for the desired certification role. If additional requirements are needed (such as another vendor certification or exam), follow the instructions on the certification description page to submit these requirements to IBM. 7. After you complete your certification requirements, you will be sent an e-mail asking you to accept the terms of the IBM Certification Agreement before receiving the certificate. 8. Upon acceptance of the terms of the IBM Certification Agreement, an e-mail will be sent containing the following electronic deliverables: – A Certification Certificate in PDF format, which can be printed in either color or black and white – A set of graphic files of the IBM Professional Certification mark associated with the certification achieved – Guidelines for the use of the IBM Professional Certification mark 9. To avoid unnecessary delay in receiving your certificate, ensure that we have your current e-mail on file by keeping your profile up to date. If you do not have an e-mail address on file, your certificate will be sent through postal mail. After you receive a certificate by e-mail, you can also contact IBM at mailto:[email protected] to request that a hardcopy certificate be sent by postal mail. 1.2 Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 This section explains certification requirements and objectives. The following topics are discussed: 1.2.1, “Job role description” on page 7 1.2.2, “Key areas of competency” on page 7 1.2.3, “Prerequisite skills” on page 7 1.2.4, “Requirements” on page 8 6 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 21. 1.2.1 Job role description An IBM Certified Deployment Professional - IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 implementation is a technical professional responsible for planning, installing, configuring, administering, and problem determination of an IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 solution. This individual will be expected to perform these tasks with limited assistance from peers, product documentation, and support resources. 1.2.2 Key areas of competency The following key areas of competency are required: Describe the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 architecture and components. Plan and design an IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 solution based on customer requirements and environment. Install and configure IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 infrastructure components. Use the Integrated Solutions Console to administer and manage the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 environment. Perform problem determination for IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1. 1.2.3 Prerequisite skills The following are the required prerequisite skills for this certification: Strong working knowledge of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 infrastructure components Working knowledge of operating systems, networking, and firewall concepts Working knowledge of XML Working knowledge of shell and scripting Basic knowledge of WebSphere® Application Server Basic knowledge of databases, such as DB2®, Microsoft® SQL Server®, and Oracle® Basic knowledge of security (SSL, data encryption, system user accounts, and credentials) Basic knowledge of IIS Chapter 1. Certification overview 7
  • 22. Basic knowledge of LDAP Additionally, we recommend having working knowledge of BIRT. 1.2.4 Requirements This certification requires one test: test 012 - IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation. 1.3 Certification objectives The certification has the following objectives: 1.3.1, “Planning” on page 8 1.3.2, “Installation” on page 11 1.3.3, “Configuration” on page 13 1.3.4, “Administration” on page 16 1.3.5, “Job creation” on page 17 1.3.6, “Problem determination” on page 19 1.3.7, “Reporting” on page 21 For the most updated objectives of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Deployment Certification Test, refer to the following link: http://www-03.ibm.com/certify/certs/24108801.shtml 1.3.1 Planning Given the customer requirements and the financial organization prerequisites, discuss the key parameters and methods for installing IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager, so that a design document for the implementation of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager environment has been created, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Discuss the customer requirements in a workshop to show up the critical path. – Understand the financial system of the customer. – Define the account code structure to fit current and future plans for the customer environment. – Select the key parameters needed for accounting. 8 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 23. Plan IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager setup actions to be done. – Identify the data sources, identifiers, and rates to be used. – List the default collectors to be used and new collectors to be written. – Estimate the size of the database to be expected. Use the system management functions available. – Determine the method of scheduling jobs. – Define the data transfer solution to be implemented. – Determine the monitoring solution to be used for the environment. Clarify the operational view of the environment. – Define the reporting solution to be used (BIRT, Crystal or IIS reporting). – Check server placement in the secured network environment, regarding data collection. – Decide whether to use the financial modeler. Determine the licenses held or to be bought by the customer. Given a list of planed collectors and data sources, determine if the required collectors are available and supported for the proposed environment, so that a list of collectors to be used has been documented, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Check for a sample collector reading the type of source (for each data source). Check the documentation for platform dependent components (for each collector), such as the Windows® Script File (WSF) collector for Windows only collection. List the result of all checks. Given an overview of the current IT environment and the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager implementation design, check several parameters of the different platforms regarding the functions and knowledge, which we recommend for the platform to be used has been documented, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Determine the platform skill of the designate operations and administration team. Determine the database skill of the administration team. Check for mandatory collectors depending on a single platform. Check that the reporting solution to be used is supported. Determine if the use of Financial modeler is mandatory. Chapter 1. Certification overview 9
  • 24. Verify the required size of the environment and whether it enforces the separation of application parts (WebSphere, database, and reporting server). Check for scalability needed in the environment. Given that the client understands the purpose of the Account Code structure, define the account code structure so that it can be configured into the product, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Educate the client management team about the purpose and use of the Account Code structure. Review with the client management team any current business accounting structure and determine if that is how they desire to map the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager structure. Define the Account Code structure. Given that the Account Code structure has been defined, determine, for each collector feed, which identifiers should be used for creating Account Code lookup tables for each collector, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: For each collector feed, review the documented available identifiers. Determine which identifiers should be used to map resource records to the appropriate Account Code. Determine how the Account Code lookup table will be built and maintained. Given the amount of collector input, calculate the amount of data stored base and the retention period, so that an estimate of the database size can be determined, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Identify the usage for the most critical tables – Determine if resource utilization has to be collected. – Estimate the number of account codes to be collected in the billing summary. – Count the data from the billing detail, which is based on the number of rates and identifiers. – Count the lines in ident.txt that feeds directly into the identifier table. Identify the parameters multiplying the data sets. – Determine the retention period in days. – List the number of shifts for a day that needs different rate codes. – Count the collection sources providing data. – Estimate the number of distinct account codes. – Estimate the number of resources used. 10 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 25. – Estimate the number of identifiers used. – Estimate the Identifier mix number based upon an understanding of the collection process. Multiply all parameters. Define the point of archiving needed based on the capacity of the database system planned. Given the customer requirements, determine which reports will be required so that a list of all reports to be designed and published has been created, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Define the Invoice reports to be used. Define the Account reports to be used. Check if Top usage reports are needed. Check if Variance reports are required. Determine the use of Trend reports in the environment. Check for valid Resource detail reports. Define all other and custom reports to be used. 1.3.2 Installation Given IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager planning has been completed, determine if the required IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager prerequisites have been met so that the installation can be executed, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Check application server prerequisites, such as Microsoft Internet Information Server and .NET Framework. Check database and connection to IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. Determine the JDBC™ jar files for the appropriate database: – SQL database: sqljdbc.jar (From the Microsoft Web site) – Oracle database: ojdbc14.jar (From the Oracle Web site) – DB2 database for Linux®, UNIX®, and Windows: db2jcc.jar and db2jcc_license_cu.jar – DB2 database for z/OS® UDB: db2jcc.jar and db2jcc_license_cisuz.jar Chapter 1. Certification overview 11
  • 26. Check reporting prerequisites. – Microsoft Report Viewer application for Web reporting – Business Intelligence and Reporting Tools (BIRT) Report Engine and Report Designer Confirm additional requirements with the customer. Check operating system requirements. Check Web browser requirements. Check hard drive space. Check processor speed requirement. Check memory requirement. Check supported database versions. Check database server system specifications. Given that the prerequisites have been met and the implementer has the appropriate privileges, install the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Server according to the customer’s requirements, so that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been installed, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Obtain the software. – Download it from the Passport Advantage® Web site. – Load the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Installation CD. Run the Enterprise Edition installation file and follow the installation wizard. Given that the database and IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager data source have been created, initialize the database so that database has the status of being initialized, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Initialize the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database. Upgrade the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database from previous versions. Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been installed, install the Enterprise Collector Pack (ECP), so that ECP has been installed, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Obtain the software. – Download it from the Passport Advantage Web site. – Load the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager installation CD. Run the Enterprise Collector Pack (ECP) installation file and follow the installation wizard. 12 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 27. Given that ECP is installed, and new processes folder is created, check the connection path for data collection, so that the collection path set for processing is set and verified, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Navigate the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC) for Configuration page. Confirm that the correct paths in the configuration page are listed for: – Processes – Job Files – Sample Job Files – Job Log Files – Collector Log Files Given that the database has been initialized, run sample collector data so that the database can be populated with test collector data, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Run RunSamples.bat to load sample data collection for verification. Check sample data collection results. Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager installation has been performed, validate the installation so that the installation can be verified as successfully executed, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Verify the database initialization. Verify the connection to the Web reporting URL. Use the result of RunSamples.bat to verify installation. 1.3.3 Configuration Given that IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager has been installed and an account code structure has been designed with the customer, set up the account code structure using the Integrated Solution Console so that the Final Account Code hierarchy has been set, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Define account code structure. Add account code levels’ starting offset, description, and length. Modify Standard account code structure. Create secondary or alternate account code structures. Chapter 1. Certification overview 13
  • 28. Given that IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been installed and an administrator account has been created in the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC), use the ISC to add new users, so that users can log on to Web Reports, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). Define new users. Given that IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been installed and an administrator user account has been created in the Integrated Solutions Console, add users to the ISC security group, so that the user can access the ISC, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). Assign user to roles. List existing default security roles. Enable security for the Embedded WebSphere Application Server. Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been installed and an administrator account has been created in the Integrated Solutions Console, add users to groups, so that the users are allowed to view only select reports, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). Define a new user group. Add a user to the user group. Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been installed and configured, use the ISC to set up the calendar, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). Define a calendar for a particular year. Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been installed and a configured, use the ISC to add clients to the client table so that the client table has been updated, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). Remove sample clients before adding clients to the customer’s organization. Add new client organization. 14 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 29. Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been installed and configured, and the clients have been added, add the client budgets to the corresponding client, so that the client budgets have been created, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). Assign a new budget to a client. Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been installed and configured and clients have been added, add the client contacts to the client, so that the client has been updated, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). Add client that needs to be added as a contact or contacts need to be added to it. Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been installed and configured, create a new rate group using the ISC, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). Define a new rate group. Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been installed and a configured and rate groups have been added, add rate codes using the ISC, so that new rate codes are available, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). Define a new rate code. Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been installed and configured and rate groups have been created, add an alternate table so that alternate rates are available, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). Define new rate table Given that IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been installed and configured, create a proration table so that a proration table is available, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). Define a proration table for a rate code. Chapter 1. Certification overview 15
  • 30. Use prorate for collecting usage data for a rate code. Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been installed and configured, using the ISC, configure CPU normalization so that CPU Normalization has been set up, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). Use CPU normalization in Job files. Define the CPU normalization percentage. Select the rate codes to be normalized. Given that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server has been installed and configured, use the ISC to set rate shifts so that the rate shifts have been set to meet the customer’s requirements, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). Define rate shifts. 1.3.4 Administration Given the connection data, navigate to the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager menu so that the user can perform administration tasks in the ISC IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager environment, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Connect to the Integrated Solution Console using a Web browser. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). Find the appropriate menu options in the portfolio navigation bar. Given the current environment data, the administrator can perform tasks to optimize the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager environment so that the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager environment will run faster, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Determine the current database usage. Plan runstats on a regular basis. List long running reports. Determine the tables and columns used for sorting. Define indices on heavy used columns. 16 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 31. Determine the memory usage of the WebSphere Application Server. Add physical memory if it is needed. Determine the CPU load. Add virtual or logical CPUs for parallel processing. For hardware limitations, evaluate the separation of the database and application servers, but keep the network limitations in mind. Given the Feed source name, set up load tracking so that the list of loaded data can be filtered to get an overview of specific data loads for selected jobs, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). Work with Load Tracking information. Perform filtering on the Load Tracking information for searching a collection. Given the access permissions and IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager location, stop and start the application server so that all updates implemented will be activated in the files systems for further usage, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Restart the procedure for the user interface. Verify application availability. 1.3.5 Job creation Given the parameters of data sources, use the XML job file language to generate a job so that the data is incorporated into the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager process file structure and database, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Determine that sample job files that best suits the task. Copy the sample job file to the job file directory. Define or modify the integrator step for data input and processing. Run the job file validation to ensure that the syntax is correct. Before activating or adding any further steps, run the job and check the logs and the CSR file for correct content. Chapter 1. Certification overview 17
  • 32. Given input data source and manipulation instructions, create a setup where the job(s) will prepare the data, do account conversion, process billing, and finally load data so that reports are ready to be run, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Determine the sample job files that best suits the task. Copy the sample job file to the job file directory. Split the processing into more than one job for better handling. Create and modify process steps as needed. – Create integrator steps for reading data and performing data manipulations. – Set up resource conversion to recalculate values. – Define the parameters of the billing step. – Verify that the db load step is correct. – Define the cleanup step parameters to clear old files from the process directory. Verify the job file. – Ensure that the syntax is correct. – Verify the operation without database loading. – Check the actual load for errors and warnings. – Verify that the data is loaded using the LoadTracking function. Run a report to verify that data is loaded correctly. Given a raw data file or other data source and manipulation instructions, set up the integrator step to recalculate, aggregate, or manipulate the resources and filter for identifiers so that a CSR file is prepared for further processing, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Define the input section of an integrator step. Use Input, Files, or Collector directives. Add integrator stages to create, delete, or modify identifiers and do calculation on resources. – Create an aggregator for combining data for one identifier or for a time frame. – Create new resources or identifiers. – Do not use drop fields, as they are not needed. – Exclude or include data by any criteria. – Do a ResourceConversion for recalculating resource values. 18 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 33. – Sort CSR data for output. Define an output stage to create a CSR or CSR+ file. Given identifiers and the account code table, use the integrator step to add an account code field mapping to determine who is using which resources, so that an account code conversion has been executed, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Define the integrator step before billing and DBload. Use the integrator function CreateIdentifierFromTable to add an Account_Code identifier. Perform additional necessary conversions, such as an Aggregator stage. 1.3.6 Problem determination Given a validated job that does not execute successfully, review the corresponding log file to locate the error and resolve it so that the job can execute successfully, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Execute a jobfile using either a job scheduler or manually through the Integrated Solutions Console. Check the job execution status using the Integrated Solutions Console. Read output messages for that job file execution. Find steps that are unsuccessful. Find error message for the unsuccessful step. Correct job errors and rerun the job. Given a validated jobfile that completes with a warning, review the corresponding log file to locate the error and resolve it so that the job can execute successfully, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Execute the jobfile using either a job scheduler or manually through the Integrated Solutions Console. Check the job execution status using the Integrated Solutions Console. Read output messages for that job file execution. Find steps that have warning messages. Check warning message for the step. Correct job warnings and rerun the job. Determine rate code warning actions and whether to define the rate or ignore it. Chapter 1. Certification overview 19
  • 34. Given that within ISC the database connection fails, diagnose the issue so that the database connection can be reestablished, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Review the current trace and message log records. Use the database management interface to check the database’s status. Ensure that the user ID and password used by IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager to connect is correct. Given that Web reporting is implemented and a report is timing out, review report values in the ISC and determine if the network connection is sufficient so that the issue can be identified, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Set the Web reporting interface timeout value. Limit date selection for report execution. Set up batch reporting for reporting. Given IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager is operational, define the default file names produced by process engines so that the names and their purposes are understood, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Identify the default output file for the Scan program. Identify files for the Acct program, output file, and exception files. Identify files for the Bill program, identifier file, billing detail, and billing summary files. Given that the client wants to adjust the amount of information in the trace file, modify the detail level written out so that the message and trace logs provide the level of detail that the client requires, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Set the logging configuration from the Integrated Solutions Console. Set the Trace file setting. The Trace message level can be set to FINE, FINER, or FINEST. Set the Log file setting. The Log message level can be set to SEVERE, WARNING, or INFORMATION. 20 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 35. 1.3.7 Reporting Given the need to produce an invoice or analyze billing or usage data, generate an IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager report according to the customer’s requirement so that billing or usage data can be loaded into a spreadsheet for analysis or invoices can be produced, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Log in to the reporting Web application. Understand the report types in the Report list. Run spreadsheets for standard or crosstab types. Supply the desired report parameters. Given requirements to produce a report, define parameters so that the output satisfies the requirements. Given the requirement to produce a new report, define a new IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager report according to the new requirement so that a new report or spreadsheet can be generated, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Log on to the reporting Web application. Select a new report type. Define the new report arguments. Save the new report or new spreadsheet. Given the need to manage the reporting Web interface, create and assign a role and remove the user used to access the reporting Web interface, and modify the security scheme for the Web interface so that appropriate users can access the reporting Web interface with the appropriate access, with emphasis on performing the following tasks: Define user access restriction. Define new user groups without administrative access. Activate report access security. Assign a report for user groups: Chapter 1. Certification overview 21
  • 36. 1.4 Recommended study resources Courses and publications are offered to help you prepare for the certification tests. The courses are recommended, but not required, before taking a certification test. If you wish to purchase Web-based training courses or are unable to locate a Web-based course or classroom course at the time and location you desire, please feel free to contact one of our delivery management teams at: Americas: [email protected] EMEA: [email protected] AP: [email protected] Note that course offerings are continuously being added and updated. If you do not see the course(s) listed in your geography, please contact the delivery management team. 1.4.1 IBM Redbooks The following IBM Redbooks can be used as additional information sources: IBM Tivoli Usage Accounting Manager V7.1 Handbook, SG24-7404 Financial management of IT resources allows an IT department to be transformed from a cost center to a service provider. One aspect of this is usage accounting, which helps the IT department understand the usage patterns of its customers or users and allows for service charges that reflect that usage. In addition, usage data demonstrates how IT operations can be optimized to increasing efficiency. Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager provides the tools to perform data collection and accounting for IT-related usage from various sources. It even allows the custom integration of data from nonstandard format sources. It supports the whole life cycle of financial management from budgeting to usage accounting and billing, and reporting. This book will help you understand, install, configure, and use the new IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1. The book starts with an overview of Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager concepts and capabilities along with the structure of the product. The installation and verification of each component is presented in detail. Sample scenarios are executed and explained, including operating system usage collection, virtual environment collection (VMware® ESX server and IBM System p® partitioning), and Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS interface. 22 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 37. Deployment Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1, SG24-7569 This book is part of the Deployment Guide series. It provides a step-by-step guide for deploying Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1. It is intended to help an IBM or Business Partner service person plan and perform the deployment of the product. The discussion of Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager includes an explanation of its architecture and components. Some planning and sizing considerations before you implement the product are given, and some guidelines on setting up service engagement for the product are also included. The deployment discussed in the book would be appropriate for a demonstration or a small deployment system, although the information is highly relevant for larger deployments also. This book also offers some usage scenarios that can be used for demonstrating the product. Chapter 1. Certification overview 23
  • 38. 24 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 39. 2 Chapter 2. Planning This chapter discusses planning of the implementation of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1. The discussion consists of the following: 2.1, “Planning the implementation” on page 26 2.2, “Account code structure” on page 27 2.3, “Collector selection” on page 29 2.4, “Implementation platform” on page 31 2.5, “Database sizing” on page 32 2.6, “Report requirements” on page 38 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved. 25
  • 40. 2.1 Planning the implementation There are several important preparations that must be performed before implementing IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. The solution must be clearly understood by the implementation team. The solution is typically described in a design document. The design document takes its input from the client’s requirements and match them to the capability of the product. The IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager implementation design document should consist of the necessary details about how the implementation should be performed. It should contain the following design items: Customer requirements in a workshop to show the critical path. – Understand the financial system of the customer. – Define the account code structure that most closely fits the near future plans for the customer environment. – Select the key parameters needed for accounting (limit them to a suitable minimum for the pilot). A project plan for the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager setup actions to be done. – Identify the data sources, identifiers, and rates to be used. – List the default collectors to be used and new collectors to be written. – Estimate the size of the database to be expected. A definition about how to perform these available system management functions. – Determine the method of scheduling jobs. – Define the data transfer solution to be implemented. – Determine the monitoring solution to be used for the environment. Describe the network architecture of the implementation. This includes the platform selection and connectivity requirements. Explain the reporting method needed and report requirements as dictated by customer. Determine the licenses held or to be bought by the customer. We discuss some of the important aspect of this design document in more detail in the subsequent sections. 26 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 41. 2.2 Account code structure One of the most important aspects of planning is to decide on the account code structure. The account code structure determines the charging hierarchy of the target enterprise. All collected data must be mapped to the correct structure based on the defined account code structure. The account code structure must be defined early in the implementation because: It determines how to map the identifier to the account code. Account code granularity strongly influences database size calculation. Reporting and billing are all based on the account code structure. Changing the account code structure and mapping invalidates all the data that has been collected in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. The charging hierarchy must match the enterprise’s financial and business accounting practices. It may have additional detail levels than the hierarchies needed by accounting. In Table 2-1, we use the department name as the top level. There are one or more department numbers possible for each department and the hosts are grouped by an application perspective. The billing requirement may only need to distinguish the department name and number, but usage monitoring may need the application and host information if they are available. Table 2-1 Account code for a department organization Description Length Department (short name) 8 Department number 6 Application 8 Host 32 Chapter 2. Planning 27
  • 42. For a multi-customer environment, the customer name is the top level. We define two additional levels in case the customer needs separated bills or rates for his projects and splitting up of follow-up contracts. See Table 2-2. Table 2-2 Account code for a multi customer environment Description Length Customer (short name) 8 Master contract number 12 Service contract number 12 Application 8 Host 32 Tip: Changing the account code structure make processed data invalid, as it is based on different account code fields. You must plan the structure carefully before you start processing data. Account codes are mapped from identifiers. The mapping can be performed by parsing the identifier to extract the appropriate levels or using a lookup table for mapping the identifier to the account code. You must identify the appropriate mapping process for each type of collected data. Mapping for UNIX servers may be based on process name and path, while mapping for Windows client machines may be based on IP address or host name. The lookup tables have to be maintained for currency. Processes must be in place to ensure proper updating of the tables is performed. The table can be based on database tables that have to be extracted regularly or from a static text that must be maintained by an administrator. More about account code usage is discussed in 4.2, “Account code hierarchy” on page 82. 28 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 43. 2.3 Collector selection We must determine if the required collectors are available and supported for the proposed environment. Some collectors run as a Windows Script File (WSF) and must run on a processing server on Windows-based platforms. The existing collectors for IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 are: AIXAAInput: AIX® Advanced Accounting for a logically partitioned IBM System p installation that includes support for AIX 5L™ V5.3 or later, AIX V6, and the Virtual I/O (VIO) server. Base UNIX collector: The UNIX collector runs on most UNIX platforms using the built-in accounting (acct) features. CSRInput: Input with Common Source Format. This is typically an output from the Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager data collector or previous processing from Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. IBM System i: Only available for Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager on Windows, as a Windows script file. Data is collected from i/OS V5.1. TDSz: Extracting data from Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database (DRLDB). Transaction: A transaction is a mechanism to adjust data in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. This collector gets the input from a table within the Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database, and adds one time charges and monthly fixed charges to the accounts based on the input from ISC. z/VM®: This collects data from the z/VM environment, including connect time, CPU time, virtual SIOs, virtual cards read, virtual lines printed, virtual cards punched, and temporary disk space. VMware: This can pull data from either the VMware Virtual Center Server or directly from VMware ESX servers using the VMware SDK Web interface. Windows Disk Data: This program runs on the Windows server every time you want to have a snapshot of disk usage. Windows Process collector: A service that is installed and run in a Windows environment to collect data on processor usage. This collector uses Windows Script File processing. Chapter 2. Planning 29
  • 44. Universal data collector is a converter function to convert data into CSR or CSR+ format. The input can be from: DATABASE Databases providing a SQL interface. The source must be defined as a data source. DELIMITED Delimited files, such as comma separated values (CSV). FIXEDFIELD Fixed field files. Note: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1.1 supports an additional data collector for Tivoli Data Warehouse from IBM Tivoli Monitoring. Additional data collectors are available with IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Enterprise Collector Pack, which are: ApacheCommonLogFormat: Apache HTTP server common log collection for analyzing Web page hit counts. DB2: Collects DB2 database accounting in Windows, UNIX, and Linux. DBSpace: Collects the size of a Microsoft SQL or Sybase database only. This collector uses Windows Script File. Lotus® Notes®: Gathers data directly from Notes database files log.nsf, loga4.nsf, and catalog.nsf, such as NotesDatabaseSizeInput, NotesEmailInput, and NotesUsageInput. Microsoft Exchange: Based on the different logs for the Exchange server, usage data and mailbox size are collected. This collector uses Windows Script File. Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS): The W3C Extended Log from IIS can be retrieved for processing. This collector uses Windows Script File. Microsoft SQL server: Uses the trace log and direct database access to get usage data from SQL server. This collector uses Windows Script File. Oracle: Uses the event log and direct database access to get usage data from Oracle server. SAP®: SAP Transaction Profile report (ST03N) is used for collecting from SAP. ST03N is a specific transaction in SAP that provides performance and workload analysis data. Tivoli Storage Manager: Uses Tivoli Storage Manager ODBC calls (Windows only, but other versions can be requested). TotalStorage® Productivity Center (TPC): A flexible data collector to collect any data from the TPC log files. 30 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 45. WebSphere: A variety of WebSphere usage metrics can be collected and processed. Windows Event Log data collector for print: Gets usage data from a Windows print server extracted from the event log. 2.4 Implementation platform Based on the design document and the required collectors, you must choose the implementation platform. There are some differences about the platform usage and parameters. You must check for the following: Skill of existing operation personnel on: – Operating system platform. – Database platform. Reporting solution: – Windows uses Internet Information Server for Web reporting. – UNIX/Linux uses Business Intelligence and Reporting Tools (BIRT). Evaluate some platform dependent options: – Financial Modeler is only supported in Windows. – Windows Script File collector is only supported in Windows. The collectors that use WSF are: • WinProc • DBSpace • MSIIS • MSSQL • MSExchangeMbx • SystemIr52/SystemIr51 Solution sizing, that is, whether the application parts run on a single or multiple machines. You must consider application scalability for future processing. – Database size (refer to 2.5, “Database sizing” on page 32). – Processing or collection runs. The recommended minimum is 3 GHz. – Memory requirement for reporting and administration application. The minimum recommendation is 2 GB. Chapter 2. Planning 31
  • 46. 2.5 Database sizing Sizing the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database is critical for the implementation process. Adequate allocation for the database ensures the sustainability of the solution so it can perform in a satisfactory manner. The IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager manual recommends 40 GB of available hard drive space. Once the database is initialized, the base database would be more or less constant in size. Additional grouping, users, and reporting changes can happen, but the size would not be significant. The total size of an empty IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database is less than 0.5 MB. The primary contributor to the growth of a an IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database is the data loaded from the output of the billing process. The size of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database is dependent on many different parameters. The database is populated based on the database load process of the processing engine (refer to 6.1.2, “Generic processing overview” on page 112). The database load gets its input from the billing program. It loads data from the following files: BillDetail.txt: Billing detail data. This data is loaded into the CIMSDETAIL table. BillSummary.txt: Billing summary data. This data is loaded into the CIMSSUMMARY table. Ident.txt: The list of identifiers. This data is loaded into the CIMSDETAILIDENT table. Optionally, resource utilization data can be loaded into the CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION table. Additional growth can be added to the load tracking information that records each of the data sources being loaded and processed. The load tracking information is stored in the CIMSLOADTRACKING table. The size of these tables also relates directly to information in messages from the Database Load step. In Example 2-1 on page 33, we see the number of records (rows) added to the three tables as a result of processing the 65 CSR records. 32 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 47. Example 2-1 Database Load messages extract 06:37:14.852: INFORMATION Summary Load: Load Started 06:37:14.938: INFORMATION Loaded Records: 97 06:37:14.941: INFORMATION Summary Load: Load Completed Successfully 06:37:14.943: INFORMATION Detail Load: Load Started 06:37:15.524: INFORMATION Loaded Records: 65 Resources 257 06:37:15.524: INFORMATION Detail Load: Load Completed Successfully 06:37:15.528: INFORMATION Ident Load: Started 06:37:15.596: INFORMATION Loaded Records: 352 06:37:15.605: INFORMATION Ident Load: Load Completed Successfully 06:37:15.610: INFORMATION Number of Detail Records Loaded: 257 06:37:15.610: INFORMATION Number of Ident Records Loaded: 352 06:37:15.610: INFORMATION Number of Summary Records Loaded: 97 06:37:15.610: INFORMATION DBLoad Completed Successfully Note: The number of rows loaded can be reduced when the source AcctCSR.dat file is sorted by account code before doing the bill processing. This sorting can be facilitated when you are using the AcctCSR+ format. You should also consider any necessary archiving, based on the capacity of the database system planned. Let us look at the individual tables in these sections: 2.5.1, “CIMSLOADTRACKING” on page 34 2.5.2, “CIMSSUMMARY” on page 35 2.5.3, “CIMSDETAIL and CIMSDETAILIDENT” on page 36 2.5.4, “CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION” on page 37 Chapter 2. Planning 33
  • 48. 2.5.1 CIMSLOADTRACKING The load tracking table structure is shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 Load tracking table You can estimate the row size using the following assumptions: All nullable columns add 1 byte. Some of the rows that are null may not have any length. All variable columns have 2 bytes for length. Graphic data types uses 2 bytes for each character. Time stamp columns have a length of 8 bytes. Integer columns have a length of 4 bytes. The Load Tracking table contains three or four rows of data for each one of the data source collection types, depending on whether resource utilization information is collected. The size growth can be estimated from how may database load jobs would be run each day. This may be the same as the number of collection sources if each source is collected once a day. Once you have performed some collections, this load tracking can be a good indicator in further estimating the database size. The CIMSLOADTRACKING table contains the column TOTALRECSLOADED, which can indicate the growth of the tables. 34 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 49. 2.5.2 CIMSSUMMARY The CIMSSUMMARY table has the structure shown in Figure 2-2. Figure 2-2 CIMSSUMMARY table The CIMSSUMMARY table has a row for each rate and account code combination for that billing cycle and shift. This summary table can be qualified with multiple billing flags. To estimate the size of the CIMSSUMMARY table, we must consider the following items for each data collection: How many rate codes for which we are collecting How many distinct account codes would be collected for those rate codes How many shifts for which we are collecting Chapter 2. Planning 35
  • 50. All of these items are multiplied together to provide the number of rows for the CIMSSUMMARY table. 2.5.3 CIMSDETAIL and CIMSDETAILIDENT The CIMSDETAIL table is shown in Figure 2-3. Figure 2-3 CIMSDETAIL table The CIMSDETAILIDENT table is shown in Figure 2-4. Figure 2-4 CIMSDETAILIDENT table This CIMSDETAIL table contains a row for each rate code and each unique identifiers combination. The identifiers are listed separately in the CIMSDETAILIDENT table. 36 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 51. The size of the CIMSDETAIL table would be determined from: The number of rate codes collected for each collection The number of different identifier combinations for each rate code How many shift for which we are collecting The CIMSDETAILIDENT table can be calculated from each row of the CIMSDETAIL table and multiplied with the number of qualifying identifiers for the CIMSDETAIL row. 2.5.4 CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION The CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION table’s structure is shown in Figure 2-5. Figure 2-5 CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION table The CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION table data, if collected, would contain similar content to the CIMSDETAIL table data. The difference is that this would not contain billing information and no CPU normalization is performed. The estimate for the CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION table data is the same as the CIMSDETAIL table data. The CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION table data is collected from the Resource.txt file. This file is produced only when the bill’s resourceFile attribute is provided in the job file, and is loaded into the database only when the DBLoad’s loadType attribute is set to Resource in the job file. Chapter 2. Planning 37
  • 52. 2.6 Report requirements There are several predefined reports that IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager uses. You must identify the reports that will be used in the implementation. There are several categories of reports that may be needed: Invoice reports, which are actually usage invoices that can be billed to the service consumer. The format and content of the invoices must be defined and prepared in the implementation stage. IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager provides some sample invoice reports. Figure 2-6 shows a sample invoice. Figure 2-6 Invoice report Account reports, which contain usage information that specifies the customer accounts against the usage items. The account reports do not include rate conversion. A typical account report is given in a cross-table format, as shown in Figure 2-7 on page 39. 38 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 53. Figure 2-7 A sample report on daily usage data Other reports may be generated based on the needs of the IT department and consumers. Some typical reports are: – Top usage reports for highlighting the top users of a certain rate – Variance reports for showing usage anomalies from consumers and identifying usage patterns – Trend reports for finding and predicting capacity requirements – Resource detail reports for analyzing resource usage Chapter 2. Planning 39
  • 54. 40 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 55. 3 Chapter 3. Installation This chapter discusses the installation of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1. The discussion is covered in the following sections: 3.1, “Installation overview” on page 42 3.2, “Installation prerequisites” on page 43 3.3, “Application server installation” on page 54 3.4, “Database configuration” on page 59 3.5, “Enterprise Collector Pack implementation” on page 67 3.6, “Initial configuration” on page 70 3.7, “Installation verification” on page 71 3.8, “Sample collection verification” on page 75 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved. 41
  • 56. 3.1 Installation overview The description of the installation in this chapter is performed in a single server environment. The deployment is performed on machines loaded with Windows 2003 Standard Edition with Service Pack 1, as shown in Figure 3-1. tuamsrv DB2 UDB 9.1 Usage Accounting Manager 7.1 EE Embedded WebSphere Application Server 6.1 Integrated Solution Console Usage Accounting Manager 7.1 ECP Usage Accounting Manager 7.1 WPC z twin01 twin02 Windows Process Collector Windows Process Collector Figure 3-1 Installation environment The steps are: 1. Database installation and creation, as discussed in 3.4, “Database configuration” on page 59. 2. Microsoft Internet Information Server, Microsoft .NET framework, and Microsoft Report Viewer are needed for the Web reporting application, and are discussed in 3.2, “Installation prerequisites” on page 43. 3. IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Enterprise Edition server, which includes an embedded WebSphere Application Server and Integrated Solution Console application, is installed, as shown in 3.3, “Application server installation” on page 54. 4. The supported collectors are installed in a bundle called the Enterprise Collector Pack, as discussed in 3.5, “Enterprise Collector Pack implementation” on page 67. 5. Some setup of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager application using the Integrated Solution Console is needed, as discussed in 3.7, “Installation verification” on page 71. 42 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 57. 3.2 Installation prerequisites We install the server on a Windows 2003 Server system (system SRV177, in our example). Prior to installing IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager, several prerequisites are required: Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) is required for the execution of the reporting application of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. See 3.2.2, “Configuring Microsoft Internet Information Services” on page 45. A current version of the Microsoft Installer package. We install MSI30-KB884016. If you are already running Microsoft Windows 2003 Service Pack 1, you do not need this package. See 3.2.3, “Install the Microsoft Installer” on page 49. Microsoft .NET Framework Redistributable 2.0 is required for installing the Microsoft Report Viewer. See 3.2.4, “Install Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0” on page 51. Microsoft Report Viewer Redistributable 2005 is required for the standard Usage and Accounting Manager reports. See 3.2.5, “Install Microsoft SQL Server Report Viewer” on page 52. 3.2.1 Platform requirements The following are the platform hardware, operating system and middleware requirements for the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager application server. Operating system. – Windows Server® 2003 x64 or x86 – Windows Server 2008 x86 – Linux and UNIX server platforms – AIX 5L V5.3 and V6.1 – Solaris™ 9 and 10 – HP-UX 11.23 and 11.31 on the pa-RISC platform – Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) 4 and 5 for IA32 – RHEL 4 and 5 for PowerPC® – RHEL 4 and 5 (64-bit) for IBM System z® – RHEL 4 and 5 for x64 (AMD64/EM64T) – SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server (SLES) 9 and 10 for IA-32 Chapter 3. Installation 43
  • 58. – SLES 9 and 10 for PowerPC – SLES 9 (31-bit and 64-bit) for System z – SLES 10 (64-bit) for System z – SLES 9 and 10 for x64 (AMD64/EM64T) Web browser requirements. – Internet Explorer® 6 or 7 – Firefox 2 Hard drive space: 0.5 GB minimum, 40 GB recommended available hard drive space. The hard drive space requirements for the organization might vary. Processor speed: 3 GHz minimum. Memory: 2 GB minimum. Databases supported. – DB2 Universal Database™ (UDB) for Linux, UNIX, and Windows Version 8.1, 8.2, 9.1, or 9.5 – DB2 UDB for z/OS Version 8 – Microsoft SQL Server 2000 or 2005 with the latest service pack – Oracle 9 or 10 for UNIX or Windows Database server system specifications. – 80 GB minimum available hard drive space. – 3 GHz or faster processor (multi-processors are helpful) – 2 GB minimum of memory Database and connection to IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager: Determine with customer/DBA if jar file downloaded. – SQL database: sqljdbc.jar (From MS® Web site) – Oracle database: ojdbc14.jar (From Oracle Web site) – DB2 database for Linux, UNIX, Windows: db2jcc.jar and db2jcc_license_cu.jar – DB2 database for z/OS UDB: db2jcc.jar and db2jcc_license_cisuz.jar 44 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 59. 3.2.2 Configuring Microsoft Internet Information Services This section discusses setting up Microsoft Internet Information Services using the Manage Your Server application. Do these steps: 1. The program can be started by selecting All Programs → Administrative Tools → Manage Your Server. The window shown in Figure 3-2 will appear. Figure 3-2 Manage your server Chapter 3. Installation 45
  • 60. 2. Click the Add or remove a role link and the Configure Your Server Wizard will start, as shown in Figure 3-3. Figure 3-3 Configure server wizard 3. In the Configuration Options window shown in Figure 3-4 on page 47, select Custom configuration. 46 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 61. Figure 3-4 Configuration selection 4. In Figure 3-5, select the Application Server role and click Next. Figure 3-5 Server role selection Chapter 3. Installation 47
  • 62. 5. In Figure 3-6, check the Enable ASP.NET check box and click Next. Figure 3-6 Feature selection 6. The installation commences with a progress bar. Figure 3-7 shows that the installation is finished. Figure 3-7 Installation completed 48 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 63. 3.2.3 Install the Microsoft Installer Note: Our Windows 2003 SP1environment (Windows 2003 SP1 is required by DB2 V9.1) does not need the installation of Microsoft Installer. However, we also notice that the .NET Framework 2.0 requires this installation. An up to date version of the Windows Installer software needs to be available on the Report server system. Do these steps: 1. Download the Windows Installer from: http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=5fbc5470-b2 59-4733-a914-a956122e08e8&DisplayLang=en 2. We execute the program WindowsInstaller-KB884016-v2-x86.exe to run the installation of the Windows Installer. The Welcome window is displayed (Figure 3-8.) Select Next. Figure 3-8 Welcome window for the Windows Installer installation Chapter 3. Installation 49
  • 64. 3. Agree to the license shown in Figure 3-9 and select Next. Figure 3-9 License agreement for the Windows Installer 4. Selected files on your system are backed up. The Windows Installer is installed and the completion window is shown (Figure 3-10). Select Finish to end the installation. Figure 3-10 Completion of the installation for the Windows Installer software 50 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 65. 3.2.4 Install Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 The .NET Framework is required if you install Microsoft Report Viewer to view the standard IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager reports in RDL format. Do these steps: 1. Download the installation package for the Report Viewer from the following address: http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=0856eacb-43 62-4b0d-8edd-aab15c5e04f5&DisplayLang=en 2. Execute the downloaded program to start the installation and select Next in the Welcome window. Accept the license agreement and select Install, as shown in Figure 3-11. The installation progress window is displayed. Figure 3-11 Accept the .NET license agreement and start the installation Chapter 3. Installation 51
  • 66. 3. The Setup Complete message is displayed when the installation completes (Figure 3-12.) Select Finish to end the installation. Figure 3-12 Setup complete for the .NET framework software 3.2.5 Install Microsoft SQL Server Report Viewer The Microsoft Report Viewer is required for the standard IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager reports (RDL format). Do these steps: 1. Download the installation package for the Report Viewer from the following address: http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?displaylang=en&Famil yID=8a166cac-758d-45c8-b637-dd7726e61367 2. Save the downloaded file as ReportViewer.exe. 3. Execute ReportViewer.exe to install the Report Viewer. The Welcome window is displayed (Figure 3-13 on page 53). Select Next. 52 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 67. Figure 3-13 Welcome window for the Report Viewer installation 4. Accept the license agreement and select Install, as shown in Figure 3-14. Figure 3-14 License agreement for the Report Viewer and installing the software Chapter 3. Installation 53
  • 68. 5. Once successfully installed, the Setup Complete window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-15. Select Finish to end the installation. Figure 3-15 Successful installation of the Report Viewer 3.3 Application server installation Install the reporting server using the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager enterprise edition Windows installation package. This installation package contains the reporting server as well as the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Application server software, the ISC, embedded WebSphere Application Server, and the DB2 Universal Database V9.1 runtime client. IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Enterprise Edition can be downloaded from the Passport Advantage Web site. Make sure that you have the Microsoft Internet Information Server installed and active. All the following files must exists in the same directory: EmbeddedExpress_wintel_ia32.zip ISCAE71_4_EWASv61.zip setup-tuam-ee-7-1-0-wintel_ia32.exe setup-tuam-wpc-7-1-0-windows_32_64.exe v9fp2_ALL_LANG_setup_32.exe 54 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 69. Do the following installation steps: 1. Execute setup-tuam-ee-7-1-0-wintel_ia32.exe to install the Report server. Select Next at the Welcome window. Accept the license agreement and select Next, as shown in Figure 3-16. Figure 3-16 License agreement for IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Chapter 3. Installation 55
  • 70. 2. We install the application server into the C:IBMtuam directory, as shown in Figure 3-17; the default directory is C:Program Filesibmtuam. Select Next. Figure 3-17 Define the installation directory for the Report server software 3. Check the Windows Web Reporting option, as shown in Figure 3-18. Select Next. Figure 3-18 Select the windows Web Reporting option 56 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 71. 4. We choose the virtual directory option, as shown in figure Figure 3-19, and select Next. Figure 3-19 Select a new virtual directory for Web reports 5. Select Install in the summary information window. The installation progress indicator is displayed. Chapter 3. Installation 57
  • 72. 6. A task is automatically initiated to unpack the installed files, as shown in Figure 3-20. Figure 3-20 Unpacking of the application server software on the Report server 7. The window shown in Figure 3-21 shows successful completion of the installation and the summary information. Select Finish to end the installation. Figure 3-21 Successful installation of the Report server software 58 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 73. 3.4 Database configuration There are several initial configurations that you need to do before you can use IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. These can be done from the Integrated Solution Console. Figure 3-22 shows the console welcome window. Figure 3-22 Welcome page This section explains the following: 3.4.1, “Database creation” on page 59 3.4.2, “Defining JDBC driver” on page 60 3.4.3, “Defining data sources” on page 63 3.4.4, “Initializing database” on page 66 3.4.1 Database creation The database (in Windows) must be defined as UTF-8. The definition of the default page size of 16 K allows us to have an overall 16 K page size. For a production environment, we recommend using the default 4 K page size and creating an additional definition of a buffer and table spaces for larger page sizes, such as 16 K. Chapter 3. Installation 59
  • 74. Figure 3-23 shows the creation of the database. C:>DB2 CREATE DB ITUAMDB CODESET UTF-8 PAGESIZE 16 K DB20000I The CREATE DATABASE command completed successfully. Figure 3-23 Creating the database and bufferpools 3.4.2 Defining JDBC driver The configuration of the JDBC driver for IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager depends on the database software that has been installed. The DB2 Universal Database that we use comes with the JDBC drivers. We use the db2jcc.jar and db2jcc_license_cu.jar files for the JDBC driver. The following steps configure IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager to use the JDBC driver: 1. From the ISC menu, select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Configuration. See Figure 3-24. Figure 3-24 Configuring the JDBC driver 60 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 75. 2. In the Driver tab, click New to define the driver. Find the driver file in the tree shown in Figure 3-25. Click OK when you are done. Figure 3-25 Finding the JDBC driver Chapter 3. Installation 61
  • 76. 3. The JDBC jar files are shown in Figure 3-26. Click OK when you are done. Figure 3-26 JDBC driver 4. Figure 3-27 on page 63 shows the final JDBC driver configuration in our system. 62 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 77. Figure 3-27 Final JDBC driver configuration 5. After updating the JDBC driver, you should restart the Integrated Solution Console. Use the following commands: C:IBMtuamewasbinstopServer.bat server1 C:IBMtuamewasbinstartServer.bat server1 3.4.3 Defining data sources Once you have a definition of the JDBC drivers, we can define the data sources. Using the ISC, you add the data source. We add the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database as a Server data source as follows: 1. From the ISC menu, select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Data Sources. Chapter 3. Installation 63
  • 78. 2. In the data source window, right-click the default data source and select Edit DataSource. See Figure 3-28. Figure 3-28 Editing the default data source 3. Figure 3-29 on page 65 shows the changes that we did for the default data source. 64 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 79. Figure 3-29 Default data source 4. Figure 3-30 shows that the changes are complete. Figure 3-30 Default data source changes Chapter 3. Installation 65
  • 80. 3.4.4 Initializing database Once the data source is defined, you must initialize the database. Initializing the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database creates and populates database tables and other database objects. Initializing the database is invoked from the ISC and the initialization is performed against the databases that are identified as the default administration data source. Do these steps: 1. To initialize the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database using the ISC menu, select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Database → Initialize Database, as shown in Figure 3-31. Figure 3-31 Initialize database 2. Click the Initialize Database button. Confirm the action by clicking Yes, as shown in Figure 3-32. Figure 3-32 Confirmation window 66 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 81. 3. Figure 3-33 on page 67 shows that the initialization of the database is complete. Figure 3-33 Initialize the database 3.5 Enterprise Collector Pack implementation The Enterprise Collector Pack (ECP) is a separate licensed component from IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager that must be installed for some of the collectors to run. You can get the Enterprise Collector Pack from the Passport Advantage Web site. The Enterprise Collector Pack is a separate installable component that provides all available collection for usage data that is supported for the platform. The Enterprise Collector Pack must be installed on the machine with the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Enterprise Edition. The installation is performed by setup-tuam-ecp-7-1-0-wintel_ia32.exe. Chapter 3. Installation 67
  • 82. Do these steps: 1. The welcome window is shown in Figure 3-34. Click Next. Figure 3-34 Welcome window 2. The license agreement is shown in Figure 3-35. Accept the agreement and click Next. Figure 3-35 License agreement 68 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 83. 3. The Enterprise Collector Pack is always installed in the directory in which the enterprise edition is installed. Figure 3-36 shows the summary window for the installation. Click Install. Figure 3-36 Summary window 4. When the installation completes, Figure 3-37 shows the completion window. Figure 3-37 Completion window Chapter 3. Installation 69
  • 84. 3.6 Initial configuration The processing directories define the path to find and store files for processing of usage and accounting data. Do these steps: 1. Configure the path using the ISC options, that is, select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Configuration → Processing. Update the path according to your installation. Figure 3-38 shows our path definitions. Figure 3-38 Configuring the paths used during processing 70 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 85. Note: The original processing path from the sample directory is used by the runSamples program to generate sample data. 2. On the server, create the directories according to the path definitions that you have just configured. We do this from the command line, as shown in Figure 3-39. Note that the default directories for the Job File Path, Sample Job File Path, Job Log Files Path, and Collector Log Files Path are already created when the Application server is installed. # cd /opt/ibm/tuam # mkdir processes Figure 3-39 Create the processes directory 3.7 Installation verification You can verify the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database initialization from the ISC console. The following sections discuss this action: 3.7.1, “Verify the tables created during initialization” on page 72 3.7.2, “Verify the contents of the CIMSRate table” on page 73 Chapter 3. Installation 71
  • 86. 3.7.1 Verify the tables created during initialization Select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Database → Table Manager. Figure 3-40 shows the table list of the default administration database. There should be 42 tables in the list. Figure 3-40 Table list 72 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 87. 3.7.2 Verify the contents of the CIMSRate table To verify the contents of the CIMSRate table, select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Database → Table Viewer. Expand the Database Tables tree and select the CIMSRate table from the Table Viewer main window. Select the View Table button to see the contents of the CIMSRate table selected in Figure 3-41. Figure 3-41 View the contents of the CIMSRate table Chapter 3. Installation 73
  • 88. 3.7.3 Verify the application status in IIS On the Report server, open the Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager by selecting Start → All Programs → Administrative Tools → Internet Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager. Expand the trees to display the application pools and the Web sites, as shown in Figure 3-42. Confirm the existence of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager entries. Figure 3-42 Verify the installation of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Web components 3.7.4 Connect to the reporting Web application Open a browser, and point it at the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Web application URL. In our case, this is: http://srv177/tuam/ The browser window displays the initial Web reporting option window, as shown in Figure 3-43 on page 75. 74 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 89. Figure 3-43 Web reporting interface 3.8 Sample collection verification Before doing any further configurations in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager, we run the provided samples: /opt/ibm/tuam/bin/RunSamples.sh | tee RunSamples.log We can ignore the warning messages, such as the one shown in Figure 3-44, as SMTP is not configured in our environment. WARNING: AUCCM5019E The process failed when sending e-mail through [email protected] from to [email protected]. Review the trace log to get detailed information. Figure 3-44 Ignoring the warning from RunSamples.sh Chapter 3. Installation 75
  • 90. To check the results, select Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance → Job Runner → Log Files, as shown in Figure 3-45. Figure 3-45 Checking the Log Files viewer after RunSamples.sh has finished 76 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 91. In our example, the Notes job failed with a db2 error message during loading: AUCPE0202E The DBLoad process completed unsuccessfully with the following exception: com.ibm.db2.jcc.c.lh: [ibm][db2][jcc][102][10040] Non-atomic batch failure. The batch was submitted, but at least one exception occurred on an individual member of the batch. The other errors are caused by not having the Enterprise Collector Package (ecp) installed: AUCIN0365E The following collector is not authorized to run in the Usage and Accounting Manager Enterprise Edition: MS Exchange 2007 AUCIN0365E The following collector is not authorized to run in the Usage and Accounting Manager Enterprise Edition: Apache To do a final cleanup of the database, run an initialization, as described in 3.4.4, “Initializing database” on page 66. Chapter 3. Installation 77
  • 92. Alternatively, you can unload the data by selecting Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance → Load Tracking, as shown in Figure 3-46. Uncheck the End Date filter check box and mark all of the entries by using the check box button. Figure 3-46 Unloading the RunSamples.sh data from the database Press Delete Load and confirm the security question about deleting the data. 78 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 93. 4 Chapter 4. Configuration This chapter discusses the configuration of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 installation. The discussion is covered in the following sections: 4.1, “The Common Source Resource format” on page 80 4.2, “Account code hierarchy” on page 82 4.3, “User administration” on page 84 4.4, “Clients and scheduling” on page 88 4.5, “Working with rates” on page 92 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved. 79
  • 94. 4.1 The Common Source Resource format IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager uses two file formats called Common Source Resource (CSR) and Common Source Resource plus (CSR+). The CSR+ is enhanced by a static header, including the account code for sorting purposes. CSR+ and CSR files are comma separated files, in which each record has these three sections: Header The header of the record contains the following: CSR Plus Header CSR+ records only start with: “CSR+ Constant headerstartdate Usage start date headerenddate Usage end date headeraccountcodelength Length of the Account code (three digits) headeraccountcode Account Code “ Constant headerrectype Record type or source headerstartdate Usage start date headerenddate Usage end date headerstarttime Usage start time headerendtime Usage end time headershiftcode Shift code The header information is used to identify the applicability of the record to a certain billing period and type. Tip: All header% variables can be used with the Integrator identifier functions. A sample header segment for CSR is: UNIXSPCK,20071016,20071016,00:00:00,23:59:59,1 A sample header for CSR+ starts with: “CSR+2007101620071016009AIX 0Test“,UNIXSPCK,20071016,.. Identifiers segment The identifiers segment lists the resource identifier. These identifiers are used to distinguish one resource from the other before mapping them to an account code. The account code itself is considered an identifier. The structure of this segment is: number of identifiers, identifier name, identifier value, ... 80 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 95. An example identifier segment with three identifiers is: 3,SYSTEM_ID,"lpar04",Account_Code,"AIX 1TEST lpar04", USERNAME,"root" Resources segment The resources segment lists the resource metrics. These metrics are used to meter the usage information for the resource. If the resource metric value is zero, the resource metric will not be written to the output CSR file. The resource metric is structured as follows: # of resources, resource metric name, resource metric value ... An example resources segment with three metrics is: 3,LLG102,17.471,LLG107,6.914,LLG108,3 Example 4-1 shows the data from two AIX LPARs on two different systems. Example 4-1 CSR file for AIX Advanced Accounting data AATRID10,20071030,20071030,01:10:03,01:10:03,1,2,SYSTEM_ID,"02101F170", Account_Code,"AIX 1TEST lpar04",1,AAID1002,0.016 AATRID10,20071030,20071030,01:15:03,01:15:03,1,2,SYSTEM_ID,"02101F170", Account_Code,"AIX 1TEST lpar04",1,AAID1002,0.004 AATRID4,20071030,20071030,02:30:07,02:30:07,1,2,SYSTEM_ID,"02101F25F",A ccount_Code,"AIX 0SAP ohm01",2,AAID0402,120,AAID0407,2048 In Example 4-2, we find the data from two VMware ESX servers (SYSTEM_ID) and three VMware guests (Instance) that was collected using a single VirtualCenter Server (Feed). Example 4-2 CSR file for VMWare processing VMWARE,20071017,20071017,00:00:00,23:59:59,1,5,HostName,"host-19",Insta nce,"vm-33",Feed,"ITSC_VC",Account_Code,"WIN 1ESX",SYSTEM_ID,"srv079.it sc.austin.ibm.com",1,VMCPUUSE,10756036 VMWARE,20071017,20071017,00:00:00,23:59:59,1,5,HostName,"host-19",Insta nce,"vm-41",Feed,"ITSC_VC",Account_Code,"WIN 4ESX",SYSTEM_ID,"srv079.it sc.austin.ibm.com",1,VMCPUUSE,10688008 VMWARE,20071017,20071017,00:00:00,23:59:59,1,5,HostName,"host-8",Instan ce,"vm-31",Feed,"ITSC_VC",Account_Code,"WIN 0ESX",SYSTEM_ID,"srv106.its c.austin.ibm.com",1,VMCPUUSE,637429 Chapter 4. Configuration 81
  • 96. The IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager defines some reserved identifiers that are used for special processing. Those identifiers are: Account_Code Will be matched with the Account Code Structure and used for Rate Table selection and Reporting Aggregation. SYSTEM_ID Used for reading the factor from the Normalization Table during CPU normalization. WORK_ID Optionally used for CPU normalization on a z/OS data collector specifying a subsystem like TSO, JES2, or any other application (also not z/OS) if needed. Feed Identifies and defines a sub folder within the process folder for data transfer. 4.2 Account code hierarchy The account code is the primary identifier that signifies who should get billed for the specified system usage. The account code structure has to be defined early on before you perform any data collection and processing. All the data items would be labelled by the account code, so it would be very hard to change the structure. This section explains the usage of the account code within IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager and should help you define the account code structure according to your needs. The account code is a string with a fixed width field that defines the hierarchy of the accounting breakdown. The fields would be used to split the account string used for charging different organizational entities. Figure 4-1 on page 83 shows a sample account code and its relation to the charging rate. 82 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 97. Account code Client Financial information Application Host 8 char 12 char 8 char 32 char CSR record VMWARE,20071025,20071025,00:00:00,23:59:59,1, 3,Feed,VM1,Account_Code,”ABCDEFG000012340000FINUSAGEsrv106.itsc.austin.ibm.com“,SYSTEM_ID,srv106, 2,VMCPUSY,200,VMDSKRD,345 Rate Rate Group Rate Table VMCPUSY VMware Rate VMDSKRD Rate Rate Group WINCPUUS Windows Rate WINDSKWR Rate WINMEMHI Figure 4-1 Sample account code with four parts and the rate code relationship The first part of the account code is the Client, representing the top level of your organization. The other parts are hierarchical information for aggregating the data during reporting. All parts of the account code is used to search the Clients table to get a rate table. The lookup is performed based on each level of the account code hierarchy level; if no match is found, it will use the STANDARD rate table. We can set up a specific Rate Table for any account if necessary. The Rate in the specific rate table is matched to the resource name in the resources segment of CSR file to get the appropriate rate information. Rates are also organized in rate groups. The rate group allows you to report summary usage based on rate groups. Each rate has the definitions for the format, type, conversion factor, and money value for all shifts. Consideration: When you define a new rate group using the ISC Rate menu, the group name is limited to eight characters. Using the ISC Rate Group menu, you can rename the group later or create longer names, as the examples shipped with IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager show. If a rate has the type CPU, the normalization will be done for this value during billing based on the identifiers SYSTEM_ID or WORK_ID. Chapter 4. Configuration 83
  • 98. The default account code structure looks like Figure 4-2. This can be maintained using the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC) menu by selecting Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Account Code Structure. Figure 4-2 Default IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager account code structure 4.3 User administration The user administration topic for IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager is divided into the following sections: 4.3.1, “User creation” on page 85 4.3.2, “User role definition” on page 86 4.3.3, “User and group mapping” on page 86 84 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 99. 4.3.1 User creation User administration actions are performed right from the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). The following procedure adds new users for Web reporting: 1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). 2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Users. 3. On the User List Maintenance page, click New. 4. On the User Maintenance page, complete the following: User ID Type an ID for the user. Full Name Type the user’s full name. E-mail Address Type the user’s e-mail to enable the user to receive reports through the automatic report distribution feature. If this feature is not required or if users should not receive distributed reports, leave this box blank. Group Select the group that the user should be added to from the drop-down list or accept the default ADMIN group. Configuration Options Maintenance Click to add user configuration options that can be used for custom reports and Web pages. Domain Name and Domain User ID Type the user’s Windows domain name and user ID. Usage and Accounting Manager Web Reporting and other Usage and Accounting Manager Web-based applications provide an automatic logon feature. To enable a user to use this feature, the user’s Windows domain name and user ID are required. In addition, Enable Intranet Auto Login must be enabled on the Configuration—Reporting page and IIS security for the Usage and Accounting Manager Web Reporting Web site and any other Usage and Accounting Manager sites must be set to Integrated Windows authentication. Password If the automatic logon feature for Usage and Accounting Manager Web applications is not being used, use this box to type a password for the user or to change an existing password. The password is alphanumeric and case-sensitive and can be a maximum of 16 characters. 5. Click OK to save the new user. Chapter 4. Configuration 85
  • 100. 4.3.2 User role definition A user role can be used to arrange user access for reports. The users with access to the same role have access to the same set of reports. This section explains user role creation from the Integrated Solutions Console. Do these steps: 1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). 2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Users and Groups → Administrative User Roles. 3. On the Administrative User Roles page, click Add. 4. On the Administrative User Roles page, type in a User ID defined to the local operating system and then select the Usage and Accounting Manager security group or groups that the user should be assigned to: tuammaint Clients, Rates, Rate Groups, Reports, Report Groups, Report Distribution, and all sub pages tuamchargebackadmin All pages with the exception of Initialize Database, Database Upgrade, Objects Manager, Database Manager, Table Manager, Table Viewer, and all sub pages tuamadmin All pages tuamtransaction Miscellaneous, Recurring, or Credit Transaction List Maintenance and all sub pages 5. Click Next to enable the security. 4.3.3 User and group mapping User group is another way of grouping users with the same role so that authority is given to the group, not individual users. After you define the group and the users, you can associate the user with the new group that you define. This section explain the procedure: 1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). 2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Users Groups. 3. On the User Group List Maintenance page, click the View pop menu icon to the right of User Group and click New User Group. 86 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 101. 4. On the User Group Maintenance page, complete the following: Group ID Type an ID for the user group. Description Type a description of the group. The description is shown on the User Group List Maintenance page. Account Code Structures Selected and Available You can add and remove structures from the Selected and Available boxes. All structures that are displayed in the Selected box are accessible to users in the group from the Usage and Accounting Manager Web site. This feature enables users to dynamically selected the account code structure that they want to use to generate reports. If there are multiple account code structures in the Selected box, set one of the structures as the default structure by clicking the structure and then clicking Make Default. Group Select the group for which the user should be added to from the drop-down list or accept the default ADMIN group. Configuration Options Maintenance Click to add user configuration options that can be used for custom reports and Web pages. Domain Name and Domain User ID Type the user’s Windows domain name and user ID. Usage and Accounting Manager Web Reporting and other Usage and Accounting Manager Web-based applications provide an automatic logon feature. To enable a user to use this feature, the user’s Windows domain name and user ID are required. In addition, Enable Intranet Auto Login must be enabled on the Configuration—Reporting page and IIS security for the Usage and Accounting Manager Web Reporting Web site and any other Usage and Accounting Manager sites must be set to Integrated Windows authentication. Allow Financial Modeler access Select this check box to allow users in this group to access Usage and Accounting Manager Financial Modeler. Chapter 4. Configuration 87
  • 102. Allow administrative access Select this check box to give the users in this group administrative configuration options in Usage and Accounting Manager Web Reporting. Configuration Options Maintenance Click to add user group configuration options that can be used for custom reports and Web pages. 4.4 Clients and scheduling This section discusses additional management resources that exists in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. The resources are discussed in these sections: 4.4.1, “Calendar” on page 88 4.4.2, “Client” on page 89 4.4.3, “Client budget” on page 90 4.4.4, “Client contact” on page 91 Rate related information is discussed in 4.5, “Working with rates” on page 92. 4.4.1 Calendar Calendar is a mechanism in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager for defining billing periods. There is a maximum of 52 periods to be defined, correspond to a weekly billing cycle. To work with Calendar, perform the following tasks: 1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). 2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Calendar. 3. On the Calendar page, select the year from the Year drop-down list and complete the following: Year Select the appropriate year. New Year Click to add a new year to the calendar. Delete Year Click to delete the currently shown year. Period Shows 12 periods for the year, or 13 periods if Use 13 Periods is enabled on the Configuration—Processing page. 88 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 103. Beginning Date Type a beginning date for the period, use the View Calendar icon to select a beginning date, or accept the default date. Ending Date Type an ending date for the period, use the View Calendar icon to select a ending date, or accept the default date. Close Date Shows the close date for the period if a day-of-month close date has been set on the Configuration—Processing page. The close date is displayed for the period in which it was set, the previous period, and future periods. If a specific date close date or no close date has been set, the Close Date is not shown. Set From Period 1 Click to have all periods proceed sequentially from the first period. 4. Click Apply to save the settings. 4.4.2 Client Clients are organizational units in the billing part of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager that can be represented by an account code. These clients are stored in the client table. To work with the client table, perform the following tasks: 1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). 2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance → Clients. 3. Usage and Accounting Manager includes sample clients. Remove these sample clients before adding clients for the customer’s organization. 4. On the Client List Maintenance page, click New. 5. On the Client Maintenance page, complete the following: Account Code Type the account code to assign to the client. Account Name Type the name of the client as it should be shown in invoices and other reports. Alternate Account Code Type an alternate account code if the client account will be used for reporting systems that have different standard account codes, such as General Ledger systems and other reporting formats. Chapter 4. Configuration 89
  • 104. Rate table Select a rate table that is used to calculate client charges. The STANDARD table is used by default. Note: To use a rate table other than STANDARD for a client, the CLIENT SEARCH ON control statement in the BillCntl.txt file must be enabled in each process definition. Invoice Contact - Shows the contact for the client (if a contact has been specified). If there are multiple contacts for the client, select the appropriate contact from the drop-down list. Action Codes The use of these options is user-specified. These codes are available for custom reports and can be used for selecting data. 4.4.3 Client budget Client budget for individual resources can be specified to compare budget against an actual usage report. This report allows easy comparison of any financial line item against the budgeted usage. The client budget definition is performed using the following tasks: 1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). 2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance → Clients. 3. On the Client List Maintenance page, click the View pop-up menu icon to the right of the client to assign the budget to and then click Budgets. 4. On the Budget Maintenance page, complete the following: Year Select the appropriate year if it is not shown. You can add or delete year information. Overall Account Budget Click to set the overall budget for the client account. To set budgets for individual resources, click the View pop-up menu icon to select the rate code or codes for the resources required. The rate codes are displayed under Overall Account Budget. Click the individual rate codes to set the budget for the resource. To remove the resource budget, click the View pop-up menu icon to the right of the rate code, and then click Remove Resource Budget. Total Budget Amount Type the total monetary amount to be budgeted for the consumed resources. 90 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 105. Divide Total Click to divide the value in the Total Budget Amount or Total Budget Units box by the number of periods and automatically populate the Period 1 through Period 12 boxes with the result. Note that if the amounts are changed in either the Total Budget Amount or Total Budget Units box, this step must be performed again. Sum Periods Click to add the values that are displayed in the Period 1 through Period 12 boxes and automatically enter the sum in the Total Budget Amount or Total Budget Units box. Note that if the amount is changed for a period or periods, this step must be performed again. Periods Type in a budget amount for one or more periods to create a value in the Total Budget Amount or Total Budget Units box using the Sum Periods button. If you use the Divide Total box to calculate the period amounts, leave these boxes blank. 4.4.4 Client contact Client contacts are client descriptions, such as addresses, phone numbers, and contact persons. A client contact can be managed from the Integrated Solution Console by doing the following steps: 1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). 2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance → Clients. 3. On the Client List Maintenance page, select the check box for the client that needs to be added as a contact or contacts to and then click Contacts. 4. On the Client Contact List Maintenance page, click New. 5. On the Client Contact Maintenance page, complete the following tabs: Address The name, address, and e-mail address for the contact. Phone Phone numbers, such as voice, fax, and pager for the contact. Other Department, office, any comments, and the Web site URL for the contact. 6. Click OK to save the contact information and return to the Client List Maintenance page where the new client is shown. Chapter 4. Configuration 91
  • 106. 4.5 Working with rates Rates are managed using the procedures discussed in this section. We discuss this topic in the following sections: 4.5.1, “Rate group” on page 92 4.5.2, “Rate codes” on page 92 4.5.3, “Alternate rates” on page 94 4.5.4, “Proration table” on page 95 4.5.5, “CPU normalization” on page 96 4.5.6, “Rate shift” on page 97 4.5.1 Rate group Rate group is a way to apply a different set of rates for different clients. Each client is mapped to a rate group. The rate group definition is as follows: 1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). 2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance → Rate Groups. 3. On the Rate Group List Maintenance page, click the View pop-up menu icon to the right of Rate Groups and then click New Rate Group. 4. On the Rate Group Maintenance page, complete the following: Name Type the name to assign to the rate group. Description Type a description of the rate group. This is the value that is shown on the Rate Group List Maintenance page and the value that appears for the rate group in the standard reports that are provided with Usage and Accounting Manager. 4.5.2 Rate codes Rate codes can be managed by doing the following steps: 1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). 2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance → Rates. 3. On the Rate List Maintenance page, click New and input the following information: – Rate Code: Type a code to represent the rate. You have a maximum of eight characters. 92 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 107. – Description: Type a meaningful description of the rate code. The description is displayed on reports, graphs, and spreadsheets. It is recommended that units of measurement are included (GB, MB, hours, minutes, and so on) as applicable. – Rate Value: Type the amount to be charged for the consumption of the resource represented by this rate code. The value is multiplied by the resource amount contained in the matching CSR or CSR+ file. – Rate Index; Shows the order in which the rate code is displayed in reports. The order can be changed; however, an index number that is already in use cannot be typed. – Rate Table; Select the rate table to add the rate code to from the drop-down list. – Rate Group: Select the rate group for the rate code from the drop-down list or click New Rate Group to create a new rate group. All rate codes must be assigned to a rate group; if none is specified, it belongs to the All Unassigned rate group. – New Rate Group: Click to open the New Rate Group page and create a new rate group. – Use 4 decimals for rate: This option determines the number of decimal digits that appear in the rate value in reports. If this check box is selected, the rate value includes four decimal digits. If this check box is not selected, the rate value includes eight decimal digits. – Resource Conversion: Adjust the total resource units value in reports using the following conversion factors: Default No conversion is performed. Divide By or Multiply By The total resource units are divided or multiplied by a set conversion factor (for example, Divide By 1000, Multiply By 60, and so on). Multiply By Conversion Factor The total resource units are multiplied by the factor in the Conversion Factor box. – Rate is per thousand: Select this check box to change the rate in reports from per resource unit to per thousand units. – Do not adjust for zero cost: Select this check box if the associated rate code should not be included in zero cost calculations. Chapter 4. Configuration 93
  • 108. – Conversion Factor: This box is available only when Multiply By Conversion Factor is selected in the Resource Conversion box. Type a number by which to multiply the total resource units for the rate code. This factor can be up to 16 digits, including a decimal. – Flat fee money charges: Select this check box if the resource units for the rate code are considered a monetary amount rather than units of utilization. In this situation, the resource units and the charges are the same in reports. – Resource Decimals: Select the number of decimal digits that appear in the resource units value in reports, for example, 0=99, 2=99.99, 4=99.9999. The default is two decimal digits. – CPU value: Select this check box to normalize CPU usage for this rate. – Report Flag 1 and 2: The use of these boxes is user-specified. These boxes allow you to type a one-character value that can be used in custom reports. – Currency Symbol: The use of this box is user-specified. This box allows you to type a currency symbol that can be used in custom reports. – Detail Description: The use of this box is user-specified. This box allows you to type a description of the rate code that can be used in custom reports. – Comments: Type any comments regarding the rate code. – Add Rate Shifts: Click to add rate shifts for the rate code. This button shows only when adding a new rate code. Rate shifts allow you to set different rates based on the time. – Edit Rate Shifts: Click to edit rate shifts for the rate code. This button shows only when you are editing an existing rate code. – Delete Rate Shifts: Click to delete rate shifts for the rate code. This button shows only when rate shifts have been created. – Shift: Shows shift numbers 2 through 9. The rate code has one shift by default. – Rate Value: Type the monetary rate value for the shift. – Description: Type a description of the rate shift. 4.5.3 Alternate rates Rates are grouped in rate tables. IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager provides a standard rate table that is typically used for billing processing. Alternate rate tables can be defined to provide different rate schemes for other clients. 94 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 109. To define a new rate table, do these steps: 1. Log on to the Integrated Solutions Console (ISC). 2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance → Rates. 3. On the Rate List Maintenance page, click New Table or Duplicate Table. 4. On the New Rate Table or Duplicate Rate Table page, type the name to assign to the rate table. 4.5.4 Proration table If certain usage cannot be measured from the input data, rates can be calculated by assigning parts of the overall usage by percentage to different account codes. This process is called prorating the usage. The translation of the usage is performed using a proration table. The proration table is an ASCII text file that defines the identifier values and rate codes used in the proration process. The proration table must contain records with the following comma-delimited fields: input identifier value, output identifier value, percentage, and rate code. Copy the prorate.txt from the sampleprocessesProrate sample directory. Modify the prorate.txt table to include the information for each identifier or account code for which proration needs to be performed. Change these values: The input identifier value to prorate from. The identifier value is matched against the following information in the input file: An identifier name that has been defined in the job file. The values for that identifier name. Assume that you have an application that controls print in a centralized environment and that you want to split all resources used by account code AAABB among three different accounts: A1, A2, and A3. A1 on average uses about 50 percent of the resources assigned to the AAABB account, A2 uses about 30 percent, and A3 uses about 20 percent. To prorate the costs associated with this application among the three accounts, create the table shown in Example 4-3. Example 4-3 Proration table sample AAABB,A1,50,All AAABB,A2,30,All AAABB,A3,20,All Chapter 4. Configuration 95
  • 110. You can also split individual resources among multiple accounts. Using the preceding example, assume that the only resources from account AAABB that you want to prorate are represented by the rate codes Z001 and Z002, as shown in Example 4-4. Example 4-4 Proration with specific rate codes AAABB,A1,50,Z001 AAABB,A2,30,Z001 AAABB,A3,20,Z001 AAABB,A1,50,Z002 AAABB,A2,30,Z002 AAABB,A3,20,Z002 In this example, all resources other than Z001 and Z002 would still be charged to the AAABB account. If you want to charge account AAABB for a portion of the resources used, for example, you want to charge account AAABB 60 percent for all resources and account AACCC 40 percent, create the table shown in Example 4-5. Example 4-5 Proration with percentage point AAABB,AAABB,60,All AAABB,AAACC,40,All 4.5.5 CPU normalization Another modification of the rate can be applied to CPU values. Different machines can have relatively different CPU speeds. The CPU usage must be normalized so that we can charge each usage in a comparable fashion. This CPU normalization is performed by doing the following steps: 1. Include the NORMALIZE CPU VALUES control statement in one of the following locations: a. The job file used to collect and process the data. Use the Bill program controlCard attribute (that is, <Parameter controlCard="NORMALIZE CPU VALUES" />). b. The control file for the Bill program. The control file must be defined in the job file using the Bill program controlFile attribute. For example, controlFile=”MyBillCntl.txt”. The default file name is called BillCntl.txt. 96 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 111. c. For each rate code for which you perform normalization, open the Integrated Solutions Console Rate Maintenance page and select the CPU value check box. 2. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → CPU Normalization. 3. On the CPU Normalization List Maintenance page, click New. 4. On the CPU Normalization Maintenance page, complete the following: System ID Type the name of the system. For z/OS, this is the four-character System Model ID. For UNIX and Windows, it is the computer name. Note that the input file must contain an identifier named System_ID to identify the system name. Application or subsystem Type the application or subsystem name. This is any other system value that can narrow the normalization (for example, the CICS® region name, the DB2 plan name, or the Oracle instance). Note that the input file must contain an identifier named Work_ID to identify the application or subsystem name. Normalization factor Type the normalization factor. For example, an organization has two z/OS systems, AL90 and AL95. System AL95 is 20 percent faster than AL90. If using AL95 as the base system, use a factor of .80 to normalize AL90 to reflect the speed of AL95. 4.5.6 Rate shift Rates can be provided on different shifts. A rate shift can be defined as follows: 1. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance → Rates. 2. On the Rate List Maintenance page, click the View pop-up menu icon to the right of the rate code to assign the rate shifts to and then click Edit Rate Shifts. On the Rate Shift Maintenance page, complete the following: Rate Value Type the monetary rate value for the shift. Description Type a description of the rate shift. Shift numbers 2 through 9 are shown. The rate code has one shift by default. Chapter 4. Configuration 97
  • 112. 98 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 113. 5 Chapter 5. Administration This chapter discusses administering IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1. The discussion is covered in the following sections: 5.1, “Integrated Solution Console” on page 100 5.2, “Load tracking” on page 102 5.3, “Tuning” on page 103 5.4, “Operating and updating” on page 105 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved. 99
  • 114. 5.1 Integrated Solution Console The Integrated Solution Console is the primary administration interface for IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. You access the Web console using the address http://hostname:11052/ibm/console/ using a Web browser. After logging in, the initial window shown in Figure 5-1 appears. We verify that the product information matches the version that we have installed. Figure 5-1 Verifying the installation of the application server The tasks or navigation menu is on the left side of the window. Figure 5-2 on page 101 shows the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager related menu items. 100 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 115. Figure 5-2 Usage and Accounting Manager tasks The tasks are: Chargeback Maintenance, which provides data processing options: Job Runner To control and modify the data processing. Job Files To maintain the data processing jobs. Log files For daily checks. Samples View samples for creating new job files. Load Tracking Check for data loaded into the database. Clients Set up the parameters for an client used by accounting. Rates Define the parameter and costs for a resource. Rate Groups Group the rates for reporting purposes. System Maintenance, which defines basic configurations: Data Source Define database and WEB service connection information. User Access control. User groups Organize the roles for the users. Calendar Set up the calendar. Account Code Structure Define the structure for accounting data identifiers. Chapter 5. Administration 101
  • 116. CPU Normalization Updating the table for normalization based on the identifier named here. Identifiers Listing used and unused Identifiers and deleting unused Identifiers. Rate Identifier Run automatic update of Rate Identifiers. Configuration For most basic configuration data, such as paths and trace level. Reports Define and list reports available. Report Groups Organize the reports in groups. Report Distribution Define the distribution of reports. Transaction A wizard for editing of the transaction table for frequently used non-usage input data. Database To control or check the database settings: • Initialize Database: Do the initial setup of the database. • Upgrade Database: Upgrade a database after updating the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager application server software. • Object Manager: Define and maintain indices, stored procedures, tables, and views. • Table Viewer: Check the content of a table. If an ISC session is pending for some time, it will be disconnected and the last action may be lost. 5.2 Load tracking One of the major administration items for IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager is the data loading to the database. Before the data load, all source data are just files on the file systems. Once the data is loaded into IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager, it is tracked and controlled by the application. The loading information is stored in the Load Tracking table (CIMSLOADTRACKING). You can access the Load Tracking information from the Integrated Solution Console by selecting Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance → Load Tracking. The load tracking information can be filtered using the Source Feed, Load Type, or other fields. The filtering can use Exact Match or Contains as necessary. A sample load tracking window is shown in Figure 5-3 on page 103. 102 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 117. Figure 5-3 Load Tracking content 5.3 Tuning As with any database-based solution, IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager must be continuously tuned. The tuning process ensures that it works at least at an acceptable performance. The main tuning activities relate to having fast access to usage and accounting data for reporting. It should also ensure acceptable response time for administration and job processing. Tuning aspects are covered in the following sections: 5.3.1, “Tuning Web console for administration” on page 104 5.3.2, “Tuning job processing” on page 104 5.3.3, “Tuning report generation” on page 105 Chapter 5. Administration 103
  • 118. 5.3.1 Tuning Web console for administration The Web console is based on WebSphere Application Server. While the application does not have any tuning parameters, there are still some performance options to be performed: Determine the memory usage of WebSphere Application Server. Add physical memory if needed. The more the user accesses the Integrated Solution Console, the more memory WebSphere needs. You can set or limit the WebSphere Application Server Java heap size in its configuration. Determine the CPU load. Add virtual or logical CPUs for parallel processing. If there is performance contention for memory or processing, consider separating the database and application server. However, this can generate additional network traffic between them. Having the database and application server separate but on a local sub-net based on high speed network, such as Gigabyte Ethernet, would help. 5.3.2 Tuning job processing Job processing includes reading source data for collection, performing transformation, and then loading the data into an IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database. Most of the steps and stages of the job are running Java Virtual Machine. There are some performance considerations for the job processing: Add virtual or logical CPUs for parallel processing or run jobs on different machines to increase the processing power. However, running the jobs on multiple machine can affect network load and produce a need for job synchronization if the jobs are dependent on each other. Memory contention from a large number of running jobs can be alleviated by having separate processing servers. This also helps with network load and synchronization problems. Database loading performance can be improved by having the database properly tuned for insertion. IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager is typically used in a database in Insert and Query mode only. The job mainly performing insertions, not updates. The performance of inserting data into tables can be ensured by doing the following tasks: – Pruning old unused data regularly ensures that data remains manageable. – Ensuring tables have good organization using the REORG utility. – Ensuring the table statistics are current using the RUNSTAT utility. 104 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 119. – Having the heavily used tables (CIMSSUMMARY, CIMSDETAIL, CIMSDETAILIDENT, and maybe CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION) on their own fast disk storage. 5.3.3 Tuning report generation Report generation of usage and accounting data is the end deliverable of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. This is the function that must be defined for outputting data that has been processed. Report tuning is mainly tuning the access to data tables (CIMSSUMMARY, CIMSDETAIL, CIMSDETAILIDENT, and maybe CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION). Database tuning actions that must be performed on a regular basis: – Pruning old unused data regularly to ensure a manageable data size; this can be performed using the DBpurge job step. – Ensuring tables have good organization using the REORG utility. – Ensuring the table statistics are current using the RUNSTAT utility. – Having the heavily used tables on their own fast disk storage. Report SQL tuning SQL tuning for specific reports can be performed independently. Collect information about regularly used and long running reports. For those reports, determine the tables and columns used for sorting. You may define additional indices for heavy used columns. Note: Creating additional indices may reduce the insertion performance of a table. 5.4 Operating and updating This section discusses some operational aspect of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. The topics are discussed in the following sections: 5.4.1, “Startup” on page 106 5.4.2, “Shutdown” on page 1065.4.3, “Updating” on page 107 Chapter 5. Administration 105
  • 120. 5.4.1 Startup The startup of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager is performed by the administration server system. There are several startup methods for the embedded WebSphere Application Server: Windows systems: – Program FilesibmtuambinstartServer.exe – Program FilesibmtuamewasbinstartServer.bat server1 UNIX/Linux systems: – /opt/ibm/tuam/bin/startServer.sh – /opt/ibm/tuam/ewas/bin/startServer.sh server1 Figure 5-4 details the messages produced by the application as it starts. [root@srv105 bin]# ./startServer.sh server1 ADMU0116I: Tool information is being logged in file /opt/ibm/tuam/ewas/profiles/AppSrv01/logs/server1/startServer.log ADMU0128I: Starting tool with the AppSrv01 profile ADMU3100I: Reading configuration for server: server1 ADMU3200I: Server launched. Waiting for initialization status. ADMU3000I: Server server1 open for e-business; process id is 29586 Figure 5-4 Starting ISC When the Integrated Solution Console WebSphere is started, open a Web browser and direct it to the Integrated Solution Console at the following address: http://srv105:11052/ibm/console 5.4.2 Shutdown The startup IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager is performed by the administration server system. There are several startup methods for the embedded WebSphere Application Server: Windows systems: – Program FilesibmtuambinstopServer.exe – Program FilesibmtuamewasbinstopServer.bat server1 UNIX/Linux systems: – /opt/ibm/tuam/bin/stopServer.sh – /opt/ibm/tuam/ewas/bin/stopServer.sh server1 106 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 121. 5.4.3 Updating When updating the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager, do these steps: 1. Inform all users of the planned outage. 2. Wait for running jobs to be finished. 3. Stop the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server. 4. Stop any scheduling tools for job processing. 5. Perform an update of the software. 6. Start the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager server. 7. Start the scheduling of job processing. 8. Check that the application is accessible using the ISC Web interface. Chapter 5. Administration 107
  • 122. 108 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 123. 6 Chapter 6. Job creation This chapter discusses job file creation for IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1. The discussion is covered in the following sections: 6.1, “XML job creation” on page 110 6.3, “Integrator program” on page 119 6.4, “Account code mapping” on page 123 6.5, “Non-integrator steps” on page 126 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved. 109
  • 124. 6.1 XML job creation This section discusses job file structures and a generic processing overview. 6.1.1 Job file structure XML is a tagged file format similar to Hypertext Markup Language (HTML). XML only enforces the usage of a pair of start and end tags; the value of the tag and their attributes are enforced by the referenced extensible style document (.xsd file). For Job Runner’s job, the style is TUAMJobs.xsd, which is stored in the /config/schemas directory of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. The structure of the XML file is shown in Figure 6-1. Jobs Job Process Steps Step Step Step Stage Stage Process Steps Step Step Step Stage Stage Figure 6-1 Job file structure The components of a job file are: Jobs This is the primary XML container for a Job Runner job file. Job A definition of a job provides some global parameters of the job and some e-mail notification parameters. There is typically one job per jobs. 110 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 125. Process A process represents a sequentially processed items. You can have multiple processes within a job. Each process group would invoke a separate job runner instance to run in parallel. Steps The steps construct is a container for step items. Step A step is the actual definition of what the individual processing would perform. A step runs an actual program. Typically, a step would perform a single processing task, such as billing, scanning, sorting, cleanup, or database loading; however, there is a special step called integrator that can be comprised of multiple stages. Stage A stage is a construct within the integrator step that signifies an action within the integrator step. For regular jobs, you can use the command-line Job Runner statements to integrate IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager jobs into your scheduling system, as shown in Example 6-1. Example 6-1 Job Runner command line usage in scheduler definitions /opt/ibm/tuam/bin/startJobRunner.sh LoadVMware.xml >> LoadVMware.log 2>&1 /opt/ibm/tuam/bin/startJobRunner.sh LoadTDSz1.xml -date today >> LoadVMware.log 2>&1 The return code for Job Runner might be: 0 No warning or error 4 Warning 16 Error during processing 255 Syntax error within the parameters Figure 6-2 on page 112 shows the graphical user interface (GUI) for the job handling. If you select Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance → Job Runner → Job Files, you can validate the XML syntax, run the job, and make small changes to an existing job. For editing and creating larger job files, we recommend using an specialized XML editor. Chapter 6. Job creation 111
  • 126. Figure 6-2 shows the Job Files menu. Note: As the job file must reside in the jobfiles directory in the processing server, the XML editor should have access to this folder or path. Figure 6-2 The Job Runner Job maintenance 6.1.2 Generic processing overview The data processing in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager is similar for all data sources. Figure 6-3 on page 113 shows the general processing steps for data handling with IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. The order or mix of the steps may be different, depending on the collectors used. 112 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 127. Collected Common Source data files Resource Aggregation (CSR) file Data Collector Summarized data (CSR) Web or data base dataSource reprocess Exception file Account Account Table (CSR) Conversion Output file Output file (CSR+) files Output (CSR+) (CSR+) ITUAMDB Database Load Scan (Merging) Billing Summary Billing Output Merged output Ident file file file (CSR+) Normalization & Normalization Billing (applying rate) & Rate Table Figure 6-3 Generic process overview with common steps The process steps in Figure 6-3 are: 1. Many systems already have a resource usage collection function and IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager will use this data for further processing. The main processing in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager is based on the Common Source Resource (CSR) format. The initial processing step converts the existing data (SQL table, delimited file, or others) into CSR format prior to IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager processing. a. If the metering data is collected in files, these will be transferred to the application server and converted to CSR format if needed. Some converters may also include pre-aggregation. Chapter 6. Job creation 113
  • 128. b. If the metering data can be accessed on a database or Web page, the data extract made by IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager will be directly from the CSR format. The IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Integrator can include CSR conversion, aggregation, account code conversion, and sorting in one step, thereby producing only one output file. 2. CSR data is aggregated mostly on a daily basis. Aggregation means summarizing the data based on given identifiers. It calculates the sum of the data of resource fields based on the identifier values. 3. Account conversion matches the metering data to the account code structure, and all records that do not fit are put in an exception file, and this exception file may be reprocessed later after some intervention. 4. CSR or CSR+ files of the same type can be scanned into one file at any time during the processing. 5. Normalization of CPU values and multiplying by the Rate code is the next step. The selected Rate Table will be used for calculating the money value. If the Rate is of the type CPU, the recalculation based on the Normalization Table is done as well. Summarize data on the financial and organization level, which provides the billing files: billing detail, billing summary, and identifier list. 6. Loading all output data into the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager DB completes the processing. There is an automatic duplicate detection that prevents us from duplicate data loading. Note: We recommend creating CSR+ records as input for the billing step, or, alternatively, use the Integrator Sort on the account code. The number of billing summary rows in the database can be reduced on a CSR file sorted by the account code. CSR+ data is automatically sorted by the bill process. 6.2 Syntax of main Job Runner directives The main Job Runner job file directives are jobs, job, process, steps, and step. Additionally, there is the default directive that provides default parameters on each level. We explain these directives here. 114 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 129. 6.2.1 Jobs The jobs directive is the primary directive structure of the job file. It contains global directives for the whole job. Typically, a job file only contains a single job, so a jobs directive is directly followed by only a job directive. The arguments of a jobs directive are: xmlns The name space for the XML file. You would put in xmlns=”http://www.ibm.com/TUAMJobs.xsd” for an IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager job. This is required for the jobs directive. smtpServer The smtpServer that would be used to send notifications. smtpFrom The indication for the source’s e-mail address. smtpTo The destination’s e-mail address. smtpSubject Subject line. smtpBody Body text. smtpSendJobLog Boolean parameter on whether or not include the job log in the body of the e-mail. joblogFolder Explicitly specifying the log folder for the Job output. The default path is %HomePath%/logs/jobrunner/<jobid>. processFolder Explicitly specifying where to write or read source and generated files. The default is under %HomePath%/processes/. This process folder is accessible by the %ProcessFolder% variable. The jobs directive can only contain the job directive. 6.2.2 Job The job directive is similar to the jobs directive. The specification on the jobs level applies. Most of the time, this is where you would specify these parameters. The arguments of a job directive are: id The name of the job (required). This name is used to determine the job log output folder. description A descriptive name for the job. dataSourceId An optional data source ID that specifies which database should be used for the job database connection, including the configuration settings and loading data. The value Chapter 6. Job creation 115
  • 130. defaults to the Default.Processing data source, as specified in the local registry.tuam.xml file. processPriorityClass Priority of the job. stopOnProcessFailure Whether or not to stop the processing if a step fails. active Whether or not the job is active. joblogShowStepOutput Whether or not to write the step output to the job log result. joblogShowStepParameters Whether or not to show the step parameter in the job log output. joblogWriteToDB This is not implemented in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1. joblogWriteToTextFile Whether or not a text file is created in the job log output directory. joblogWriteToXMLFile Whether or not an XML file is created in the job log output directory, the ISC only uses the XML file for displaying the output; if this option is set to false, you cannot see the result from ISC. smtpServer The smtpServer that would be used to send a notification. smtpFrom The indication for the source’s e-mail address. smtpTo The destination’s e-mail address. smtpSubject Subject line. smtpBody Body text. smtpSendJobLog Boolean parameter for whether or not include the job log in the body of the e-mail. joblogFolder Explicitly specifying the log folder for the Job output. The default path is %HomePath%/logs/jobrunner/<jobid>. processFolder Explicitly specifying where to write or read source and generated files. The default is under %HomePath%/samples/processes/; this process folder is accessible by the %ProcessFolder% variable. 116 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 131. The job directive can contain the following directives: Defaults: Provides additional default parameters for the job elements. Process: This is the most common direct node under the job directive. You can have multiple processes that execute in parallel. Steps: Collection of step directives that must be executed sequentially for this job. This is typically put under a process directive. 6.2.3 Defaults The defaults directive provides name value pairs for the containing level (job, process, or step). The defaults directive can contain any name and value pairs as arguments. The defaults directive can contain the default directive. The default directive has the attribute name and value that can also be used to set any default name and value pairs. The reserved names that has special processing function are LogDate, RetentionFlag and programName. 6.2.4 Process The process directive is used to signify a collection of steps directives that must be executed sequentially. It is common practice to put a process directive under a job (instead of steps directly) to allow flexibility when adding other process directives. The arguments of a process directive are: id The name of the process (required). This also indicates the sub folder for data files in the processes directory. description A descriptive name for the process. processPriorityClass Process priority. buildProcessFolder Whether or not the process folder is created (if it does not already exist). joblogShowStepOutput Whether or not to write the step output to the job log result. joblogShowStepParameters Whether or not to show the step parameter in the job log output. active Whether or not to execute this process. Chapter 6. Job creation 117
  • 132. The process directive can contain the following directives: Defaults Steps 6.2.5 Steps The steps directive is a container for step directives. It only has a single argument, which is: stopOnStepFailure Whether or not to stop the execution in a step that is considered failed or in error. The steps directive can only contain the step directive. 6.2.6 Step The step directive is the main specification of what the job is doing. It can be written differently depending on the function you are invoking. A step can also be invoked directly using the StepRunner Java program with the arguments of nodename, programName, and programType. The arguments for the step directive are: id A unique name for the step is required. description A descriptive name for the step. programName The name of the program. type Program type. The only acceptable values are ConvertToCSR or process. programType The type of program. Some types are Java, WSF, or console. processPriorityClass Step priority. buildProcessFolder This provides an override for the build process folder. joblogShowStepOutput Whether or not to write the step output to the job log result. joblogShowStepParameters Whether or not to show the step parameter in the job log output. active Whether or not to execute this step. 118 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 133. The combination of only programName and programType determines the program or action that this step would invoke. The step can contain the following directives: parameters: Collection of step parameters. Step specific directives. Depending on the programName and programType combination, these directives are mutually exclusive, and are only used with the corresponding program invoked: – integrator – generateexternalfile – acct – bill – dbload – dbpurge – jobfileconversion – generatexmlfile – cimswindisk or windisk – cimswineventlog or wineventlog 6.3 Integrator program The integrator program is a specialized Java program that can contain multiple stages. This program is used to manipulate and convert a CSR or CSR+ formatted file. The first stage is an input definition, while the last stage is called CSROutput. Each stage of the integrator program is a record processor; they process each record and pass it to the next stage, similar to pipeline processing. An integrator step has both required and optional sections: <Input> is required and must have at least one of the following elements: – <Collector> – <Parameter> – <File> <Stage name=”function”> processing stage is needed, and you may use as many as are needed. <Stage name=”CSROutput”> or <Stage name=”CSRPlusOutput”> is required. Chapter 6. Job creation 119
  • 134. The structure of an integrator step is illustrated in Figure 6-4. <Step id=”integrator” programType=”java” type=”Process”> <Integrator> <Input name="CSRInput"> <Files><file name=”CSRinput.txt” /></files> </Input> <Stage name="CreateIdentifierFromValue" active="true"> <Stage name="CreateIdentifierFromRegEx" active="true"> <Stage name="Aggregator" active="true"></Stage> <Parameters><Parameter defaultAggregation="false" /> </Parameters> </Stage> <Stage name="ResourceConversion" active="true"> <Stage name="CreateResourceFromValue" active="true"> <Stage name="RenameFields" active="true"> <Stage name="CreateIdentifierFromTable" active="true"></Stage> <Stage name="CreateIdentifierFromIdentifiers" active="true"> <Stage name="DropFields" active="true"> <Stage name="Sort" active="true"></Stage> <!-- the next stage is required as last stage of integrator --> <Stage name="CSROutput" active="true"> <Files><File name="CSRoutput.txt"/></Files> </Stage> </Integrator> </Step> Figure 6-4 A selection of the most common ConvertToCSR integrator functions The processing of the integrator step depicted in Figure 6-4 is shown in Figure 6-5. Stage CSR.txt Stage Input CreateIdentifier Stage Stage CreateIdentifier Collector/CSR Lookup Sort Aggregate Account_Code mapping Figure 6-5 Integrator processing The following sections discuss the stages of the integrator program. 120 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 135. 6.3.1 Input We can choose one of several types for input. The keywords for input names are: AIXAAInput AIX Advanced Accounting ApacheCommonLogFormat Apache HTTP server common log CollectorInput Specifying a collector program by the Collector name CSRInput Standard CSR file NCSAInput WebSphere collector NotesDatabaseSizeInput Lotus Notes collector NotesEmailInput Lotus Notes collector NotesUsageInput Lotus Notes collector W3CWinLog Microsoft Internet Information Server collector Specifically for the CollectorInput type, you can have the collector defined as follows: DATABASE Database DELIMITED Comma or tab delimited file EXCHANGE2007 Microsoft Exchange server FIXEDFIELD Fixed field files TDS Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database TPC TotalStorage Productivity Center TRANSACTION CIMSTransaction table converter VMWARE Web Services SDK call to VMware Virtual Center WEBSPHEREXDFINEGRAIN WebSphere collector WEBSPHEREXDSERVER WebSphere collector To specify the default folder for transferred collector files, we use the variable %CollectorLogs% in the path definition. 6.3.2 Processing The processing stages can be read from <TUAM reference>. The stage functions are: Aggregator Merging data where all the identifiers are the same and merging them into a single record by summarizing the resource values. CreateIdentifierFromIdentifiers Copying, parsing, and merging identifiers into a new one. Chapter 6. Job creation 121
  • 136. CreateIdentifierFromRegEx Copying, parsing, and merging identifiers using a regular expression. CreateIdentifierFromTable Using a text lookup table to search a matching entry and put it into an identifier. CreateIdentifierFromValue Writing an identifier from a fixed string. CreateResourceFromConversion Calculate a new resource from other resources. CreateResourceFromValue Create a fixed values resource (we can create resource names longer than eight characters, but once we want to define them as a rate, the limitation of eight characters will stop us from using them). DropFields Drop a field, either an identifier or a resource. DropIdentifiers Drop the identifiers field. DropResources Drop the resources field. ExcludeRecsByDate Filter some records by a certain date. ExcludeRecsByPresence Filter some records because of the presence of a field. ExcludeRecsByValue Filter some records by the value for a field. IdentifierConversionFromTable Change an identifier using the conversion from the table. IncludeRecsByDate Filter records that do not have a certain date. IncludeRecsByPresence Filter some records that does not have a certain field. IncludeRecsByValue Only get the records that have a certain value. 122 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 137. MaxRecords Include only a number of records from the CSR file. This function is best for debugging a collection job. Prorate Calculate a resource value based on prorating the value of the other resource. RenameFields Rename an identifier or a resource in bulk. ResourceConversion Calculating a new value for a resource based on one or more resource values. Sort Sort the CSR file records based on a certain identifiers’ value. 6.3.3 Output The output types can only be in the CSROutput or CSRPlusOutput format. The output encloses a Files directive with a single File directive. A sample Output stage is shown in Example 6-2. Example 6-2 Sample CSRPlusOutput stage <Stage name="CSRPlusOutput" active="true"> <Files> <File name="%ProcessFolder%/server1/%LogDate_End%.txt" /> </Files> </Stage> 6.4 Account code mapping Matching the CSR record identifier from the collected source to a proper account code that adheres to the account code structure is required for proper reporting. We collect the data in the CSR format, typically from the input collection process, as discussed in 6.3, “Integrator program” on page 119. The recommended way of creating the Account_Code field is by using the Integrator. An older program called Acct is still valid for backward compatibilities. However, older programs like Acct should be made obsolete as you roll out new components, in favor of the integrator account conversion. Chapter 6. Job creation 123
  • 138. Figure 6-6 show the overview of an Account Code conversion. SYSID,SC67 SYSID,ABC SYSID,LNXT CreateIdentifierFromTable B,G, ITSOFINANCE_____WINDOWS_____ H,R, ITSOADMIN_______LINUX_______ S,Z, ITSOBACKOFFICE__MVS_________ SYSID,SC67 ACCTMP:ITSOBACKOFFICE__MVS_________ SYSID,ABC Exception SYSID,LNXT ACCTMP:ITSOADMIN_______LINUX_______ CreateIdentifierFromIdentifier Account_Code = ACCTMP + SYSID SYSID,SC67 ACCTMP:ITSOBACKOFFICE__MVS_________ ITSOBACKOFFICE__MVS_________SC67____ SYSID,LNXT ACCTMP:ITSOADMIN_______LINUX_______ ITSOADMIN_______LINUX_______LNXT____ DropFields ACCTMP SYSID,SC67 Account_Code:ITSOBACKOFFICE__MVS_________SC67____ SYSID,LNXT Account_Code:ITSOADMIN_______LINUX_______LNXT____ Figure 6-6 The Account Code conversion using Integrator 124 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 139. In Figure 6-6 on page 124, we show that the SYSID is used as the key to look up the value of the ACCTMP field based on the conversion table (AcctTabl.txt). If there is a record that does not have a matching result, the record is sent to the exception file. The next stage appends the SYSID to ACCTMP to create the Account_Code identifier. Then we can remove the ACCTMP field. Example 6-3 shows the integrator implementation of Figure 6-6 on page 124. Example 6-3 Account conversion using Job Runner Integrator <!-- get account code from table based on SYSID (hostname) --> <Stage name="CreateIdentifierFromTable" active="true"> <Identifiers> <Identifier name="ACCTMP"> <FromIdentifiers> <FromIdentifier name="SYSID" offset="1" length="10"/> </FromIdentifiers> </Identifier> </Identifiers> <Files> <File name="/opt/ibm/tuam/processes/Accttabl.txt" type="table"/> <File name="Exception-%LogDate_End%.txt" type="exception" format="CSROutput"/> </Files> <Parameters> <!-- exception and writeNoMatch should be set as such --> <Parameter exceptionProcess="true"/> <Parameter writeNoMatch="false"/> <Parameter sort="true"/> <Parameter upperCase="false"/> <Parameter modifyIfExists="true"/> </Parameters> </Stage> <!-- add hostname as last part to the account code --> <Stage name="CreateIdentifierFromIdentifiers" active="true"> <Identifiers> <Identifier name="Account_Code"> <FromIdentifiers> <FromIdentifier name="ACCTMP" offset="1" length="28"/> <FromIdentifier name="SYSID" offset="1" length="8"/> </FromIdentifiers> </Identifier> </Identifiers> <Parameters> <Parameter modifyIfExists="true"/> <Parameter keepLength="true"/> Chapter 6. Job creation 125
  • 140. </Parameters> </Stage> <!-- drop temporary account code identifier --> <Stage name="DropFields" active="true"> <Fields> <Field name="ACCTMP"/> </Fields> </Stage> Using the CreateIdentifierFromTable function, you can specify whether to use exception processing with the parameter exceptionProcess. If it is true, all unmatched identifiers will be collected in a exception file, keeping the structure of the input file for this step; otherwise, the identifier is added with a blank value. The conversion table for CreateIdentifierFromTable is case sensitive. You can use the upperCase=true parameter to indicate that the FromIdentifier field is converted to upper case before matching occurs. The file specified will be overwritten unless you add the variable %LogDate_End% to the definition. There will be no accumulation from the last processing, and we do recommend a separate reprocessing job; otherwise, you would need to unload all the data and reprocess the complete job once the account table is updated. 6.5 Non-integrator steps The step is mainly governed by the progamType and programName attributes. These attributes determine the way processing is performed. Our test indicates that the type attributes, though they is required, does not affect processing. Table 6-1 shows a combination of programName and programType and the associated program they actually invoke. Other combinations may exist for maintaining backward compatibilities. Table 6-1 Program combinations programType programName Invoked program Java Integrator integrator.StepRunIntegrator Java SendMail mail.StepRunMail Java Acct acct.StepRunAcct Java Bill bill.StepRunBill 126 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 141. programType programName Invoked program Java Sort sort.StepRunSort Java DBLoad load.StepRunLoad Java DBPurge purge.StepRunPurge Java JobFileConversion jobfileconversion.StepRunJBConversion Java Rpd rpd.StepRunRpd Java Scan scan.StepRunScan Java Cleanup cleanup.StepRunCleanupScan Java FileTransfer filetransfer.StepRunFileTransfer Java WaitFile waitfile.StepRunWaitFile Java <java program name> java.StepRunJava Console <program name> console.StepRunConsole WSF <WSF script name> wsf.StepRunWSF Java SingleProcessStepa StepRunAcct - StepRunSort - StepRunBill a. A special step that has the programName of SingleProcessStep and programType of Java would generate an automatic job with a set of accounting processing (StepRunAcct), sorting (StepRunSort), and billing (StepRunBill) steps. All the directives under steps have the following general attributes: joblogShowStepOutput Whether or not to write the step output to the job log result. joblogShowStepParameters Whether or not to show the step parameter in the job log output. processFolder Provides an override for the process folder. This does not apply to the mail program. Note that scan, sort CleanUp, Scan, FileTransfer, and WaitFile uses ProcessFolder (an uppercase P). dataSourceId Provides an override for data source access in the associated step. This is only used for Load, Purge, and JobConversion. dbConfigurationFile Database configuration file for Acct and Bill. This does not seem to be used. Chapter 6. Job creation 127
  • 142. We discuss, in the following sections, the detailed parameters and processing function of each invoked program: “Mail” on page 128 “Acct” on page 128 “Bill” on page 130 “Cleanup” on page 131 “Sort” on page 132 “DBLoad” on page 132 “DBPurge” on page 133 “Scan” on page 133 “Windows script file” on page 136 “File transfer” on page 134 “Wait file” on page 135 “Remote product deployment” on page 135 “Job conversion” on page 135 “Java” on page 136 “Console” on page 136 The discussion of the integrator is provided in 6.3, “Integrator program” on page 119. 6.5.1 Mail The mail step allows you to send an e-mail message. The applicable parameters are: SMTPServer The SMTP server that would be used to send notification FromEmail The indication for the source’s e-mail address ToEmail The destination’s e-mail address Subject Subject line Body Contents of the e-mail AttachFileLocation Files that you would attach to the e-mail 6.5.2 Acct The acct process derives account code information based on an account code lookup file (Accttbl.txt). This program is provided as a backward compatibility option to existing jobs. The newer recommended method is to use the integrator step’s CreateIdentifierFromTable stage to derive a new identifier for the account code field. Before the acct program is run, a temporary step XML file is created. The file is created in the ProcessFolder with the step’s ID as a name. This program can be 128 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 143. invoked directly using the Java class com.ibm.tuam.acct.AcctMain and supplying <processFolder> and step.xml as arguments. The applicable parameters are: inputFile Input file name (The default is CurrentCSR.txt.). outputFile Output file name (The default is AcctCSR.txt.). inputFileEncoding Encoding of input file. outputFileEncoding Encoding of output file. controlFile Control parameters (The default is AcctCntl.txt.). exceptionFile Exception file name (records that cannot be matched). ControlCard Content of control file in line. ProcessFolder Processing folder name. Trace Set tracing to true or false. accCodeConvTable Account code conversion table text file (The default is Accttbl.txt.). accCodeConvTableEncoding Encoding of the conversion table file The account processing is illustrated in Figure 6-7. CurrentCSR.txt AcctCSR.txt AcctTabl.txt A, E, acct1 F, N, acct2 O, Z, acct3 Exception.txt Figure 6-7 Accounting process Chapter 6. Job creation 129
  • 144. 6.5.3 Bill The bill process processes the usage data that already has an account code to generate billing information. As discussed in 4.2, “Account code hierarchy” on page 82, an account code is used to get the rate table and find the rate for each resource in the CSR file. The result of this process is three files: BillSummary.txt Billing summary in which each account and resource has the usage and money value shown. BillDetail.txt Billing detail in which a record is provided that contains account code and usage entries referring to the identifier. Ident.txt Identifiers that are referred to by the billing files. Before the bill program is run, a temporary step XML file is created. The file is created in the ProcessFolder with the step’s ID as its name. This program can be invoked directly using the Java class com.ibm.tuam.bill.BillMain and supplying <processFolder> and step.xml as arguments. The applicable parameters are: inputFile Input file name (the default is AcctCSR.txt). CSR+ files are recommended, as they can be sorted by the billing program for optimization. Figure 6-8 on page 131 shows an overview of the bill process. 130 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 145. AcctCSR.txt identifiers1 resources1 identifiers2 resources2 ITUAM Database Bill process select Rate Table CIMSClient Table controlCard Normalization Rate Table NORMALIZE CPU including CPU check mark . Billing CPU Normalization Table Ident.txt BillDetail.txt BillSummary.txt identifiers1 resources1 resources identifiers2 resources2 Figure 6-8 The bill process overview Note: We recommend using a CSR file sorted by the account code as the input file or use a CSR+ file, which is sorted by the billing automatically. 6.5.4 Cleanup The cleanup step defines the option to clean up the processing directory for older files. It can either remove the files by date or by age. The applicable parameters are: DaysToRetainFiles The age of the files to retain. DaysToRetainFiles and DateToRetainFiles are mutually exclusive. If both are specified, DaysToRetainFiles will be used. DateToRetainFiles The date that denotes the oldest file to retain. Folder Folder name to clean up. The default is ProcessFolder/jobid. Chapter 6. Job creation 131
  • 146. Clean Sub Folders Whether or not to clean all sub folders. 6.5.5 Sort The sort step provides a mechanism for sorting a CSR file line by line. This sort program does not allow you to select the identifiers to sort on. The applicable parameters are: Input File Name Input file. The default is AcctCSR.txt. Output File Name Output file name. The default is AcctCSR.txt. Tip: For a more specific sort, based on identifiers, we use the Integrator sort, which is described in 6.3, “Integrator program” on page 119. 6.5.6 DBLoad The load step provides the capability to load data into the database. Data is typically loaded from billing output files. Before the database load program is run, a temporary step XML file is created. The file is created in the processFolder with the step’s ID as its name. This program can be invoked directly using the Java class com.ibm.tuam.load.DBLoadMain and supplying <processFolder> and step.xml as arguments. The applicable parameters are: resourceFile File name for the resource data. processFolder Folder to get the files. Trace Whether or not to perform tracing. detailFile File name for the detail data. allow Detail Duplicates Whether or not to allow duplicate loads on the detail file. summaryFile File name for the summary data. allow Summary Duplicates Whether or not to allow duplicate loads on the summary file. onEmptyFile Status that indicates if an empty file is found. Possible values are Success, Warning, or Fail. identFile File name for the identifier. encoding File encoding. 132 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 147. loadType Detail, Summary, Ident, All, or Resource. bulkLoad Whether to invoke the load as a bulk process. 6.5.7 DBPurge The purge step provides the method to purge data in the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database. Before the purge program is run, a temporary step XML file is created. The file is created in the processFolder with the step’s ID as its name. This program can be invoked directly using the Java class com.ibm.tuam.purge.DBPurgeMain and supplying <processFolder> and step.xml as arguments. The applicable parameters are: Months To Keep Number of months to retain data, if specified. The start and end date are ignored. StartDate Optional start date for purging. EndDate Optional end date for purging. Purge Summary Whether or not to purge the summary table. Purge Bill Detail Whether or not to purge the billing detail table. PurgeIdent Whether or not to purge the identifier table. Purge Acct Detail Whether or not to purge the account detail table. PurgeClient Whether or not to purge the client table. PurgeRate Whether or not to purge the rate table. DataSourceID ID of the data source to be accessed. 6.5.8 Scan The scan step provides the facility of merging multiple CSR files in the processing folder into a single CSR file. The applicable parameters are: Use LogDate Range Log date range to be merged. LogDate A single log date to merge. Retain File Date Determine the output file name. If Retain File Date is true, the file name is set to the end date of the log date. If false, the output file name is CurrentCSR.txt. Retain Date Flag Whether or not to retain the file date (same as Retain File Date). Chapter 6. Job creation 133
  • 148. ExcludeFile Exclude merging specified files. Exclude Folder Exclude merging specified folders. IncludeFile Include specific files. Use Step Files Use files generated from previous steps. Allow Missing Files Allow any files that are not found. Allow Empty Files Allow files to be empty. 6.5.9 File transfer The file transfer program provides a facility to perform file transfer between systems. It provides several different methods for performing file transfer, such as ftp, scp, sftp, or smb. The applicable parameters are: continue On Error Whether to stop or continue when an error occurs. type Transfer type. The keywords are ftp, file, win, windows, ssh, rsh, and rexec. overwrite Whether to overwrite the file if it is already there. ServerName The target server name. UserId The user ID to be used. UserPassword The password to be used. from* Source directories. to* Target directories. Some additional parameters for ftp: OpenType® FTP site type TransferType Ascii or binary transfer Additional parameter for secure transfer: Key Store File Name File to store SSL certificates 134 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 149. 6.5.10 Wait file This waitfile step waits until a file becomes available. The applicable parameters are: FileName File name to wait for arrival. Polling Interval The duration between checks for the file. TimeOut The total time to wait for the file. This is the value that is used if both TimeOut and TimeOut Date Time exists. TimeOut Date Time The time stamp when the program should stop waiting. 6.5.11 Remote product deployment The remote product deployment (rpd) provides a mechanism to perform file transfer and product installation. This program is mainly used for deployment of collector and AIX advanced accounting collection. This uses the same mechanism as the file transfer process discussed in 6.5.9, “File transfer” on page 134. The applicable arguments are: Host Target host. UserId User ID to use. Password Password to use. Manifest The XML file name that describe the action sequences to do. RPD Parameters Various parameters for RPD program as requested by the Manifest. This is in the form of keyword value pairs. SourcePath The path where the files to be transferred reside. 6.5.12 Job conversion This job conversion step is a stand-alone Job runner step for converting IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V6.x job files into a V7.1 job format. The applicable parameters are: input Folder Input conversion folder output Folder Output conversion folder over Write Output Folder Whether or not to overwrite any files that already exist Chapter 6. Job creation 135
  • 150. Note: There is another conversion for old Conversion Builder files into an Integrator stage, which will be not discussed in this book. 6.5.13 Windows script file The Windows script file (WSF) step is a special step that runs Windows Script File. It typically contains a Microsoft Visual Basic® program. The execution uses the csript.exe command. The Visual Basic program is embedded in the programName argument of the step. The parameters for this step are passed to the script directly. 6.5.14 Java The Java step allows you to run arbitrary Java programs. This is typically to invoke your own Java function or conversion step. You must supply the appropriate library and command-line options for the Java program. The applicable parameters are: Use Command Processor Whether to invoke the command processor or invoke the Java class directly Use Standard Parameters Whether or not to use standard JVM™ parameters Java Command Line Command-line argument for the Java Virtual Machine JavaHome Home directory of the Java executable 6.5.15 Console The console step allows you to invoke a program on the operating system level. The applicable parameter is: Use Command Processor Whether or not to invoke the command processor 136 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 151. 7 Chapter 7. Problem determination This chapter discusses troubleshooting procedures for IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1. The discussion is covered in the following sections: 7.1, “Job failures” on page 138 7.2, “Database connection” on page 140 7.3, “Web reporting problems” on page 141 7.4, “Trace level” on page 141 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved. 137
  • 152. 7.1 Job failures One of the most important aspects of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager are the jobs used to collect usage information from the system log. There are several steps that can be performed whenever you run into problems with jobs. When performing problem determination for jobs, there are several problem determination sources: Job logs output from the running jobs Job logs can be in plain text format or XML format. The XML job log is for display in the Integrated Solutions Console, while the plain text job log is easier for us to read. For job log analysis details, refer to 7.1.1, “Job logs” on page 138. Output files from the processing stages Analyzing the output of the processing stages allows for deeper problem determination about logic problems of the job. You must identify the default file names for some stages, as some of the files are produced by default. Refer to 7.1.2, “Output files” on page 139 for more information. 7.1.1 Job logs Job logs can be read from the Integrated Solutions Console menu by selecting Usage and Accounting Manager → Chargeback Maintenance → Job Runner → Log Files. The log files are organized based on the date the job was executed. You can then open the job log by expanding the job. Job log messages are arranged in a job - processes - step - stage hierarchy. You can quickly identify problems in a specific step or stage by looking at items identified by a red X for error or a yellow triangle for warning. A sample log file is shown in Figure 7-1 on page 139. 138 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 153. Figure 7-1 The Job Runner log viewer GUI for analyzing the detailed job output Finding the error message and correcting it is the objective of the problem determination process. You can look this message up in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Reference manual, found at the following address: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/tivihelp/v3r1/topic/com.ibm.it uam.doc/ref/tuam_pdf_reference.pdf A common example is AUCPE02000W – The rate id xxxxxx is not defined. For this message, you must decide whether this resource (rate ID) is needed or not for recording. Define the unidentified rate in the database, as discussed in 4.5, “Working with rates” on page 92. 7.1.2 Output files Some of the programs have a default output file name. The output files are stored under the processing directory path defined by the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager configuration. The sub-path for the output file is the process name. The scan program is used to consolidate data from feed subdirectories into one processing file. The default output file is CurrentCSR.txt. Chapter 7. Problem determination 139
  • 154. The acct program is used to perform account code conversion on data. It generates the file AcctCSR.txt that contains the records with the account_code string. If the record cannot be matched from the lookup table, the record is written to the exception file in Exception.txt file. The bill program is used to collect resource usage information and applies rate information. The bill program generates billing information in BillDetail.txt, which consists of detailed usage for each identifiers combination, and BillSummary.txt, which contains summary billing information for a specific account_code. It also generates identifier lists, which qualifies each usage detail with a identifier mix in the file Ident.txt. 7.2 Database connection The Integrated Solution Console is heavily dependent on the database. Any problem with the database reduced the console’s functionality. Some of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager configuration information, such as path information, is stored in the database. While the jobs only access the database during the DBload and DBpurge stages, the ISC requires a database connection. When the ISC database connection fails, you must diagnose and correct the issue so that the database connection can be reestablished. You can discover the cause of the problem by reading the current Trace and Message log records: If the database is inaccessible, log into the Database Management interface and check the status of the database server. If the database server is stopped, restart it. When the problem is an authorization one, ensure that the user ID and password used by IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager to connect to the database is correct. You can check the data source connection by selecting Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Data Source, and then modify the user ID or password and test the connection. 140 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 155. 7.3 Web reporting problems One of the most common problems of the Web Reporting interface is report generation timing out. Some of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager tables can be quite large, so the processing to generate a report can sometimes exceed the established timeout. the timeout can be caused by several things: A network issue, such as a slow connection for report data transfer. A data volume issue. You can correct this issues by limiting the time range of the selection. To change this timeout value, start the Integrated Solutions Console, select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Configuration, and select the Reporting tab. Verify the Report Script Timeout value, which can be 600 – 2700 seconds. Then you can reverify the running of the report. 7.4 Trace level Logging and tracing for general processing of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager can be managed as follows: Start the Integrated Solutions Console, select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Configuration, and click the Logging tab. Set Trace file setting. The trace message level can be set to FINE, FINER, or FINEST. We recommend starting with FINEST, which will output all messages, and then adjust the setting later as necessary. Look in the trace file and see which messages are controlled by this setting. The messages controlled by this setting will start with FINE, FINER, or FINEST. Set Log file setting. The log message level can be set to SEVERE, WARNING, or INFORMATION. We recommend starting with INFORMATION, which will output all messages, and then adjust the setting later as necessary. Look in the log file and see which messages are controlled by this setting. The messages controlled by this setting will start with SERVER, WARNING, or INFORMATION. Chapter 7. Problem determination 141
  • 156. 142 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 157. 8 Chapter 8. Web reporting This chapter discusses about reporting in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1. The discussion is covered in the following sections: 8.1, “Web reporting interface and user authority” on page 144 8.3, “Producing reports” on page 153 8.4, “Defining a new report” on page 155 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved. 143
  • 158. 8.1 Web reporting interface and user authority To access the Web reporting interface, do the following steps: 1. Log in to the reporting Web application by going to the address http://localhost/login.aspx. Alternatively, on the Windows platform where IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager is installed, select Start → All Programs → IBM Usage and Accounting Manager → Windows Web Reporting. 2. When the reporting login page appears with the manual logon option, enter admin in the User ID field and password in the Password field. If you have auto logon configured for Web reporting, you would be automatically signed on with the message: Welcome username, you are currently signed on as user ID. The user ID for the reporting system is stored in the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager database. During database initialization, IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager adds a default user and user group that has administrative privileges in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Web Reporting and can view all reports and clients. The ID for the default user is admin and the password is password. The user admin belongs to the default user group named Admin. 3. To change the password for the user, select the Change Password check box and then click OK. On the Change User Password page, type the current password and the new password as directed. The password is alphanumeric and case-sensitive and can be a maximum of 16 characters. Click OK to change the password and return to the home page. 4. User access to the reporting interface is administered from the Integrated Solution Console. Select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → Users to manage and add users, and select Usage and Accounting Manager → System Maintenance → User Groups to manage user groups and to associate a user to a user group. 5. By default, new users are added to the Admin group, which has administrative access enabled and full access to all reports (that is, members of the group have access to all reports). You can restrict user access to reports by: a. Creating a group or groups that do not have administrative access enabled (the Allow Administrative Access check box is not selected). b. Clicking the View pop-up menu icon for Reports Allowed and either add the Report Opens the Available Reports page, where individual reports can be added to the user group, or select Allow All Reports to add all reports to the user group. In this window, you can also remove an assigned report by clicking Remove. 144 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 159. c. Adding the appropriate users (users that belong to a group that have administrative access enabled have access to all reports). d. Ensuring that the Use Report Access Security check box on the Configuration—Reporting page is selected (this check box is selected by default). If this check box is not selected, all users can access all reports regardless of whether administrative access is enabled for their group. 8.2 Web reports The following are the available Web reporting reports that are provided by IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. Account Budget for Period and YTD report The Account Budget for Period and YTD report provides actual, budget, and difference charges by account code for the parameters selected. This report includes totals for the calendar period selected and year to date (YTD). Account Summary by Week report The Account Summary by Week report provides the total weekly and monthly charges by account code and rate code description for the parameters selected. Account Summary by Week-Wide report The Account Summary by Week-Wide report is similar to the Account Summary by Week report, except that the weeks are displayed across the top of the page. Account Summary Daily 2 report The Account Summary Daily 2 report is similar to the Account Summary Daily report, except that the month (rather than the account code) appears at the top level of the report. Account Summary Daily report The Account Summary Daily report provides total daily and monthly charges by account code and rate code description for the parameters selected. Account Summary Week spreadsheet The Account Summary Week spreadsheet provides account summary weekly information by account code for the parameters selected. Chapter 8. Web reporting 145
  • 160. Account Summary YTD Cost by Rate Group spreadsheet The Account Summary YTD Cost by Rate Group spreadsheet provides account summary YTD information by rate code description for the rate group selected for the parameters selected. Account Summary YTD by Rate spreadsheet The Account Summary YTD by Rate spreadsheet provides account summary YTD information by rate code description for the parameters selected. Account Summary YTD report The Account Summary YTD report provides the total monthly and YTD charges by account code, rate group, and rate code description for the parameters selected. Account Summary YTD spreadsheet The Account Summary YTD spreadsheet provides year-to-date account summary information, by account code, for the parameters selected. Account Summary YTD-Wide report The Account Summary YTD-Wide report is similar to the Account Summary YTD report; however, the months are displayed across the top of the page. Account Total Invoice report The Account Total Invoice report provides the total charges by each level of the account code structure for the parameters selected. Alternate Invoice report The Alternate Invoice report provides charges by account code and rate code description for the parameters selected. An optional graph showing total expenses by account code is also included. Batch report The Batch report provides z/OS batch job data for the parameters selected. This data is taken from the CIMSDetail table. CICS Transaction report The CICS Transaction report provides data for CICS transactions by transaction ID for the parameters selected. This data is taken from the CIMSDetail table. Client report The Client report provides the information contained in the CIMSClient table for the parameters selected. Configuration report The Configuration report provides information contained in the CIMSConfig table. 146 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 161. Cost Trend report The Cost Trend report provides total charges by account code for each month of the year for the parameters selected. Monthly charges for each account code are presented on a single line. To print this report, use landscape mode on legal paper. Cost Trend-Accounts Graph report The Cost Trend Accounts Graph report provides the total charges for all account codes for each month for the parameters selected followed by charges for individual account codes for each month. Cost Trend by Rate report The Cost Trend by Rate report provides total charges by rate code description and rate group for each month of the year for the parameters selected. To print this report, use landscape mode on legal paper. Cost Trend-Rates Graph report The Cost Trend Rates Graph report provides the total charges for all rate codes for each month for the parameters selected followed by charges for individual rate codes for each month. Cost Variance Drill Down report The Cost Variance Drill Down report provides a comparison of charges by rate code description and rate group for a specified month and the month prior for the parameters selected. Cost Variance report The Cost Variance report provides a comparison of charges by account code, rate code description, and rate group for a specified month and the month prior for the parameters selected. Daily Crosstab Charges report The Daily Crosstab Charges report provides total daily charges by account code and rate code description for the parameters selected. Daily Crosstab Usage report The Daily Crosstab Usage report provides total daily resource usage by account code and rate code description for the parameters selected. DB2 Summary report The DB2 Summary report provides DB2 data for the parameters selected. This data is taken from the CIMSDetail table. Chapter 8. Web reporting 147
  • 162. Detail by Identifier Crosstab report The Detail by Identifier Crosstab report provides total charges by rate code for a selected identifier value or values for the date range selected. Detail by Identifier by Date Crosstab report The Detail by Identifier by Date Crosstab report provides total and total daily charges by rate code for a selected identifier value or values for the date range selected. Detail by Rate Group/Identifier report The Detail by Rate Group/Identifier report is similar to the Detail by Rate Group report. However, in the Rate Group/Identifier report, the resource units are broken down by identifier value for the identifier name selected. Detail by Rate Group report The Detail by Rate Group report provides total resource units used for the first eight rate code descriptions in a rate group for the parameters selected. If applicable, a total for the next highest level of the account code appears. Detail Rate Codes by Identifiers report The Detail Rate Codes by Identifiers report shows resource units consumed for a maximum of five rate codes and five identifiers. Detail Rate Codes by Identifiers/Account report The Detail Rate Codes by Identifiers/Account report shows resource units consumed by account code for a maximum of five rate codes and five identifiers. Disk Directory Resource report The Disk Directory Resource report provides Windows disk storage data for the parameters selected. This data is taken from the CIMSDetail table. Invoice by Account Code spreadsheet The Invoice by Account Code spreadsheet provides invoice information by account code for the parameters selected. Invoice by Account Level report The Invoice by Account Level report provides charges by account code, rate group, and rate code description for the parameters selected. An optional graph showing total expenses by account code is also included. 148 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 163. Invoice by Rate Group spreadsheet The Invoice by Rate Group spreadsheet provides invoice information for the rate codes within a selected rate group for the parameters selected. Invoice Drill Down for Rate Group report The Invoice Drill Down for Rate Group report enables drill down of the charges for a rate group by identifier name. Invoice Drill Down for Rate Group by Date report The Invoice Drill Down for Rate Group by Date report is similar to the Invoice Drill Down for Rate Group report. However, it also provides a breakdown of the data by date. Invoice Drill Down for Units report The Invoice Drill Down for Units report enables drill down of resource units by up to five identifier names. Invoice report The Invoice report provides charges by account code, rate code description, and rate group for the parameters selected. Invoice spreadsheet The Invoice spreadsheet provides invoice information for the parameters selected. Invoice with Shifts report The Invoice with Shifts report provides charges by account code, rate group, and rate code description broken down by shift for the parameters selected, if the CIMSSummary table contains multiple shift codes for a rate code. Line Item Budget for Period and YTD report The Line Item Budget for Period and YTD report provides actual, budget, and difference charges by account code, rate group, and rate code description for the parameters selected. Monthly Crosstab Charges report The Monthly Crosstab Charges report provides total monthly charges by account code and rate code description for the parameters selected. Monthly Crosstab Usage report The Monthly Crosstab Usage report provides total monthly resource usage by account code and rate code description for the parameters selected. Chapter 8. Web reporting 149
  • 164. MS Exchange 2000 Resource report The MS Exchange 2000 Resource report provides Exchange 2000 Server data for the parameters selected. This data is taken from the CIMSDetail table. MS SQL Server 2000 Resource report The MS SQL Server 2000 Resource report provides SQL Server 200 trace file data for the parameters selected. This data is taken from the CIMSDetail table. Percentage report The Percentage report provides the total charge by account code for the parameters selected and specifies the percentage of that charge in relationship to the total charges for all account codes. This report also provides a breakdown of the percentage by rate group and rate code description for each account code. Rate report The Rate report provides the information contained in the CIMSRate and CIMSRateGroup tables. Report Both template The Report Both template produces Both reports that show resource usage and charges by account codes and rate code description for the parameters selected. Report Cost template The Report Cost template produces Cost reports that show charges by account code and rate code description for the parameters selected. Report Resource template The Report Resource template produces resource reports that show resource usage by account code and rate code description for the parameters selected. Resource Trend Graph report The Resource Trend Graph report provides the total resource usage for all rate codes for each month for the parameters selected followed by resource usage for individual rate codes for each month. Resource Usage Trend report The Resource Usage Trend report provides total resource usage by rate code for each month of the year for the parameters selected. It is ordered by account code, rate group, and rate code. To print this report, use landscape mode on legal paper. 150 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 165. Resource Variance report The Resource Variance report provides a comparison of resource usage by account code, rate group, and rate code description for a specified month and the month prior for the parameters selected. Run Total Invoice report The Run Total Invoice report provides total charges by rate group and rate code description for the parameters selected. Run Total Invoice spreadsheet The Run Total Invoice spreadsheet provides total invoice information by rate code for the parameters selected. Run Total Invoice with Shifts report The Run Total Invoice with Shifts report shows the units, rates, and charges for each rate code description, by shift. The CIMSSummary must contain more than one shift code for a rate code before that information can be broken down by each shift. Run Total Percent report This report is the same as the Run Total Invoice report, except that the drill down includes percent total by account code in addition to units, rate, and charge. Run Total Rate Group Percent report This report provides charges and percentage by rate groups for the parameters selected. Spreadsheet Both template The Spreadsheet Both template produces Both spreadsheets that show resource usage and charges by account code and rate code description for the parameters selected. Spreadsheet Cost template The Spreadsheet Cost template produces Cost reports that show charges by account and rate code description for the parameters selected. Spreadsheet Resource template The Spreadsheet Resource template produces Resource spreadsheets that show resource usage by account and rate code description for the parameters selected. Chapter 8. Web reporting 151
  • 166. Summary Crosstab Charges report The Summary Crosstab Charges report provides total charges by account code and rate code description for the parameters selected. Summary Crosstab Usage report The Summary Crosstab Usage report provides total resource usage by account code and rate code description for the parameters selected. Summary by Rate Group Crosstab Charges report The Summary by Rate Group Crosstab Charges report provides total charges by account code and rate code description for the rate codes within a selected rate group for the parameters selected. Summary by Rate Group Crosstab Usage report The Summary by Rate Group Crosstab Usage report provides total resource usage by account code and rate code description for the rate codes within a selected rate group for the parameters selected. Top 10 Accounts for Rate spreadsheet The Top 10 Accounts for Rate spreadsheet provides the account codes with the highest usage of a specified rate code for the parameters selected. For example, if you type 3 as the Top N parameter, the three account codes with the highest rate code usage appear. If you leave the Top N parameter blank, the account codes with the ten highest rate code usage appear. Top 10 Bar Graph report The Top 10 Bar Graph report is similar to the Top Cost report. However, it provides accounts codes with the 10 highest charges for the parameters selected and it provides the data in bar graph as well as table format. Top 10 Pie Chart report This report is similar to the Top Cost Report. However, it provides accounts codes with the 10 highest charges for the parameters selected, and it provides the data in pie chart as well as table format. Top Accounts for Rate report The Top Accounts for Rate report provides the account codes with the highest usage of a specified rate code for the parameters selected. For example, if you type 3 as the Top N parameter, the three account codes with the highest rate code usage appear. If you leave the Top N 152 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 167. parameter blank, the account codes with the ten highest rate code usage appear. Top Cost report The Top Cost report provides the account codes with the highest charges for the parameters selected. For example, if you type 3 as the Top N parameter, the three account codes with the highest charges appear. If you leave the Top N parameter blank, the account codes with the ten highest charges appear. Transaction report The Transaction report provides the Miscellaneous, Recurring, and Credit transactions for the parameters selected. Weekly Crosstab Charges report The Weekly Crosstab Charges report provides total weekly charges by account code and rate code description for the parameters selected. Weekly Crosstab Usage report The Weekly Crosstab Usage report provides total weekly resource usage by account code and rate code description for the parameters selected. 8.3 Producing reports There are two types of reports in IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager. Reports that can contain usage data for processing in a spreadsheet application or can contain invoices for billing to customers or departments. To produce the reports, do these steps: 1. Log in to the reporting Web application. Go to the address http://localhost/login.aspx. 2. When the reporting login page appears, enter admin in the User ID field and password in the Password field. 3. From the reports tool bar, click Run Reports. This shows the list of available reports, which is shown as an expandable tree. The categories are: – Invoices – Account Reports – Top Usage Reports – Trend, Resource Detail – Other – Custom Chapter 8. Web reporting 153
  • 168. 4. You can also select Run Spreadsheets. There are two types of spreadsheet: Standard and Crosstab. 5. Select the desired report or spreadsheet. Clicking it will bring up the Parameter page. Provide the appropriate report parameters. Some of the typical parameters are: Account Code Structure name This can be the standard structure or any other alternative structure. Account Code Level The account code level that is required to view the report. For example, the account code AABBBBCCC might contain three levels: the two-digit company code AA, the 6-digit division code AABBBB, and the 9-digit department code AABBBBCCC. The resource use and charge data in the generated report reflects the level that has been select. Starting and Ending Account Code This parameter works in conjunction with the Account Code Level parameter and specifies the range of account codes for that level that appear in the report. If all account codes for that level are to appear in the report, click Lowest Possible Account for the starting account code and Highest Possible Account for the ending account code. If specific account codes are required, click the appropriate start and end codes, or click Custom and input the start and end codes. Invoice Number Some invoice reports contain separate invoices for the selected account codes. If this parameter is blank (the default), invoice numbering begins with 1. Use this parameter to begin invoice numbering from another number, if necessary. The administrator determines whether this parameter is displayed for invoices. If this parameter is not available, the invoice number set in the CIMSConfigOptions table in the database is used, and invoice numbers continue to increase sequentially each time an invoice is run. For example, if the last invoice in a report was 99, the next invoice that is run will begin with invoice number 100. Date Range The date range filters the view of the report. Dates for a report refer to the reporting period that was assigned when the report was created. 6. Click OK. The report runs and appears. 154 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 169. 8.4 Defining a new report Although IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager provides plenty of predefined reports, eventually you may need to define additional reports that only select a subset or a super-set of data that is not available in the standard reports. Thus, you must define a new report or a new spreadsheet. To define a new report, do these steps: 1. Log in to the reporting Web application at the address http://localhost/login.aspx. Select the report that most closely matches the one you need. 2. Select Reports → Create a Report. The Create a Report page opens. Specify or update the following parameters for the report: Report Select New to create a new report or spreadsheet or select an existing report or spreadsheet to update the report or spreadsheet. Type Select the report or spreadsheet type that you want to create. You can select one of the following types: • Resource (resource usage by account and rate code description) • Cost (charges by account and rate code description) • Both (resource and cost information) Name Specify a name that you want to assign to the report or spreadsheet. The name is used to identify the report or spreadsheet in the list of published reports or spreadsheets, search queries, or designated as a favorite report or spreadsheet on the Home page. Description Enter a descriptive summary of the report or spreadsheet. Visible to all users Check to make the report or spreadsheet available to all Web users. Deselect to make the report or spreadsheet available only to you. This check box is unchecked by default. Resource For each column box, select the rate code that you want to appear in that column. You can select up to four columns for Resource reports and eight columns for Cost or Resource reports. Chapter 8. Web reporting 155
  • 170. Decimal Places Specify the number of decimal digits that you want to appear in the resource units. For example, if you specify two decimal digits, the resource usage amount is displayed as follows: 65.03. 3. If you are creating a new report, click New or click Update if you are updating a report or spreadsheet. The name and at least one rate code for an existing report or spreadsheet must be shown before you click Update. 4. After you create a report or spreadsheet, the report or spreadsheet is shown on the Reports or Spreadsheets page under a report group determined by the administrator. 8.5 Batch reporting IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager provides an alternative way to produce reports. You do not need to log in and go through the Web reporting pages to create the report if you want to have the report run regularly. This capability is provided with batch reporting. Batch reporting enables you to automate the generation of published reports. A published report is a report that has been saved with the data that was generated at the time the report was run. Publishing a report enables users to view a report without having to regenerate it. The report displays quickly because the data has already been read from the database and formatted. Batch reporting also enables you to provide published reports to users in a way that best meets the needs of users, including attaching the report to an e-mail or including a link to the report in an e-mail. The batch reporting is provided as an executable BatchReporting program under the lib subdirectory. To invoke batch reporting, you must publish the report you run and define its distribution list and distribution cycle from the Integrated Solution Console. 156 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 171. A Appendix A. Sample test This appendix provides a sample test and an answer key for the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager implementation certification. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved. 157
  • 172. Sample test Answer the following questions: 1. When creating and editing IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 job files, which skill set is needed? a. Working knowledge of XML b. Working knowledge of Shell and .BAT scripting c. Basic knowledge of database-stored procedures d. Basic knowledge of Business Intelligence and Reporting Tools (BIRT) Report Designer 2. Consider the following 36-byte account code: AAAABBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC How can this be broken in to three account code levels? a. Level 1, AA Full Length = 2 bytes Description = Application Level 2, AAAABBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB Full Length = 20 bytes Description = Resource group Level 3, AAAABBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Full Length = 36 bytes Description = Platform b. Level 1, AAAA Full Length = 4 bytes Description = Application Level 2, AAAABBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB Full Length = 20 bytes Description = Resource group Level 3, AAAABBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Full Length = 36 bytes Description = Platform c. Level 1, AAAA Full Length = 4 bytes Description = Application Level 2, AAAACCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Full Length = 20 bytes Description = Resource group 158 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 173. Level 3, AAAACCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB Full Length = 36 bytes Description = Platform d. Level 1, CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Full Length = 16 bytes Description = Application Level 2, CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB Full Length = 32 bytes Description = Resource group Level 3, CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBAAAA Full Length = 36 bytes Description = Platform 3. Which report provides the Miscellaneous, Recurring, and Credit transactions for the parameters selected? a. Cost Trend report b. Transaction report c. Percentage report d. Run Total Percent report 4. To verify installation, after running sample collector data, where can database loads be tracked in Load Tracking? a. Database a. Job Runner a. System Maintenance a. Chargeback Maintenance 5. There is an application that controls print in a centralized environment, and there is a need to split all resources used by overhead account code AAABB among three different accounts: A1, A2, and AA1. On average, A1uses about 50 percent of the resources assigned to the AAABB account, A2 uses about 30 percent, and A3 uses about 20 percent. To prorate the costs associated with this application among the three accounts, which comma-delimited table would need to be created? a. AAABB,A1,50,All AAABB,A2,30,All AAABB,A3,20,All b. AAABB,A1,50,Z001 AAABB,A2,30,Z002 AAABB,A3,20,Z003 Appendix A. Sample test 159
  • 174. c. AAABB,AAABB,50,All AAABB,AAACC,30,All AAABB,AAADD,20,All d. AAABB,A1,50,Z001 AAABB,A2,30,Z001 AAABB,A3,20,Z001 AAABB,A1,50,Z002 AAABB,A2,30,Z002 AAABB,A3,20,Z002 AAABB,A1,50,Z003 AAABB,A2,30,Z003 AAABB,A3,20,Z003 6. What is the purpose of running the UNIX command ${TUAM_HOME}/bin/startServer.bin? e. Starts Embedded WebSphere Application Server. f. Starts database and starts Embedded WebSphere Application Server. g. Starts Embedded WebSphere Application Server and verifies it is running. h. Checks that the database is running and starts Embedded WebSphere Application Server. 7. What is the purpose of transaction collectors? i. To convert data for TDS for z/OS j. To add manual or regularly applied usages k. To get usage data from application systems l. To generate statistics on the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 usage 8. Which Integrator stage is always required? a. Sort b. Input c. Aggregator d. CSROutput 160 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 175. 9. If the value for the Report Timeout Script is set to a high value in the Integrated Solutions Console and reports continue to time out, what is the next step to take? a. Delete and recreate the report. b. Have users run the report at a less busy time. c. Create two reports from the one report that is timing out. d. Log in directly to the Web Reporting Server and execute the report that is timing out. 10.What is the minimum requirement before creating or updating a report or spreadsheet? a. The name and at least one rate code b. Only the name of the new report or spreadsheet c. The name, and ensure Visible to All Users is checked d. The name and description of the new report or spreadsheet 11.During database initialization, IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 (TUAM) adds a default user and user group for Web Reporting. What is the name of the default user group? a. Admins b. TUAMUsers c. TUAMAdmins d. Administrators Appendix A. Sample test 161
  • 176. Answer key The following are the answers for the questions in “Sample test” on page 158. 1. A 2. B 3. B 4. D 5. A 6. C 7. B 8. D 9. D 10.A 11.D 162 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 177. Abbreviations and acronyms AIX Advanced Interactive LPAR Logical Partition eXecutive LU Logical Unit AIXAA AIX Advanced Accounting MB Megabyte ARM Application Response MVS Multiple Virtual Storage Measurement ODBC Open Database Connectivity BIRT Business Intelligence and Reporting Tools OGC Office of Government Commerce CMDB Configuration Management Database OS Operating System CPU Central Processing Unit POC Proof of Concept CSR Common Source Format RAF Resource Accounting Facility DB2 Database 2 ROI Return on Investment DDF Distributed Data Facility RPD Remote Product Deployment FTP File Transfer Program SDK Software Development Kit GB Gigabytes SFTP Secure FTP GUI Graphical User Interface SMF System Measurement Facility HFS Hierarchical File System SOA Service-Oriented Architecture HTML Hypertext Markup Language SQL Structured Query Language HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol SSH Secure Shell HTTPS HTTP Secure SSL Secure Socket Layer I/O Input/Output TDS Tivoli Decision Support IBM International Business TPC TotalStorage Productivity Machines Corp. Control IIS Internet Information Server TSO Time Sharing Option IP Internet Protocol TUAM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager ISC Integrated Solution Console TWS Tivoli Workload Scheduler IT Information Technology UDB Universal Database ITIL® Information Technology Infrastructure Library URL Universal Resource Locator ITSO International Technical VCDB Virtual Center database Support Organization VIOS Virtual I/O Server JCL Job Control Language XML eXtensible Markup Language JDBC Java Database Connectivity JVM Java Virtual Machine © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved. 163
  • 178. 164 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 179. Related publications The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a more detailed discussion of the topics covered in this book. IBM Redbooks For information about ordering these publications, see “How to get Redbooks” on page 166. Note that some of the documents referenced here may be available in softcopy only. Deployment Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1, SG24-7569 IBM Tivoli Usage Accounting Manager V7.1 Handbook, SG24-7404 Other publications These publications are also relevant as further information sources: Handbuch zur Server-Konfiguration ESX Server 3.0.1 und VirtualCenter 2.0.1, Artikelnummer: VI-DEU-Q406-314 Installation and Upgrade Guide ESX 3.0.1 and VirtualCenter 2.0.1, VMware Item: VI-ENG-Q306-292 Program Directory for Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS (English) V01.08.00, GI11-4249 Server Configuration Guide ESX Server 3.0.1 and VirtualCenter 2.0.1, VMware Item: VI-ENG-Q206-215 Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Data Collectors for Microsoft Windows User’s Guide Version 6.1.1, SC32-1557 Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Data Collectors for UNIX and Linux User’s Guide Version 6.1.1, SC32-1556 Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Quick Start Guide, GC23-6188 Virtual Infrastructure Web Access Administrator’s Guide ESX Server 3.0.1 and VirtualCenter Server 2.0.1, VMware Item: VI-ENG-Q306-294 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved. 165
  • 180. Online resources These Web sites are also relevant as further information sources: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager publication center http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/tivihelp/v3r1/index.jsp?top ic=/com.ibm.ituam.doc_7.1/welcome.htm IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager Web site http://www-306.ibm.com/software/tivoli/products/usage-accounting/ How to get Redbooks You can search for, view, or download Redbooks, Redpapers, Technotes, draft publications and Additional materials, as well as order hardcopy Redbooks, at this Web site: ibm.com/redbooks Help from IBM IBM Support and downloads ibm.com/support IBM Global Services ibm.com/services 166 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 181. Index certification overview 1 Symbols CIMSDETAIL 36 /opt/ibm/tuam/bin/RunSamples.sh command 75 CIMSDETAILIDENT 36 /opt/ibm/tuam/ewas/profiles/AppSrv01/bin 106 CIMSLOADTRACKING 34, 102 CIMSRATE 73 A CIMSRate 73 account code 82 CIMSRESOURCEUTILIZATION 37 account code hierarchy 82 CIMSSUMMARY 35 account code mapping 123 Cleanup 131 account code structure 27 Client 83 account conversion 123 client budget 90 Account_Code 82 client contact 91 Acct 128 clients 88–89 acct 119 collector selection 29 acct process 128 CollectorInput 121 AcctCntl.txt 129 commands AcctCSR.txt 129 csript.exe 136 Aggregator 121 RunSamples.bat 13 AIXAAInput 121 RunSamples.sh 75 alternate rate 94 startServer.bat 63 ApacheCommonLogFormat 121 stopServer.bat 63 auto logon 144 Common Source Resource, see CSR Console 136 CPU normalization 96 B CreateIdentifierFromIdentifiers 121 Bill 130 CreateIdentifierFromRegEx 122 bill 119 CreateIdentifierFromTable 122 BillDetail.txt 130 CreateIdentifierFromValue 122 BillSummary.txt 130 CreateResourceFromConversion 122 BIRT 12, 31, 158 CreateResourceFromValue 122 Business Intelligence and Reporting Tools, see CSR 113 BIRT CSR Plus Header 80 CSRInput 121 C csript.exe command 136 calendar 88 CurrentCSR.txt 129 certification benefits 3 checklist 5 D data sources 63 job role description 7 DATABASE 121 key areas of competency 7 database 32 objectives 8 database configuration 59 prerequisite skills 7 database initialization 66 recommended study resources 22 database sizing 32 requirements 8 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009. All rights reserved. 167
  • 182. DBLoad 132 Ident.txt 130 dbload 119 IdentifierConversionFromTable 122 DBPurge 133 Identifiers 80 dbpurge 119 IIS 30, 43, 74 defaults directive 117 implementation platform 31 DELIMITED 121 IncludeRecsByDate 122 DropFields 122 IncludeRecsByPresence 122 DropIdentifiers 122 IncludeRecsByValue 122 DropResources 122 installation application server 54 database configuration 59 E Enterprise Collector Pack 67 ECP 12, 67 overview 42 Enterprise Collector Pack, see ECP platform 43 EXCHANGE2007 121 prerequisites 43 ExcludeRecsByDate 122 verification 71 ExcludeRecsByPresence 122 Integrated Solutions Console, see ISC ExcludeRecsByValue 122 integrator 119 integrator program 119 F Internet Information Services, see IIS Feed 82 ISC 13–14, 84 File transfer 134 files C:IBMtuamewasbinopServer.bat 63 J Java C:IBMtuamewasbinstartServer.bat 63 job LoadVMware.xml 111 Java 136 startJobRunner.sh 111 JDBC driver 60 FIXEDFIELD 121 job Acct 128 G Bill 130 graphical user interface, see GUI Cleanup 131–132 GUI 111 Console 136 conversion 135 DBLoad 132 H headeraccountcode 80 DBPurge 133 headeraccountcodelength 80 File transfer 134 headerenddate 80 Mail 128 headerendtime 80 rpd 135 headerrectype 80 Scan 133 headershiftcode 80 Wait file 135 headerstartdate 80 WSF 136 headerstarttime 80 Job conversion 135 heap size 104 job directive 115 HTML 110 job file 110 Hypertext Markup Language, see HTML structure 110 job logs 138 job processing 104 I job role description 7 IBM Professional Certification Program 2 168 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 183. jobs directive 115 R rate 92 rate codes 92 K key areas of competency 7 rate group 92 rate groups 83 rate shift 97 L Rate Table 83 load tracking 102 Redbooks Web site 166 LoadVMware.xml 111 Contact us x logs 138 Remote product deployment 135 RenameFields 123 M REORG 103 Mail 128 report generation 105 mail step 128 report requirements 38 MaxRecords 123 Report Viewer 52 memory 104 reporting 74 Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 51 ResourceConversion 123 Microsoft Installer 49 Resources 81 Microsoft SQL Server Report Viewer 52 return on investment, see ROI ROI 5 RunSamples.bat command 13 N RUNSTATS 103 NCSAInput 121 NotesDatabaseSizeInput 121 NotesEmailInput 121 S NotesUsageInput 121 sample collection verification 75 Scan 133 schedule 88 O shift 97 objectives 8 shutdown 106 administration 16 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, see SMTP configuration 13 SMTP 75 installation 11 Sort 123, 132 job creation 17 startJobRunner.sh 111 planning 8 startServer.bat 63 problem determination 19 startup 106 reporting 21 step directive 118 output files 139 steps directive 118 overview 1 stopServer.bat 63 SYSTEM_ID 82 P paths T /opt/ibm/tuam/ewas/profiles/AppSrv01/bin 106 TDS 121 platform requirements 43 Tivoli Software Professional Certification 4 prerequisite skills 7 Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager 6 process directive 117 TPC 121 processing overview 112 TRANSACTION 121 Prorate 123 tuning 103 proration table 95 Index 169
  • 184. U user administration 84 user and group mapping 86 user creation 85 user role definition 86 V VIO 29 Virtual I/O, see VIO Virtual University Enterprises, see VUE VMWARE 121 VMware ESX server 81 VUE 6 W W3CWinLog 121 Wait file 135 Web application 74 Web reporting 74 WEBSPHEREXDFINEGRAIN 121 WEBSPHEREXDSERVER 121 Windows script file 136 WORK_ID 82 X XML editor 111 XML job 110 170 Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation
  • 185. Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 Implementation (0.2”spine) 0.17”<->0.473” 90<->249 pages
  • 188. Back cover ® Certification Guide Series: IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 ® Implementation Detailed architecture This IBM Redbooks publication is a study guide for the IBM Tivoli Usage and components and Accounting Manager V7.1 certification. It is aimed for IT INTERNATIONAL discussion professional who want to be an IBM Certified Professional for this TECHNICAL product. SUPPORT Installation and IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 certification is offered ORGANIZATION configuration through the IBM Professional Certification program. It is designed to processing validate the skills required of technical professionals who work in the implementation and deployment of IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting BUILDING TECHNICAL Monitoring IT usage Manager V7.1. INFORMATION BASED ON and chargebacks This book provides the necessary information to understand this topic. PRACTICAL EXPERIENCE It includes sample questions that help evaluate personal progress. It familiarizes the readers with the types of questions that may be IBM Redbooks are developed by encountered in the exam. the IBM International Technical Support Organization. Experts This guide does not replace practical experience. This is not designed to from IBM, Customers and be a stand-alone guide for this topic. Instead, this guide should be Partners from around the world combined with educational activities and experiences and used as a create timely technical very useful preparation guide for exam. information based on realistic scenarios. Specific For your convenience, the chapters are based on the certification recommendations are provided objectives of the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager V7.1 to help you implement IT implementation certification test. Those requirements are planning, solutions more effectively in prerequisites, installation, configuration, administration, and problem your environment. determination. Studying each chapter helps you prepare for each objective of the exam. For more information: ibm.com/redbooks SG24-7692-00 ISBN 0738432482